<<

NEWSPRINT AND PAPERS LIMITED Kagithapuram, District, Tamil Nadu

MILL EXPANSION PLAN

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT (EIA) REPORT

March 2008

Prepared by

VIMTA LABS LTD SPB PROJECTS AND CONSULTANCY LTD HYDERABAD PROJECT AT A GLANCE

Project Promoters : Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Kagithapuram 639 136 , Tamil Nadu State

Project : Mill Expansion Plan (MEP)

Concept : Converting the surplus wet-lapped pulp into value-added products by installing a new paper machine #3 with power boiler by establishing more environment-friendly operations

Paper Capacity Increase : From 245,000 tpa to 400,000 tpa.

PROJECT HIGHLIGHTS

Project Cost : Rs 725 Crores

Cost for Environmental : Rs 10 Crores Management

PROJECT OBJECTIVES

 To meet the growing demand for paper in the country and to maintain the leadership in the country and in export of newsprint and P&W papers/fine papers.

 To maintain the status of leading player in Indian Pulp and Paper Industry by achieving 1000 tpd paper production at a single location.

 To adopt energy efficient process and plant & machinery.

 To meet the growing demand for paper in the country.

 To facilitate the manufacture of more grades of environmentally friendly paper/products.

 To develop the existing green belt around the mill further. SALIENT FEATURES

 Installation of a new paper machine (PM #3) having an installed capacity of 155,000 tpa, for the manufacture of surface sized printing and writing and on- machine light-weight coated papers

 Reduction in the overall specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM #3 at the rated production capacity.

 Balancing of chemical bagasse fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 500 tpd to 550 tpd has been planned by installing the following:

• One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp.

• One (1) brown stock washing street for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp.

• One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp capacity.

 Balancing of hard wood fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 300 tpd to 330 tpd by upgrading pumps and pipe lines, as considered necessary.

 Installation of new coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph to supplement the additional steam demand.

 Installation of high efficiency electrostatic precipitator for the new coal fired boiler.

 Adequate pollution control measures to minimise adverse impacts on the environment.

 Improvements in wastewater treatment system with one additional secondary clarifier to take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifiers.

SOCIAL COMMITMENT

On the social and community development front, TNPL has been committed to social responsibility in helping farmers and other inhabitants of the hamlets in and around the mill site as stated below. supply

 Provision of drinking water to all the five villages covered under TNPL Effluent Water Lift Irrigation Scheme (TEWLIS).

 TNPL’s contribution in the construction of service reservoir of 2.5 lakh litre capacity for distribution of drinking water to ten hamlets under Kagithapuram Town Panchayat.

 TNPL’s contribution in the construction of service reservoir of one lakh litre capacity and laying of new pipelines for the villages under Punjai Thottakurichi Town Panchayat.

 Provision of taps at Ponnia Goundanpudur and construction of 25000 litre capacity ground level reservoir at Velliyampalayam and extension of pipelines to Kariampatti.

 Execution of pipeline work for drinking water supply to certain areas in Velayuthampalayam.

Road Development Works

 Velayuthampalayam four road junction work including expansion.

 Construction of traffic island in Velayuthampalayam.

 Funding in two phases during the financial years 1999-2000 and 2000-2001 for improvement/formation of roads in various village panchayats nearby.

 Renewal of Black Topped (BT) road branching from Velayuthampalayam-Noyyal main road upto well.

 Construction of retaining wall portion on the road side near culverts at Nadu Nanaparappu intake village. Social Welfare

 TNPL has plans to institutionalise the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities so that the CSR transforms itself into personal Social Responsibility for the personnel manning the factory. With this in mind, the company has set apart an amount of Rs. 50 lakh for the year 2007-2008 for the following activities:

• TNPL Trauma Care Centre at a cost of Rs. 20 lakh is planned to be built and necessary equipment will be provided to the Centre at a cost of Rs. 5 lakh

• Uplift the abutting villages through village adoption scheme. A sum of Rs. 5 lakh will be set apart for this purpose every year.

• Under the Women & Child Welfare Scheme, a sum of Rs. 5 lakh has been earmarked.

• Financial assistance to economically weaker sections to pursue their education. A sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided for this purpose.

• Under CSR, it has become the primary responsibility of TNPL to ensure that all the children in the rural areas are provided with education to avoid any dropouts. To encourage the parents and to supplement their needs, it is proposed to provide uniforms and footwear to the children studying in Elementary Schools in and around TNPL. Initially, it is proposed to provide such facilities at a cost of Rs. 1 lakh.

• Under Special Prize scheme to student belonging to SC/MBC/BC, a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be set apart for this purpose

• Under sports promotion scheme, a sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided towards purchase of sports materials and to meet the expenditure towards coaches etc.

• Under training of students to pursue competitive examination, a sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided

• Assistance to TEWLIS farmers (Visit of 5 formers to places to learn about innovate farming and marketing), a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be provided

• Under Women’s Self Help Group (Hollow block manufacturing), a sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided

• For Apparel Training Centre for unemployed, a sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided • Career development Centre – Library (one employee will be sent abroad every year), a sum of Rs. 2 lakh will be provided

• Life enrichment skills (Promotions of Social Welfare), a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be provided

• Assistance to differently abled persons (prosthetics & supporting aids), a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be provided

• Under Promotion of Rural Arts & Crafts, a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be provided

• Under Establishment of Tamil Arts, Literature & Cultural Development Centre, a sum of Rs. 1 lakh will be provided

 Regular medical camps and eye-camps in the surrounding villages to provide treatment with free supply of medicines and highlight the aspects of hygiene and good health.

 Adoption/Maintenance of primary health centre, Punnam (each financial year).

 Provision of furniture and scientific equipment to nearby schools.

 Repair works to school buildings.

 Children’s park at Velliannai village, Samathuvapuram.

 Construction/Renovation of places of worship.

 Contribution to sports/cultural activities.

 Flood-relief fund to Thavittupalayam villagers who were affected by overflow of Cauvery water.

Other Activities

 Construction of retaining wall and pipe culverts, earthen drains excavation etc., in the TEWLIS area for a length of 22.5 km to solve the chronic drainage problems.

 Desilting the canal near Thalavapalayam in Thottakuruchi Town Panchayat. Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER # TITLE PAGE #

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ...... C1-1 1.1 Project Profile ...... C1-1 1.2 Facilities under MEP...... C1-2 1.3 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental ...... C1-4 Management Plan (EMP) 1.4 Conclusions ...... C1-6

2 BACKGROUND ...... C2-1 2.1 Project Promoters ...... C2-2 2.2 Need for MEP...... C2-2 2.3 Social Development Activities ...... C2-5 2.4 Project Site ...... C2-6 2.5 Environmental Setting of the Site...... C2-9 2.6 Scope of the Present Study ...... C2-10 2.7 Compliance to Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by MoEF ...... C2-10 2.8 Methodology of the Study ...... C2-11 2.9 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report ...... C2-13

3 Administrative and Legislative framework ...... C3-1 3.1 Administrative and Legislative Background...... C3-1 3.2 Environmental Regulations ...... C3-3 3.3 Regulations, Standards and Conditions followed by ...... C3-7 The Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board (TNPCB) 3.4 Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 ...... C3-14 with subsequent Amendments 2000, 2002 and 2003 3.5 Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) ...... C3-15

4 PROJECT DETAILS AND SOURCES OF POLLUTION...... C4-1 4.1 Introduction ...... C4-1 4.2 Project Category ...... C4-1 4.3 Layout of the Proposed Project ...... C4-1 4.4 Land Requirement...... C4-1 4.5 Process Description ...... C4-1 4.6 Details of Existing Process...... C4-2 4.7 Details of Proposed Expansion ...... C4-49 4.8 Materials and Resources Requirement ...... C4-61 4.9 Process Chemicals...... C4-67 4.10 Proposed schedule for Implementation ...... C4-70 4.11 Capital Costs ...... C4-70 4.12 Sources of Pollution...... C4-71

5 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS ...... C5-1

5.1 Introduction ...... C5-1 5.2 Geology and Hydro-Geology...... C5-1 5.3 Micro-Meteorology ...... C5-3 5.4 Ambient Air Quality ...... C5-17 5.5 Water Quality ...... C5-30 5.6 Soil Characteristics...... C5-39 5.7 Noise Level Survey...... C5-45 5.8 Ecological Studies ...... C5-55 5.9 Land Use Studies ...... C5-83 5.10 Demography and Socio-Economics...... C5-86 5.11 Places of Historical and Tourist Importance ...... C5-89

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited TOC-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

CHAPTER # TITLE ...... PAGE #

6 IMPACT ASSESSMENT ...... C6-1 6.1 Introduction ...... C6-1 6.2 Impact During Construction Phase ...... C6-1 6.3 Impacts during Operation ...... C6-4

7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... C7-1

7.1 Introduction ...... C7-1 7.2 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures ...... C7-2 7.3 Environmental Management during Construction ...... C7-4 7.4 Management during Operational Stage ...... C7-7

8 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING ...... C8-1

8.1 Monitoring and Reporting Procedure...... C8-2 8.2 Infrastructure for Environmental Protection...... C8-6

9 Environment Management and Training...... C9-1

9.1 Introduction ...... C9-1 9.2 Formation of an Environmental Management System ...... C9-1 9.3 Implementation of an Environmental Management System ...... C9-2 9.4 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures...... C9-9 9.5 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Management ...... C9-10 9.6 Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management...... C9-11

10 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... C10-1

10.1 Introduction ...... C10-1 10.2 Scope of the Study ...... C10-2 10.3 Approach to the Study...... C10-3 10.4 Hazard Identification ...... C10-5 10.5 Visualisation of MCA Scenarios ...... C10-10 10.6 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation ...... C10-12 10.7 Disaster Management Plan ...... C10-31 10.8 Emergencies...... C10-32 10.9 Emergency Organisation ...... C10-33 10.10 Emergency Responsibilities ...... C10-34 10.11 Emergency Facilities...... C10-38 10.12 Emergency Actions...... C10-41 10.13 General ...... C10-42 10.14 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan ...... C10-43

11 SOURCES OF DATA AND INFORMATION ...... C11-1

12 REFERENCES...... C12-1

Annexes

1 Ambient Air Quality Levels – Winter 2008 2 Ground Water and Surface Water Quality 3 Soil Quality for Treated Wastewater Irrigated Area 4 Ecological Details 5 Village-wise Landuse Pattern 6 Demographical Details 7 Existing data on the total water consumption with AOX levels 8 Note on the follow up of the CREP Guidelines with Odour Control 9 Schematic flow diagram of wastewater treatment plant after MEP

TOC-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Appendix

1 MoEF Notification 2006 2 Mill layout 3 Point-wise compliance details of conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance accorded by MOEF

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited TOC-3 Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1 Project Profile

Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) owns and operates an integrated pulp and paper manufacturing facility at Kagithapuram in the State of Tamil Nadu. TNPL was promoted by the Government of Tamil Nadu for the manufacture of newsprint and printing and writing (P&W) papers, using bagasse as the principal fibre source. The mill, located at Kagithapuram in Karur District (about 400 km south west of Chennai), was commissioned in October 1985 with an installed capacity of 90,000 tpa of newsprint/P&W paper to meet the twin objectives of conserving the fast depleting forest resources and to promote use of annually renewable raw material.

TNPL achieved commendable production performance/productivity levels and posted impressive operating results within a short period of its inception.

TNPL commissioned its second paper machine in 1996 to increase the installed capacity to 180,000 tpa, with a ‘swing’ option to manufacture newsprint or fine papers, depending on the market conditions.

During 2002, the paper machine#1 was retrofitted/ upgraded, resulting in a significant increase in the annual installed capacity, to 205,000 tpa.

The mill has always strived to attain best possible standards of quality, by practising ISO 9001:2000 standards in the manufacturing operations. The mill has established an Environment Management System (EMS) complying with ISO 14001 standards and has been acknowledged by the Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) by awarding the “THREE GREEN LEAVES” under “GREEN RATING PROJECT”. The award of Excellence in Corporate Governance to TNPL stands as ample testimony to the overall operational efficiencies, transparency in mill functioning and social commitment of the mill. TNPL has been granted `Eco’ label licence for the plain copier paper as per IS 14490-97 by Bureau of Indian Standards.

Consistent with its environment friendly and quality conscious development policy, TNPL had taken up its Mill Development Plan (MDP) to establish new ECF fibre lines (for both hardwood and chemical bagasse pulping streets) and chemical recovery island to make the operations more environment- friendly.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited 1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Installation of a new ECF fibreline for hardwood pulping, conversion of the existing chemical bagasse bleach plants to ECF bleaching sequence, establishment of related chemical preparation facilities to meet the requirements of the new ECF fibre lines, and augmentation/new facilities in chemical recovery island are being carried out. The mill has obtained the Environmental Clearance for the ongoing MDP which shall increase the production level to 245,000 tpa and wet-lapping of 45,000 tpa surplus pulp and market the same. The implementation of this MDP is nearing completion.

Based on the performance in the current year and its anticipated performance in future years, TNPL now proposes to convert the surplus wet-lapped pulp into value-added products by installing a new paper machine (PM #3) of capacity 155,000 tpa along with its accessories and auxiliaries, and also balancing the back end, viz. bagasse and hardwood pulping streets and the utilities, under a Mill Expansion Plan (MEP). This MEP after implementation shall place TNPL as the only mill in with paper production of 1000 tpd at single location.

The additional steam requirement will be met by increased steam generation, with the installation of an energy-efficient coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph. The existing power generation capacity is considered adequate for meeting the expansion requirements as well.

The total fresh water requirement after implementation of the proposed MEP will increase to 53,970 m3 per day, from a post MDP level of 41,380 m3/day, as per the Consent issued for ongoing expansion plan. The wastewater discharge will be 41,405 m 3/day.

All the project facilities will be installed in the existing site. No additional land needs to be acquired.

The ongoing MDP is nearing completion and the proposed MEP is intended to take off dovetailing the completion of MDP. The environmental scenario as achieved post MDP will continue to prevail unaltered post MEP too, without any adverse impact on the environment.

2 Facilities under MEP

TNPL proposes to install a new paper machine (PM #3), having an installed capacity of 155,000 tpa, for the manufacture of surface sized printing and writing and on-machine light-weight coated papers. The proposed paper machine will have facilities to produce different grades of coated and uncoated papers.

The objectives of the installation of PM #3 are as follows:

2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Add coated paper production capability to meet increasing future demands expected for surface-sized printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated papers.

 Designate PM #3 for SS printing and writing, copier and on-machine lightweight coated paper production.

 Design PM #3 for low water consumption to reduce the overall specific fresh water requirement.

 Reduce the overall specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM #3 at the rated production capacity.

Along with installation of PM #3, it is also proposed to balance the backend, viz. chemical bagasse and hardwood pulp mills and the utilities section, as described below

 Balancing of chemical bagasse fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 500 tpd to 550 tpd has been planned by installing the following:

• One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp.

• One (1) brown stock washing street for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp.

• One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp capacity.

 Balancing of hard wood fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 300 tpd to 330 tpd has been planned by upgrading pumps and pipe lines, as considered necessary

 Installation of new coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph to supplement the additional steam demand.

 Installation of high efficiency electrostatic precipitator for the new coal fired boiler.

 Adequate pollution control measures to minimise adverse impacts on the environment.

 Improvements in wastewater treatment system with one additional secondary clarifier to take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifiers.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited 3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

3 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

Comprehensive Environmental Impact Assessment (CEIA) has been conducted during September 2004-September 2005. CEIA has been upgraded using baseline field data monitored again during January 2008. The January 2008 data has been monitored as per TOR conditions of MoEF.

The existing baseline data as represented in upgraded CEIA including winter season 2008 data has been used for predicting the anticipated environmental impact on the surroundings.

Construction Phase

The construction activities of new installations will not necessitate any displacement of people, cutting of vegetation, etc., as the construction will be carried out within the existing mill premises. This phase does not involve major changes in the terrain.

Operation Phase

Air Environment

 The major pollutants from the mill after MEP are suspended

particulate matter (SPM) and sulphur dioxide (SO 2) from the new power boiler

The air dispersion modelling has been carried out for two scenarios using meteorological data monitored during the month of January 2008 at site, based on existing base line data.

The maximum net incremental GLCs due to the MEP for SO 2 and SPM are

superimposed on the baseline SO 2 and SPM concentrations recorded during the study to arrive at the realistic baseline concentrations for the proposed MEP project.

The details of the resultant concentration of SPM and SO 2 are furnished in the table below, for industrial as well as residential zone.

Pollutant Maximum AAQ Realistic Net incremental Final Resultant Concentrations baseline concentrations Concentrations Recorded concentratio due to Post - (µµµg/m 3) During Baseline ns after MDP MEP ( µµµg/m 3) Study ( µµµg/m3) (µµµg/m 3) Industrial Zone SPM 190.8 189.9 0.9 190.8

SO 2 26.8 30.8 11.0 41.8

4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Pollutant Maximum AAQ Realistic Net incremental Final Resultant Concentrations baseline concentrations Concentrations Recorded concentratio due to Post - (µµµg/m 3) During Baseline ns after MDP MEP ( µµµg/m 3) Study ( µµµg/m3) (µµµg/m 3) Residential Zone SPM 180.1 179.2 0.3 179.5

SO 2 21.8 25.8 3.1 28.7

A perusal of the above table clearly reveals that SPM and SO 2 are likely to be within the prescribed limits specified by CPCB for industrial zone and residential zone, thus showing insignificant impact due to the expansion.

Water Environment

In the plant, water is used mainly for paper machine, pulp mill apart from cooling water requirement and domestic purposes. The total water requirement of the mill and colony, at 53,970 m³/day, will be met from river Cauvery. The additional water requirement for MEP will continue to be met from river Cauvery. The water drawal shall be within the Consented Quantity and hence, no permission for additional drawal of surface water is required.

The existing wastewater treatment plant is proposed to be augmented with the installation of additional primary and secondary clarifiers. The mill shall also consider installation of suitable filtration systems for recovery of fibre and to ensure effective recycling of water at paper machine itself.

Wastewater will continue to be treated, to conform to the statutory standards of state pollution control board and MoEF before discharging on land for irrigation.

The quality of water resources in the study area will not be adversely affected.

Solid Waste

The solid waste from the coal-fired boilers is mainly fly ash and bottom ash.

 The expected total fly ash generated from the coal-fired boilers is about 240 tonnes per day. Fly ash generated is being given to cement manufacturers. Part of the lime sludge, being disposed of as purge for non-process elements especially silica, is being given to cement manufacturers. The mill, as part of its commitment for Environmental upkeep, intends to install a mini-cement plant for

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited 5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

reusing the fly ash along with excess lime sludge generated which need disposal. In post MEP operations also it is proposed to re-burn the lime sludge in the lime mud reburning kilns. The pith and chipper dust generated are being used as fuel in boilers. The WWTP sludge will be thickened through dewatering machines and the cake will be given to small cardboard manufacturers

 The mill is installing a dedicated sludge dewatering machine for dewatering the sludge upto a dryness level of 50%. This sludge shall be fired in the boilers.

 Hence, no adverse impacts due to solid waste generation are envisaged

Soil Environment

An estimation of physico-chemical analysis of existing soil environment indicates no adverse impact on soil quality due to future activities of the mill.

Noise Environment

 The baseline noise level (L eq ) recorded is about 54.7 dB(A) and the predicted incremental noise level at the boundary due to the operation of MEP is likely to be <40 dB(A). Therefore, the noise due to operation of the project will not have any bearing on the baseline noise levels due to masking effect.

 According to the Factories Act 1948 and Tamil Nadu Factory Rules 1950 Standards, the allowable noise level for the workers is 90 dB(A) for 8 hours’ exposure a day. Therefore, adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs to the workers working in high noise areas need to be provided. In addition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas could be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which the equipment are to be located, adding sound barriers, use of enclosures with suitable absorption material etc. Further, in addition to the in-plant noise control measures, all the open areas within the plant premises and all along the plant boundary are to be provided with adequate greenbelt to diffuse the noise levels.

6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Socio-Economics

The land required for the construction under the proposed project is already under the possession of TNPL. There will not be any resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be any adverse socio-economic implications. The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as there will be direct/indirect employment generation during construction and operational phases.

Risk Assessment & Disaster Management

The preliminary risk assessment of the plant has identified no hazardous events, which would project damaging energies outside of the plant boundary. Events identified for offsite facilities are estimated to occur at extremely low incident frequencies and/or not to significant levels of consequence. Management of hazardous event scenarios and risks in general can be adequately managed to acceptable levels.

4 Conclusions

Growth and development, in harmony with the environment, has always been the approach of TNPL.

The conclusions of EIA are:

 The Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is structured to be inline with the requirements of MoEF/CPCB/TNPCB.

 Community impacts will be beneficial, as the project will generate economic benefits for the locality.

 Continued improvement in wastewater treatment facilities coupled with high efficiency electrostatic precipitator results in minimising the impacts on environment.

With the effective implementation of the Environment Management Plan (EMP) during the planning, design, construction and operation phases, the expansion can proceed without any negative impact.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited 7 Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1 Project Profile

Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) owns and operates an integrated pulp and paper manufacturing facility at Kagithapuram in the State of Tamil Nadu. TNPL was promoted by the Government of Tamil Nadu for the manufacture of newsprint and printing and writing (P&W) papers, using bagasse as the principal fibre source. The mill, located at Kagithapuram in Karur District (about 400 km south west of Chennai), was commissioned in October 1985 with an installed capacity of 90,000 tpa of newsprint/P&W paper to meet the twin objectives of conserving the fast depleting forest resources and to promote use of annually renewable raw material.

TNPL achieved commendable production performance/productivity levels and posted impressive operating results within a short period of its inception.

TNPL commissioned its second paper machine in 1996 to increase the installed capacity to 180,000 tpa, with a ‘swing’ option to manufacture newsprint or fine papers, depending on the market conditions.

During 2002, the paper machine#1 was retrofitted/ upgraded, resulting in a significant increase in the annual installed capacity, to 205,000 tpa.

The mill has always strived to attain best possible standards of quality, by practising ISO 9001:2000 standards in the manufacturing operations. The mill has established an Environment Management System (EMS) complying with ISO 14001 standards and has been acknowledged by the Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) by awarding the “THREE GREEN LEAVES” under “GREEN RATING PROJECT”. The award of Excellence in Corporate Governance to TNPL stands as ample testimony to the overall operational efficiencies, transparency in mill functioning and social commitment of the mill. TNPL has been granted `Eco’ label licence for the plain copier paper as per IS 14490-97 by Bureau of Indian Standards.

Consistent with its environment friendly and quality conscious development policy, TNPL had taken up its Mill Development Plan (MDP) to establish new ECF fibre lines (for both hardwood and chemical bagasse pulping streets) and chemical recovery island to make the operations more environment- friendly.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C1-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Installation of a new ECF fibreline for hardwood pulping, conversion of the existing chemical bagasse bleach plants to ECF bleaching sequence, establishment of related chemical preparation facilities to meet the requirements of the new ECF fibre lines, and augmentation/new facilities in chemical recovery island are being carried out. The mill has obtained the Environmental Clearance for the ongoing MDP which shall increase the production level to 245,000 tpa and wet-lapping of 45,000 tpa surplus pulp and market the same. The implementation of this MDP is in almost completion stage.

Based on the performance in the current year and its anticipated performance in future years, TNPL now proposes to convert the surplus wet-lapped pulp into value-added products by installing a new paper machine (PM #3) of capacity 155,000 tpa along with its accessories and auxiliaries, and also balancing the back end, viz. bagasse and hardwood pulping streets and the utilities, under a Mill Expansion Plan (MEP). This MEP after implementation shall place TNPL as the only mill in India with paper production of 1000 tpd at single location.

The additional steam requirement will be met by increased steam generation, with the installation of an energy-efficient coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph. The existing power generation capacity is considered adequate for meeting the expansion requirements as well.

The total fresh water requirement after implementation of the proposed MEP will increase to 53,970 m³ per day, from a post MDP level of 41,380 m3/day, as per the Consent issued for ongoing expansion plan. The wastewater discharge will be 41,405 m 3/day.

All the project facilities will be installed in the existing site. No additional land needs to be acquired.

The ongoing MDP is nearing completion and the proposed MEP is intended to take off dovetailing the completion of MDP. The environmental scenario as achieved post MDP will continue to prevail unaltered post MEP too, without any adverse impact on the environment.

1.2 Facilities under MEP

TNPL proposes to install a new paper machine (PM #3), having an installed capacity of 155,000 tpa, for the manufacture of surface sized printing and writing and on-machine light-weight coated papers. The proposed paper machine will have facilities to produce different grades of coated and uncoated papers.

The objectives of the installation of PM #3 are as follows:

C1-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Add coated paper production capability to meet increasing future demands expected for surface-sized printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated papers

 Designate PM #3 for SS printing and writing, copier and on-machine lightweight coated paper production

 Design PM #3 for low water consumption to reduce the overall specific fresh water requirement

 Reduce the overall specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM #3 at the rated production capacity

Along with installation of PM #3, it is also proposed to balance the backend, viz. chemical bagasse and hardwood pulp mills and the utilities section, as described below

 Balancing of chemical bagasse fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 500 tpd to 550 tpd

• One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) brown stock washing street for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp capacity.

 Balancing of hard wood fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 300 tpd to 330 tpd has been planned by upgrading pumps and pipe lines, as considered necessary

 Installation of new coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph to supplement the additional steam demand.

 Installation of high efficiency electrostatic precipitator for the new coal fired boiler.

 Adequate pollution control measures to minimise adverse impacts on the environment.

 Improvements in wastewater treatment system with one additional secondary clarifier to take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifiers

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C1-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

1.3 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

Comprehensive Environmental Impact Assessment (CEIA) has been conducted during September 2004-September 2005. CEIA has been upgraded using baseline field data monitored again during January 2008. The January 2008 data has been monitored as per TOR conditions of MoEF.

The existing baseline data as represented in upgraded CEIA including winter season 2008 data has been used for predicting the anticipated environmental impact on the surroundings.

Construction Phase

The construction activities of new installations will not necessitate any displacement of people, cutting of vegetation, etc., as the construction will be carried out within the existing mill premises. This phase does not involve major changes in the terrain.

Operation Phase

Air Environment

The major pollutants from the mill after the proposed expansion are

suspended particulate matter (SPM) and sulphur dioxide (SO 2) from the new power boiler. The air dispersion modelling has been carried out for using meteorological data monitored at site, based on existing base line data.

The ambient air quality levels for SPM and SO 2 are well below the permissible limits, thus showing insignificant impact due to the expansion.

Water Environment

The additional water requirement for MEP will continue to be met from river Cauvery. The water drawal shall be within the Consented Quantity and hence, no permission for additional drawal of surface water is required.

The existing wastewater treatment plant is proposed to be augmented with the installation of additional primary and secondary clarifiers. The mill shall also consider installation of suitable filtration systems for recovery of fibre and to ensure effective recycling of water at paper machine itself.

Wastewater will continue to be treated, to conform to the statutory standards of state pollution control board and MoEF before discharging on land for irrigation.

C1-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The quality of water resources in the study area will not be adversely affected.

Solid Waste

The solid waste from the coal-fired boilers is mainly fly ash and bottom ash.

The expected total fly ash generated from the coal-fired boilers is about 240 tonnes per day. The mill, as part of its commitment for Environmental upkeep, intends to install a mini-cement plant for reusing the fly ash along with excess lime sludge generated which need disposal.

The mill is installing a dedicated sludge dewatering machine for dewatering the sludge upto a dryness level of 50%. This sludge shall be fired in the boilers.

Hence, no adverse impacts due to solid waste generation are envisaged.

Soil Environment

An estimation of physico-chemical analysis of existing soil environment indicates no adverse impact on soil quality due to future activities of the mill.

Noise Environment

The baseline noise level (L eq ) recorded is about 54.7 dB(A) and the predicted incremental noise level at the boundary due to the operation of MEP is likely to be <40 dB(A). Therefore, the noise due to operation of the project will not have any bearing on the baseline noise levels due to masking effect.

According to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, the allowable noise level for the workers is 90 dB(A) for 8 hours’ exposure a day. Therefore, adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs to the workers working in high noise areas need to be provided.

In addition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas could be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which the equipment are to be located, adding sound barriers, use of enclosures with suitable absorption material etc. Further, in addition to the in-plant noise control measures, all the open areas within the plant premises and all along the plant boundary are to be provided with adequate greenbelt to diffuse the noise levels.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C1-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Socio-Economics

The land required for the construction under the proposed project is already under the possession of TNPL. There will not be any resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be any adverse socio-economic implications. The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as there will be direct/indirect employment generation during construction and operational phases.

Risk Assessment & Disaster Management

The preliminary risk assessment of the plant has identified no hazardous events, which would project damaging energies outside of the plant boundary. Events identified for offsite facilities are estimated to occur at extremely low incident frequencies and/or not to significant levels of consequence. Management of hazardous event scenarios and risks in general can be adequately managed to acceptable levels.

1.4 Conclusions

Growth and development, in harmony with the environment, has always been the approach of TNPL.

The conclusions of EIA are:

 The Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is structured to be inline with the requirements of MoEF/CPCB/TNPCB.

 Community impacts will be beneficial, as the project will generate economic benefits for the locality.

 Continued improvement in wastewater treatment facilities coupled with high efficiency electrostatic precipitator results in minimising the impacts on environment.

With the effective implementation of the Environment Management Plan (EMP) during the planning, design, construction and operation phases, the expansion can proceed without any negative impact.

C1-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

2 BACKGROUND

Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) was promoted by the Government of Tamil Nadu for the manufacture of newsprint and printing and writing (P&W) papers, using bagasse as the principal fibre source. About 20% of its P&W paper production is exported. Over the years, the mill has been improving its environmental performance by adopting various measures. Apart from its sound technical and financial performance, TNPL has always strived to attain best possible standards of quality, by practising ISO 9001:2000 standards in the manufacturing operations. The mill operations are environment friendly and conform to pollution abatement norms that are superior to the state and national standards. The mill has established an Environment Management System (EMS) complying with ISO 14001 standards. As a testimony of TNPL’s commitment to the protection of the environment, World Wide Fund for Nature India has accorded permission to TNPL to use it “Panda” logo in TNPL’s branded products. TNPL’s environmental compliance has been acknowledged by the Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) by awarding the “THREE GREEN LEAVES” under “GREEN RATING PROJECT”. The award of Excellence in Corporate Governance to TNPL stands as ample testimony to the overall operational efficiencies, transparency in mill functioning and social commitment of the mill. TNPL has been granted `Eco’ label licence for the plain copier paper as per IS 14490-97 by Bureau of Indian Standards.

The mill is implementing a comprehensive Mill Development Plan (MDP) to meet the requirements of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) as part of the mill’s compliance to the Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) as applicable to pulp and paper industries. The ongoing expansion is to achieve the target set by the CREP .

Under the ongoing MDP, TNPL has installed 300 tpd Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) chemical hardwood pulp line and a 500 tpd Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) chemical bagasse bleach plant to replace the existing chlorine based bleach plants.

However, to be a leading player in the Indian Pulp and Paper Industry, the mill intends to install a new paper machine of capacity 155,000 tpa along with the balancing of bagasse pulp mill for a capacity of 550 tpd of bleached pulp. The hardwood pulp mill shall have balancing facilities for a production of 330 tpd bleached pulp production. The total finished paper production will increase from 245,000 tpa to 400,000 tpa. In conformity with the guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), TNPL has embarked on Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for the proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP).

SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited (SPB-PC), Chennai, association with

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Vimta Labs, Hyderabad, has been retained to undertake in, a study of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and prepare an Environmental Management Plan for various environmental components which may be affected due to the impacts arising out of the proposed MEP.

2.1 Project Promoters

The Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) have its manufacturing facilities at Kagithapuram, near Pugalur of , Karur District, Tamil Nadu State. Its Corporate Office is located at Chennai.

TNPL proposes to modernise and expand the operations of the unit located at Kagithapuram with a view to improve technology, energy efficiency, marketability, and long-term environmental compliance. TNPL has ISO 9001-2000 and ISO 14001-2004 certification.

From the inception, TNPL has always been a responsible player in the paper industry, by

 Adopting environment-friendly processes as far as practicable

 Being quality conscious - in products, processes, service & people

 Continuously enhancing the value for all stakeholders, and

 Upholding societal values and expectations.

The driving force for the Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is a combination of quest for improved environmental performance and sustained mill operations with improved productivity.

2.2 Need for MEP

2.2.1 Project Rationale

The objectives of the proposed expansion are

 To maintain the status of leading player in Indian Pulp and Paper Industry by achieving 1000 tpd paper production at a single location.

 To adopt energy efficient process and plant & machinery.

 To meet the growing demand for paper in the country.

 To facilitate the manufacture of more grades of environmentally friendly paper/products.

With steady increase in input costs and a continuous competition from the

C2-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

new units with better quality products apart from the threat of dumping from overseas manufacturers, the mill has to find ways and means to meet these challenges and for its continued economically viable operation for sustenance.

TNPL proposes to install a new paper machine (PM #3), having an installed capacity of 155,000 tpa, for the manufacture of surface sized printing and writing and on-machine light-weight coated papers. The proposed paper machine will have facilities to produce different grades of coated and uncoated papers.

The objectives of the installation of PM #3 are as follows:

 Add coated paper production capability to meet increasing future demands expected for surface-sized printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated papers

 Designate PM #3 for SS printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated paper production.

In the process of achieving the above objection, TNPL will

 Design PM #3 for low water consumption to reduce the overall specific fresh water requirement

 Reduce the specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM #3 at the rated production capacity.

Along with installation of PM #3, it is also proposed to balance the backend, viz. chemical bagasse and hardwood pulp mills and the utilities section, as described below

 Balancing of chemical bagasse fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 500 tpd to 550 tpd

• One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) brown stock washing street for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp capacity.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Balancing of hard wood fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 300 tpd to 330 tpd has been planned by upgrading pumps and pipe lines, as considered necessary

 Installation of new coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph to supplement the additional steam demand.

 Installation of high efficiency electrostatic precipitator for the new coal fired boiler.

 Adequate pollution control measures to minimise adverse impacts on the environment.

 Improvements in wastewater treatment system with one additional secondary clarifier to take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifiers.

The estimated capital outlay for the proposed MEP is about Rs 725 crores, which will be spent on plant and machinery including the pollution control systems and environmental management.

2.2.2 Environmental Considerations

2.2.2.1 Environmentally Friendly Processes

Adoption of more environmentally friendly processes has been given a high priority. The project shall ensure improving the performance levels of the production units. The aim is to achieve the ultimate target of the environmental standards set by MoEF, CPCB and TNPCB.

The mill is already implementing an expansion plan for compliance to CREP. Major process modification involving substantial capital investment is being carried out, as per MOEF's Environmental Clearance.

The proposed expansion plan of the mill shall ensure continued compliance with all applicable environmental laws and regulations.

To minimise the solid waste disposal, the mill as a separate project intends to install a cement mill for reusing the fly ash and excess lime sludge, thus avoiding the disposal requirements.

2.2.2.2 Green Belt

With a view to mitigate the adverse environmental effect on surroundings and to provide an environmental cover from emissions, green belts are developed in and around the mill.

C2-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The plantation and green belt development in an industrial area not only serves as foreground and background landscape features resulting in harmonising and amalgamating the physical structures of a pulp and paper mill with the surrounding environment but also acts as a pollutant sink. Plantation also contributes towards environmental improvement, by:

 Acting as a “pollution sink” and preventing the particulate and other atmospheric pollutants from spreading to the nearby areas

 Providing vegetative cover

 Increasing the aesthetics of the surroundings, and

 Providing resting, feeding and breeding site for fauna.

Extensive plantation has been done under green belt development for the existing plant. Green belt has been developed and well maintained along the internal roads and mill area. The mill has made elaborate arrangement in developing green belt inside the mill. Plantation has been developed in an area of 66 acres and the total number of trees in this area is 58385 in side the mill. Colony area has 55137 trees in an area spread over 98 acres for this purpose. Additionally, green belt in an area of 109 acres has been developed in the Moolimangalam area and 98100 trees are planted. TNPL is committed to greening of dry barren wasteland. Around 300 various flowering trees are planted as avenue trees on local roads involving local population to create awareness among the public.

2.2.3 Energy Efficiency

The steep increase in the administered prices of fuel and power has made it absolutely necessary that any fuel and power intensive industrial operation shall have to perform at the most energy-efficient levels. Steam generation at higher pressure will provide the mill with very attractive economics in steam and power generation.

2.3 Social Development Activities

On the social and community development front, TNPL has been committed to social responsibility in helping farmers and other inhabitants of the hamlets in and around the mill. TNPL has spent about Rs 5.73 crores for the community development activities including the amount of Rs 50 lakhs spent during the year 2007-08.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

2.4 Project Site

Adequate land with basic infrastructure is available within the existing plant for implementation of the Mill Expansion Plan. The proposed mill expansion area is located within the existing plant premises at Pugalur-Kagithapuram in the district of Karur, Tamil Nadu State. The site is located at the intersection of longitude 77 o49’25’’E and latitude 11 o3’10’’ N and falls under Survey of India Top sheet No 58E/16, F13, I/4 and J/1.

The site is about 400 km (aerial) from Chennai, the State Capital and it is about 15 km from Karur, the District Headquarters. The National Highway NH-7, which connects Salem with Karur, is at 3 km in northeast direction from the plant site. The index map of the project area is shown in Figure 2.1 and the study area map of 10 km radius around TNPL is depicted in Figure 2.2.

C2-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 2.1 INDEX MAP OF THE PROJECT AREA

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 2.2 STUDY AREA MAP – 10 KM RADIUS

C2-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

2.5 Environmental Setting of the Site

The details of environmental setting around the proposed MEP site are given in the following table.

ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

Sl. No. Particulars Details

1 Location Town/Village Pugalur District Karur State Tamil Nadu 2 Latitude 11 o 3’ 10’’ N 3 Longitude 77 o 49’ 25” E

4 Elevation above mean sea level (MSL) 150m 5 Climatic conditions as per IMD Salem Predominant Annual Wind Direction : East, Southwest, and West Annual mean Max Temp: 33.5 oc Annual mean Min Temp : 22.6 o C

6 Present land use at the proposed site Industrial 7 Nearest Highway/Road NH-7 connecting Salem to Karur (3 km NE) 8 Defence Installations None within 10 km radius 9 Nearest railway station Pugalur R.S 10 Nearest airport/air strip Thiruchirapalli

11 Nearest village Pugalur 12 Nearest town Karur 13 Nearest river Cauvery River 14 Hills/valleys Some hillocks are present nearby 15 Archaeologically important places Nil in 10 km radius 16 Nearest place of tourist/ Religious Kalyana Venkatasami Temple, importance Thanthonimalai. Pasupatheswarar Temple Karur 17 Ecologically sensitive areas (National No sensitive areas within 10km radius Parks/Wildlife sanctuaries/bio-sphere reserves) 18 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km None within 10km radius radius 19 List of Industries EID Parry, some small scale industries 20 Topography of the plant site Plain

21 Nature of soil Silty 22 Major crops in the study area Sugarcane, Paddy

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

2.6 Scope of the Present Study

The study covers the core area of 10 km radius with the proposed project site as the centre. The scope of the study broadly includes:

 Literature review to collect data relevant to the study area

 Environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline environmental status of the study area (reference CEIA data from September 2004 to September 2005 and January 2008)

 Identification of various existing pollution loads due to industrial and domestic activities in the ambient levels

 Prediction of incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to implementation of the proposed expansion using CEIA data.

 Evaluation of the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies using CEIA data

 Preparation of an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for improving the environmental quality and environmentally sustainable development

 Identification critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.

The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other sources.

2.7 Compliance to Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by MoEF

The EIA report is prepared in accordance with the additional TOR conditions issued by MoEF. The compliance statement to TOR conditions is given in following table.

C2-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE COMPLIANCE TO TOR ISSUED BY MOEF FOR PREPARATION OF EIA

S. Terms of Reference Compliance No. 1 One month data for ambient air, stack The ambient air quality of the area emissions from all the stacks. including meteorological conditions, stack emission details is monitored during January 2008. The details of the monitoring are given in Section-5.4, Chapter-5, Page: C5-23 to C5-29 2 Existing data on the total water Enclosed as Annex 7 consumption, per t of paper produced including AOX levels. 3 Ground water study should be carried The details of quality in and out where the effluent is discharged. around plant premises including the effluent discharge points is given in Section-5.5, Chapter-5, Page: C5-31 to C5-36 4 A note on the follow up of the CREP Enclosed as Annex 8 guidelines. 5 A note on the odour control. Enclosed as Annex 8 6 Action Plan for colour removal from the effluent. 7 Point-wise compliance to the stipulated Enclosed as Appendix 3 environmental conditions for the existing plant.

2.8 Methodology of the Study

Reconnaissance survey was conducted by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited, in consultation with the officials of TNPL, and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

 Dispersion modelling exercise using the predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD)

 Topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers

 Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas

 Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution pockets in the area

 Areas which represent baseline conditions

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes.

The field observations are used to:

 Set up air quality models

 Identify extent of negative impacts on community/natural resources

 Identify mitigation measures and monitoring requirements.

The study also provides framework and institutional strengthening for implementing the mitigation measures. Field studies have been conducted during September 2004 to September 2005 and during January 2008 to determine variations and also to determine existing conditions of various environmental attributes as outlined in the following table.

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES & FREQUENCY OF MONITORING ADOPTED

Sl Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring No.

1 Ambient air SPM, RPM, SO 2, NO X, and CO Twice a week during the study quality period at six locations, 24 hourly samples for SPM, RPM, SO 2, NO X and 8 hourly samples for CO.

2 Meteorology Wind Speed and Direction, Continuous monitoring during Temperature, Rainfall, Sept 2004 to Sept 05 and Atmospheric Pressure, and January 2008 with hourly other non instrumental recording and data collected observations like visibility from secondary sources like IMD station at Salem

3 Water quality Physical, Chemical and Sampling once in a month Bacteriological Parameters. during study period

4 Ecology Existing terrestrial and aquatic Through field visits flora and fauna 5 Noise levels Noise levels in dB (A) Continuous recording for 24 hours per location once in each season during the study period at ten locations

6 Soil Soil profile, characteristics, type Soil sampling at ten locations characteristics of soils in and around the plant once in each season during the study period.

C2-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring No. 7 Land use Land use of different categories Based on data published in around the plant site district census handbooks and data collected from other sources such as District information Centre 8 Socio-economic Socio-economic characteristics, -do- aspects labour force characteristics, trend since inception of industrialisation 9 Geology Geological history Based on data collected from secondary sources 10 Hydrology Drainage area and pattern, -do- (Surface and nature of streams, aquifer Ground) characteristics 11 Risk Identify areas where disaster Risk assessment through assessment can occur by fires, explosions Modelling and release of toxic substances

2.9 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report

2.9.1 Format of the Report

The proposed MEP would naturally have implications on the neighbourhood with reference to environmental attributes such as land, water, air, aesthetics, flora and fauna. In assessing the environmental impact, collection, collation and interpretation of baseline data are of prime importance. Environmental impact analysis and assessment, which are required for every industrial project, should preferably be carried out at the planning stage itself, well before the implementation of the MEP, and hence this study.

The basic objective of identification of impacts is to aid the proponents of the project to rationalise the procedure for an effective environmental management plan by adopting the following procedures:

 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes

 Identification of impacts

 Impact assessment through modelling

 Evaluation of impacts leading to preparation of environmental management plan

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Outlining post project monitoring methodology.

2.9.2 Contents of the EIA Report

This EIA Report is based on field data generated at site during the study period [September 2004 to September 2005 and January 2008] and data collected from secondary sources. The report has been divided into 12 chapters and presented as follows:

Chapter 1 – Executive Summary

Chapter 2 – Background

This chapter provides a general scenario of the Industry, background information of the project, brief description and objectives of the project, description of the area, scope and organisation of the study. It also provides information on climate and environment in the region.

Chapter 3 – Legal and Administrative Framework

This chapter deals with

 The guidelines on EIA issued by Ministry of Environment & Forests

 Indian laws

 Acts and regulations on the environment for

• Air

• Water

• Workers

• Health and safety

• Hazardous materials handling

 Regulations, standards and conditions laid down by the Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board.

Chapter 4 – Project Details and Sources of Pollution

This chapter deals with the process technology and details of the project. This also deals with the sources of pollution from the proposed plant and required control measures.

C2-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Chapter 5 – Baseline Environmental Status

This chapter presents the methodology and findings of field studies undertaken with respect to ambient air, water, soil, noise levels and ecology to define the various existing environmental status in the area. It also presents the meteorological conditions, which govern the air quality impacts, a major concern during the operation of the pulp and paper mill. Details are included on land use, socio-economics, geology, and hydrology from published secondary data.

Chapter 6 – Impact Assessment

This chapter details the inferences drawn from the environmental impact assessment of the project during construction and operational phase. It describes the overall impacts of the proposed project and underscores the areas, which may require implementation of some mitigation measures in the event of the applicable environmental standards not being met.

Chapter 7 – Environmental Management Plan (EMP) Including Mitigation Measures

This chapter proposes an environmental management plan aimed at environmental impacts of the project. Environmental monitoring requirements for effective implementation of mitigatory measures during construction as well as operation of the project have also been delineated along with requisite institutional arrangements for their implementation. This chapter also deals with possible hazards and hazard identification and risk analysis from the proposed MEP.

Chapter 8 – Monitoring Programme

This chapter deals with monitoring programmes for wastewater, ground water, surface water, air quality and noise levels.

Chapter 9 – Environmental Management and Training

This chapter details recommended environmental management and training procedures.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Chapter 10 – Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

This chapter deals with possible hazards and hazard identification and risk analysis from the proposed MEP. Based on these, the risk assessment and disaster management plan, including on-site and off-site management, has been prepared.

Chapter 11 – Sources of Data and Information

This chapter provides the details about the sources of data, field data collection programmes, and public participation.

Chapter 12 – References

Annex #

1 Ambient Air Quality Levels – Winter 2008 2 Ground Water and Surface Water Quality 3 Soil Quality for Treated Wastewater Irrigated Area 4 Ecological Details 5 Village-wise Landuse Pattern 6 Demographical Details 7 Existing data on the total water consumption with AOX levels 8 Note on the follow up of the CREP Guidelines with Odour Control 9 Schematic flow diagram of wastewater treatment plant after MEP

Appendix #

1 MoEF Notification 2006

2 Mill layout

3 Point-wise compliance details of conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance accorded by MOEF

C2-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

2 BACKGROUND

Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) was promoted by the Government of Tamil Nadu for the manufacture of newsprint and printing and writing (P&W) papers, using bagasse as the principal fibre source. About 20% of its P&W paper production is exported. Over the years, the mill has been improving its environmental performance by adopting various measures. Apart from its sound technical and financial performance, TNPL has always strived to attain best possible standards of quality, by practising ISO 9001:2000 standards in the manufacturing operations. The mill operations are environment friendly and conform to pollution abatement norms that are superior to the state and national standards. The mill has established an Environment Management System (EMS) complying with ISO 14001 standards. As a testimony of TNPL’s commitment to the protection of the environment, World Wide Fund for Nature India has accorded permission to TNPL to use it “Panda” logo in TNPL’s branded products. TNPL’s environmental compliance has been acknowledged by the Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) by awarding the “THREE GREEN LEAVES” under “GREEN RATING PROJECT”. The award of Excellence in Corporate Governance to TNPL stands as ample testimony to the overall operational efficiencies, transparency in mill functioning and social commitment of the mill. TNPL has been granted `Eco’ label licence for the plain copier paper as per IS 14490-97 by Bureau of Indian Standards.

The mill is implementing a comprehensive Mill Development Plan (MDP) to meet the requirements of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) as part of the mill’s compliance to the Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP) as applicable to pulp and paper industries. The ongoing expansion is to achieve the target set by the CREP .

Under the ongoing MDP, TNPL has installed 300 tpd Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) chemical hardwood pulp line and a 500 tpd Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) chemical bagasse bleach plant to replace the existing chlorine based bleach plants.

However, to be a leading player in the Indian Pulp and Paper Industry, the mill intends to install a new paper machine of capacity 155,000 tpa along with the balancing of bagasse pulp mill for a capacity of 550 tpd of bleached pulp. The hardwood pulp mill shall have balancing facilities for a production of 330 tpd bleached pulp production. The total finished paper production will increase from 245,000 tpa to 400,000 tpa. In conformity with the guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), TNPL has embarked on Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for the proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP).

SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited (SPB-PC), Chennai, association with

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Vimta Labs, Hyderabad, has been retained to undertake in, a study of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and prepare an Environmental Management Plan for various environmental components which may be affected due to the impacts arising out of the proposed MEP.

2.1 Project Promoters

The Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited (TNPL) have its manufacturing facilities at Kagithapuram, near Pugalur of Karur Taluk, Karur District, Tamil Nadu State. Its Corporate Office is located at Chennai.

TNPL proposes to modernise and expand the operations of the unit located at Kagithapuram with a view to improve technology, energy efficiency, marketability, and long-term environmental compliance. TNPL has ISO 9001-2000 and ISO 14001-2004 certification.

From the inception, TNPL has always been a responsible player in the paper industry, by

 Adopting environment-friendly processes as far as practicable

 Being quality conscious - in products, processes, service & people

 Continuously enhancing the value for all stakeholders, and

 Upholding societal values and expectations.

The driving force for the Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is a combination of quest for improved environmental performance and sustained mill operations with improved productivity.

2.2 Need for MEP

2.2.1 Project Rationale

The objectives of the proposed expansion are

 To maintain the status of leading player in Indian Pulp and Paper Industry by achieving 1000 tpd paper production at a single location.

 To adopt energy efficient process and plant & machinery.

 To meet the growing demand for paper in the country.

 To facilitate the manufacture of more grades of environmentally friendly paper/products.

With steady increase in input costs and a continuous competition from the

C2-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

new units with better quality products apart from the threat of dumping from overseas manufacturers, the mill has to find ways and means to meet these challenges and for its continued economically viable operation for sustenance.

TNPL proposes to install a new paper machine (PM #3), having an installed capacity of 155,000 tpa, for the manufacture of surface sized printing and writing and on-machine light-weight coated papers. The proposed paper machine will have facilities to produce different grades of coated and uncoated papers.

The objectives of the installation of PM #3 are as follows:

 Add coated paper production capability to meet increasing future demands expected for surface-sized printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated papers

 Designate PM #3 for SS printing and writing, copier and on-machine light weight coated paper production.

In the process of achieving the above objection, TNPL will

 Design PM #3 for low water consumption to reduce the overall specific fresh water requirement

 Reduce the specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM #3 at the rated production capacity.

Along with installation of PM #3, it is also proposed to balance the backend, viz. chemical bagasse and hardwood pulp mills and the utilities section, as described below

 Balancing of chemical bagasse fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 500 tpd to 550 tpd

• One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) brown stock washing street for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp

• One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached bagasse pulp capacity.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Balancing of hard wood fibre line for achieving a production capacity from 300 tpd to 330 tpd has been planned by upgrading pumps and pipe lines, as considered necessary

 Installation of new coal fired boiler of capacity 150 tph to supplement the additional steam demand.

 Installation of high efficiency electrostatic precipitator for the new coal fired boiler.

 Adequate pollution control measures to minimise adverse impacts on the environment.

 Improvements in wastewater treatment system with one additional secondary clarifier to take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifiers.

The estimated capital outlay for the proposed MEP is about Rs 725 crores, which will be spent on plant and machinery including the pollution control systems and environmental management.

2.2.2 Environmental Considerations

2.2.2.1 Environmentally Friendly Processes

Adoption of more environmentally friendly processes has been given a high priority. The project shall ensure improving the performance levels of the production units. The aim is to achieve the ultimate target of the environmental standards set by MoEF, CPCB and TNPCB.

The mill is already implementing an expansion plan for compliance to CREP. Major process modification involving substantial capital investment is being carried out, as per MOEF's Environmental Clearance.

The proposed expansion plan of the mill shall ensure continued compliance with all applicable environmental laws and regulations.

To minimise the solid waste disposal, the mill as a separate project intends to install a cement mill for reusing the fly ash and excess lime sludge, thus avoiding the disposal requirements.

2.2.2.2 Green Belt

With a view to mitigate the adverse environmental effect on surroundings and to provide an environmental cover from emissions, green belts are developed in and around the mill.

C2-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The plantation and green belt development in an industrial area not only serves as foreground and background landscape features resulting in harmonising and amalgamating the physical structures of a pulp and paper mill with the surrounding environment but also acts as a pollutant sink. Plantation also contributes towards environmental improvement, by:

 Acting as a “pollution sink” and preventing the particulate and other atmospheric pollutants from spreading to the nearby areas

 Providing vegetative cover

 Increasing the aesthetics of the surroundings, and

 Providing resting, feeding and breeding site for fauna.

Extensive plantation has been done under green belt development for the existing plant. Green belt has been developed and well maintained along the internal roads and mill area. The mill has made elaborate arrangement in developing green belt inside the mill. Plantation has been developed in an area of 66 acres and the total number of trees in this area is 58385 in side the mill. Colony area has 55137 trees in an area spread over 98 acres for this purpose. Additionally, green belt in an area of 109 acres has been developed in the Moolimangalam area and 98100 trees are planted. TNPL is committed to greening of dry barren wasteland. Around 300 various flowering trees are planted as avenue trees on local roads involving local population to create awareness among the public.

2.2.3 Energy Efficiency

The steep increase in the administered prices of fuel and power has made it absolutely necessary that any fuel and power intensive industrial operation shall have to perform at the most energy-efficient levels. Steam generation at higher pressure will provide the mill with very attractive economics in steam and power generation.

2.3 Social Development Activities

On the social and community development front, TNPL has been committed to social responsibility in helping farmers and other inhabitants of the hamlets in and around the mill. TNPL has spent about Rs 5.73 crores for the community development activities including the amount of Rs 50 lakhs spent during the year 2007-08.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

2.4 Project Site

Adequate land with basic infrastructure is available within the existing plant for implementation of the Mill Expansion Plan. The proposed mill expansion area is located within the existing plant premises at Pugalur-Kagithapuram in the district of Karur, Tamil Nadu State. The site is located at the intersection of longitude 77 o49’25’’E and latitude 11 o3’10’’ N and falls under Survey of India Top sheet No 58E/16, F13, I/4 and J/1.

The site is about 400 km (aerial) from Chennai, the State Capital and it is about 15 km from Karur, the District Headquarters. The National Highway NH-7, which connects Salem with Karur, is at 3 km in northeast direction from the plant site. The index map of the project area is shown in Figure 2.1 and the study area map of 10 km radius around TNPL is depicted in Figure 2.2.

C2-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 2.1 INDEX MAP OF THE PROJECT AREA

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 2.2 STUDY AREA MAP – 10 KM RADIUS

C2-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

2.5 Environmental Setting of the Site

The details of environmental setting around the proposed MEP site are given in the following table.

ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

Sl. No. Particulars Details

1 Location Town/Village Pugalur District Karur State Tamil Nadu 2 Latitude 11 o 3’ 10’’ N 3 Longitude 77 o 49’ 25” E

4 Elevation above mean sea level (MSL) 150m 5 Climatic conditions as per IMD Salem Predominant Annual Wind Direction : East, Southwest, and West Annual mean Max Temp: 33.5 oc Annual mean Min Temp : 22.6 o C

6 Present land use at the proposed site Industrial 7 Nearest Highway/Road NH-7 connecting Salem to Karur (3 km NE) 8 Defence Installations None within 10 km radius 9 Nearest railway station Pugalur R.S 10 Nearest airport/air strip Thiruchirapalli

11 Nearest village Pugalur 12 Nearest town Karur 13 Nearest river Cauvery River 14 Hills/valleys Some hillocks are present nearby 15 Archaeologically important places Nil in 10 km radius 16 Nearest place of tourist/ Religious Kalyana Venkatasami Temple, importance Thanthonimalai. Pasupatheswarar Temple Karur 17 Ecologically sensitive areas (National No sensitive areas within 10km radius Parks/Wildlife sanctuaries/bio-sphere reserves) 18 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km None within 10km radius radius 19 List of Industries EID Parry, some small scale industries 20 Topography of the plant site Plain

21 Nature of soil Silty 22 Major crops in the study area Sugarcane, Paddy

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

2.6 Scope of the Present Study

The study covers the core area of 10 km radius with the proposed project site as the centre. The scope of the study broadly includes:

 Literature review to collect data relevant to the study area

 Environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline environmental status of the study area (reference CEIA data from September 2004 to September 2005 and January 2008)

 Identification of various existing pollution loads due to industrial and domestic activities in the ambient levels

 Prediction of incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to implementation of the proposed expansion using CEIA data.

 Evaluation of the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies using CEIA data

 Preparation of an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for improving the environmental quality and environmentally sustainable development

 Identification critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.

The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other sources.

2.7 Compliance to Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by MoEF

The EIA report is prepared in accordance with the additional TOR conditions issued by MoEF. The compliance statement to TOR conditions is given in following table.

C2-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE COMPLIANCE TO TOR ISSUED BY MOEF FOR PREPARATION OF EIA

S. Terms of Reference Compliance No. 1 One month data for ambient air, stack The ambient air quality of the area emissions from all the stacks. including meteorological conditions, stack emission details is monitored during January 2008. The details of the monitoring are given in Section-5.4, Chapter-5, Page: C5-23 to C5-29 2 Existing data on the total water Enclosed as Annex 7 consumption, per t of paper produced including AOX levels. 3 Ground water study should be carried The details of groundwater quality in and out where the effluent is discharged. around plant premises including the effluent discharge points is given in Section-5.5, Chapter-5, Page: C5-31 to C5-36 4 A note on the follow up of the CREP Enclosed as Annex 8 guidelines. 5 A note on the odour control. Enclosed as Annex 8 6 Action Plan for colour removal from the effluent. 7 Point-wise compliance to the stipulated Enclosed as Appendix 3 environmental conditions for the existing plant.

2.8 Methodology of the Study

Reconnaissance survey was conducted by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited, in consultation with the officials of TNPL, and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

 Dispersion modelling exercise using the predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD)

 Topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers

 Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas

 Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution pockets in the area

 Areas which represent baseline conditions

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes.

The field observations are used to:

 Set up air quality models

 Identify extent of negative impacts on community/natural resources

 Identify mitigation measures and monitoring requirements.

The study also provides framework and institutional strengthening for implementing the mitigation measures. Field studies have been conducted during September 2004 to September 2005 and during January 2008 to determine variations and also to determine existing conditions of various environmental attributes as outlined in the following table.

ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES & FREQUENCY OF MONITORING ADOPTED

Sl Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring No.

1 Ambient air SPM, RPM, SO 2, NO X, and CO Twice a week during the study quality period at six locations, 24 hourly samples for SPM, RPM, SO 2, NO X and 8 hourly samples for CO.

2 Meteorology Wind Speed and Direction, Continuous monitoring during Temperature, Rainfall, Sept 2004 to Sept 05 and Atmospheric Pressure, and January 2008 with hourly other non instrumental recording and data collected observations like visibility from secondary sources like IMD station at Salem

3 Water quality Physical, Chemical and Sampling once in a month Bacteriological Parameters. during study period

4 Ecology Existing terrestrial and aquatic Through field visits flora and fauna 5 Noise levels Noise levels in dB (A) Continuous recording for 24 hours per location once in each season during the study period at ten locations

6 Soil Soil profile, characteristics, type Soil sampling at ten locations characteristics of soils in and around the plant once in each season during the study period.

C2-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring No. 7 Land use Land use of different categories Based on data published in around the plant site district census handbooks and data collected from other sources such as District information Centre 8 Socio-economic Socio-economic characteristics, -do- aspects labour force characteristics, trend since inception of industrialisation 9 Geology Geological history Based on data collected from secondary sources 10 Hydrology Drainage area and pattern, -do- (Surface and nature of streams, aquifer Ground) characteristics 11 Risk Identify areas where disaster Risk assessment through assessment can occur by fires, explosions Modelling and release of toxic substances

2.9 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report

2.9.1 Format of the Report

The proposed MEP would naturally have implications on the neighbourhood with reference to environmental attributes such as land, water, air, aesthetics, flora and fauna. In assessing the environmental impact, collection, collation and interpretation of baseline data are of prime importance. Environmental impact analysis and assessment, which are required for every industrial project, should preferably be carried out at the planning stage itself, well before the implementation of the MEP, and hence this study.

The basic objective of identification of impacts is to aid the proponents of the project to rationalise the procedure for an effective environmental management plan by adopting the following procedures:

 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes

 Identification of impacts

 Impact assessment through modelling

 Evaluation of impacts leading to preparation of environmental management plan

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Outlining post project monitoring methodology.

2.9.2 Contents of the EIA Report

This EIA Report is based on field data generated at site during the study period [September 2004 to September 2005 and January 2008] and data collected from secondary sources. The report has been divided into 12 chapters and presented as follows:

Chapter 1 – Executive Summary

Chapter 2 – Background

This chapter provides a general scenario of the Industry, background information of the project, brief description and objectives of the project, description of the area, scope and organisation of the study. It also provides information on climate and environment in the region.

Chapter 3 – Legal and Administrative Framework

This chapter deals with

 The guidelines on EIA issued by Ministry of Environment & Forests

 Indian laws

 Acts and regulations on the environment for

• Air

• Water

• Workers

• Health and safety

• Hazardous materials handling

 Regulations, standards and conditions laid down by the Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board.

Chapter 4 – Project Details and Sources of Pollution

This chapter deals with the process technology and details of the project. This also deals with the sources of pollution from the proposed plant and required control measures.

C2-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Chapter 5 – Baseline Environmental Status

This chapter presents the methodology and findings of field studies undertaken with respect to ambient air, water, soil, noise levels and ecology to define the various existing environmental status in the area. It also presents the meteorological conditions, which govern the air quality impacts, a major concern during the operation of the pulp and paper mill. Details are included on land use, socio-economics, geology, and hydrology from published secondary data.

Chapter 6 – Impact Assessment

This chapter details the inferences drawn from the environmental impact assessment of the project during construction and operational phase. It describes the overall impacts of the proposed project and underscores the areas, which may require implementation of some mitigation measures in the event of the applicable environmental standards not being met.

Chapter 7 – Environmental Management Plan (EMP) Including Mitigation Measures

This chapter proposes an environmental management plan aimed at environmental impacts of the project. Environmental monitoring requirements for effective implementation of mitigatory measures during construction as well as operation of the project have also been delineated along with requisite institutional arrangements for their implementation. This chapter also deals with possible hazards and hazard identification and risk analysis from the proposed MEP.

Chapter 8 – Monitoring Programme

This chapter deals with monitoring programmes for wastewater, ground water, surface water, air quality and noise levels.

Chapter 9 – Environmental Management and Training

This chapter details recommended environmental management and training procedures.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C2-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Chapter 10 – Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

This chapter deals with possible hazards and hazard identification and risk analysis from the proposed MEP. Based on these, the risk assessment and disaster management plan, including on-site and off-site management, has been prepared.

Chapter 11 – Sources of Data and Information

This chapter provides the details about the sources of data, field data collection programmes, and public participation.

Chapter 12 – References

Annex #

1 Ambient Air Quality Levels – Winter 2008 2 Ground Water and Surface Water Quality 3 Soil Quality for Treated Wastewater Irrigated Area 4 Ecological Details 5 Village-wise Landuse Pattern 6 Demographical Details 7 Existing data on the total water consumption with AOX levels 8 Note on the follow up of the CREP Guidelines with Odour Control 9 Schematic flow diagram of wastewater treatment plant after MEP

Appendix #

1 MoEF Notification 2006

2 Mill layout

3 Point-wise compliance details of conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance accorded by MOEF

C2-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

3 ADMINISTRATIVE AND LEGISLATIVE FRAMEWORK

3.1 Administrative and Legislative Background

The principal Environmental Regulatory Agency in India is the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi. MoEF formulates environmental policies and accords environmental clearance for the projects.

The Central Pollution Control Board at the central level, which is a statutory authority, attached to the Ministry of Environment and Forests, primarily carries out the executive responsibilities for the industrial pollution prevention and control.

As per the notification of the MoEF dated 14.09.2006, no new project, expansion or modernisation of the existing plants shall be undertaken in any part of India unless prior environmental clearance (as per Schedule I) has been awarded in accordance with the objectives of National Environmental Policy (NEP) as approved by the union cabinet on 18th May 2006, and the procedure specified in the modification, by the Central Government or the State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA). As per the procedure, anybody who desires to undertake any project in any part of India or expansion or modernisation of any existing industry shall furnish along with the application (Form 1), a copy of the pre-feasibility project report. The stage-wise environmental clearance process for new projects will comprise a maximum of four (4) stages as briefed in the recent MoEF notification dated 14 th September 2006, which is enclosed as Appendix 1. Accordingly, this EIA report for the MEP has been prepared for the perusal of statutory bodies (MoEF/SEIAA/State Pollution Control Board) and to conduct the Public Hearing and judge the environmental viability of the project.

The organisations responsible for environmental management and their functions are listed in following table.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

KEY ORGANISATIONS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Name of the Organisations Main Functions Ministry of Environment and Forests Environment Policy Planning Ensure effective implementation of legislation Monitoring and Control of Pollution Eco-Development Environmental Clearances for Industrial and Development Projects Environmental Research Promotion of the Environmental Education, Training and Awareness Coordination with concerned agencies at the national and international levels Forest Conservation Development and Wildlife Protection Biosphere Reserve Programme Central Pollution Control Board Promote cleanliness of streams and wells Advise the Central Government on the matters concerning prevention, control and abatement of Water and Air pollution Co-ordinate and provide technical and research assistance to State Boards Information dissemination, training and awareness Lay down, modify or annul the standards for a stream or well, and for air quality Central Pollution Control Board Planning and execution of nation wide programmes for the prevention, control or abatement of Water and Air Pollution Ensure compliance with the provisions of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 State Pollution Control Planning and execution of state wide programmes for the Boards/Pollution Control Committee prevention, control or abatement of Water and Air (for Union Territories) Pollution Advise the State Government on prevention, control and abatement of Water and Air Pollution and sitting of industries Information dissemination, training and awareness Ensure compliance with the provisions of the relevant Acts Lay down, modify or annul the wastewater and emission standards Ensure legal action against defaulters Evolve techno-economic methods for treatment, disposal and utilisation of the wastewater

C3-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

3.2 Environmental Regulations

3.2.1 Water

The Water (Prevention and control of pollution) Act 1974, with its latest amendments, enables the State government through the state Pollution Control Board (as constituted through the Gazette Notification) to prevent and control water pollution, in line with the general standards prescribed in the Act. The general standards for discharge of environmental pollutants follow Schedule-VI of Rule 2 (d) of the Environment (Protection) second amendment rules 1993 (notified vide G.S.R.422 (E) dated 19/03/1993 published in the Gazette No: 174 dated 19/05/1993). These minimum standards may be made more stringent by the state regulating authorities.

3.2.1.1 Wastewater Discharge Standards

The wastewater discharge standards as stipulated under the Environment (Protection) Rules (1986) for discharge to "Inland Surface Water" are given in Table 3.1.

TABLE 3.1 WASTEWATER DISCHARGE STANDARDS Sl Standard List of Parameters Units No. (for inland surface water)

All efforts should be made to 1 Colour and Odour -- remove colour and unpleasant odour as far as practicable.

2 Suspended Solids mg/l 100.0 3 Particle size of Suspended Solids -- Shall pass 850 micron IS sieve 4 pH value -- 5.5 to 9.0 Shall not exceed 5 oC above the 5 Temperature -- receiving water temperature 6 Oil and grease, Max. mg/l 10 7 Total residual chlorine, Max. mg/l 1 8 Ammoniacal nitrogen (as N), Max. mg/l 50 9 Total Kjeldhal nitrogen (as N), Max mg/l 100

10 Free ammonia (as NH 3), Max. mg/l 5 Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) 11 o mg/l 30 (3 days at 27 C), Max. 12 Chemical oxygen demand (COD), mg/l 250 Max. 13 Arsenic (as As), Max. mg/l 0.2 14 Mercury (as Hg), Max. mg/l 0.01 15 Lead (as Pb), Max. mg/l 0.1 16 Cadmium (as Cd), Max. mg/l 2 17 Hexavalent chromium (as Cr +6 ), Max. mg/l 0.1 18 Total chromium (as Cr), Max. mg/l 2 19 Copper (as Cu), Max. mg/l 3

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl Standard List of Parameters Units No. (for inland surface water)

20 Zinc (as Zn), Max. mg/l 5 21 Selenium (as Se), Max. mg/l 0.05 22 Nickel (as Ni), Max. mg/l 3 23 Cyanide (as CN), Max. mg/l 0.2 24 Fluorides (as F) mg/l 2 25 Dissolved phosphates (as P),Max mg/l 5 26 Sulphides (as S), Max. mg/l 2

27 Phenolic compounds (as C 2H5OH) mg/l 1 28 Radioactive Materials (a) Alpha Emitters, Max. µC/ml 10 -7 (b) Beta Emitters, Max. µC/ml 10 -6 29 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l 2 30 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 3 31 Vanadium (as V) mg/l 0.2 32 Nitrate as nitrogen mg/l 10

3.2.1.2 Pulp and Paper Mill - Relevant Standards

The relevant standards for a Large Pulp and Paper Mill are presented below.

Wastewater Discharge Standards

The wastewater discharge standards as per Environment Protection Agency (EPA) Notification are presented in the following table.

WASTEWATER DISCHARGE STANDARDS

Sl No. Parameter Not to exceed 1 Flow A Large pulp and paper mill 200 m 3/tonne of paper produced B Large rayon grade/newsprint 150 m 3/tonne of paper produced 2 pH 7.0 to 8.5 3 Suspended Solids 100 mg/l 4 BOD at 27 o C for 3 days 30 mg/l 5 COD 250 mg/l 6 TOCL 2 .0 kg/tonne of product 3.2.2 Air

C3-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, with its latest amendment, enables the State Pollution Control Boards (as constituted through the Gazette Notification) to prevent and control air pollution, in line with the general standards prescribed in the Act. The general standards for National Ambient Air Quality follow Schedule VII prescribed in Environment (Protection) Rules 1986 and Schedule I of Environment (Protection) Rules 1986.

3.2.2.1 Ambient Air Quality Standards

National ambient air quality standards have been prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board vide Gazette Notification dated 11 th April 1994. The prescribed Indian standards are furnished in Table 3.2 below.

TABLE 3.2 NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m 3) Time Weighted Pollutant Average Industrial Residential, Rural Sensitive Area & Other Areas Areas Sulphur dioxide Annual Average* 80 60 15 3 (SO 2) (µg/m ) 24 Hours** 120 80 30 Oxides of Nitrogen Annual Average* 80 60 15 (NOx) (µg/m 3)

24 Hours** 120 80 30 Suspended Annual Average* 360 140 70 Particulate Matter (SPM) (µg/m 3) 24 Hours** 500 200 100 Respirable Annual Average* 120 60 50 Particulate Matter (Size less than 24 Hours** 150 100 75 10 microns) (µg/m 3) Lead (Pb) (µg/m 3) Annual Average* 1.0 0.75 0.50 24 Hours** 1.5 1.0 0.75 Carbon monoxide 8 Hours 5000 2000 1000 (CO) (µg/m 3) 1 Hour** 10000 4000 2000 Ammonia Annual 100 100 100 24 Hours 400 400 400

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Note:

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However, 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

3.2.2.2 Maximum Permissible Emission Concentrations

The maximum permissible limits for source emission, as per EPA Notification are presented in Table 3.3 below.

TABLE 3.3 SOURCE EMISSION DISCHARGE STANDARDS

S No Parameter Concentration in mg/Nm 3

1 Particulate Matter 150

2 H2S 10

3.2.3 Ambient Noise Standards

Ambient standards with respect to noise have been notified by the MoEF vide gazette notification dated 26 th December 1989 and as amended in February

2000. It is based on the ‘A’ weighted equivalent noise level (L eq ) and the standards are presented in Table 3.4 below.

TABLE 3.4 AMBIENT NOISE STANDARDS

Area Category of Noise Levels dB(A), Leq Code Area Day time* Night Time A Industrial Area 75 70 B Commercial Area 65 55 C Residential Area 55 45 D Silence Zone ** 50 40

Note * Daytime is from 6 am to 10 pm. ** Silence zone is defined as area up to 100 metres around premises of hospitals, educational institutions and courts. Use of vehicle horns, loud speakers and bursting of crackers are banned in these zones.

C3-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Noise Standards for Occupational Exposure

Noise standards in the work environment are specified by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA-USA), which, in turn, are being enforced by through model rules framed under Factories Act and are given in Table 3.5 below.

TABLE 3.5 STANDARDS FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE

Total Time of Exposure per Day in Hours Sound Pressure Level (Continuous or Short term Exposure) in dB (A)

8 90 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100 3/2 102 1 105 ¾ 107 ½ 110 ¼ 115 Never >115

Note: 1. No exposure in excess of 115 dB(A) is to be permitted.

2. For any period of exposure falling in between any figure and the next higher or lower figure as indicated in column (1), the permissible level is to be determined by extrapolation on a proportionate scale.

3.3 Regulations, Standards and Conditions followed by The Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board (TNPCB)

TNPCB enforces the following legislations in the matter of control of pollution:

1. Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 as amended in 1978 and 1988.

2. Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 as amended in 1991.

3. Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 as amended in 1987.

4. Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5. Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules 1989, with amendments in 2000, 2002 & 2003.

6. Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989.

7. The Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 1994.

3.3.1 Standards for Discharge of Trade Wastewaters

The standards prescribed by the Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board for various pollutants and the revised standards prescribed by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) for discharge of trade wastewater were considered by the Technical Committee. The committee recommended the standards as given in table 3.6 below to be prescribed as tolerance limits for the disposal of trade wastewaters into inland surface waters, public sewers, marine coastal areas or on land for irrigation.

TABLE 3.6 STANDARDS FOR DISCHARGE OF TRADE WASTEWATERS

Sl. Characteristics Tolerance limits for discharge of trade wastewater in No to Inland Public On land for Marine coastal surface Sewers irrigation areas waters (a) (b) ( c ) (d) 1 Colour and odour ------2 Suspended solids mg/l 100 600 200 a) For process waste water-100

b) For cooling water wastewater 10 percent above total suspended matter of influent cooling water 3 Particle size of Shall -- -- a) Floatable suspended solids pass solids maximum 850 3 mm micron IS Sieve b) Settlable solids maximum 850 microns 4 Dissolved solids 2100 2100 2100 -- (inorganic) mg/l 5 pH value 5.5 to 9 5.5 to 9 5.5 to 9 5.5 to 9 6 Temperature 40°C at 45°C at 45°C at the the point the point point of of dis- of discharge charge discharge 7 Oil & Grease mg/l 10 20 10 20 8 Total residual chlorine 1.0 -- -- 1.0

C3-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl. Characteristics Tolerance limits for discharge of trade wastewater in No to Inland Public On land for Marine coastal surface Sewers irrigation areas waters (a) (b) ( c ) (d) mg/l 9 Ammoniacal Nitrogen 50 50 -- 50 (as N) mg/l 10 Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen 100 -- -- 100 (as N) mg/l

11 Free ammonia (as NH 3) 5.0 -- -- 5.0 mg/l 12 Bio chemical oxygen 30 350 100 100 demand (3 days at 27°C) mg/l 13 Chemical oxygen 250 -- -- 250 demand mg/l 14 Arsenic (as As) mg/l 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 15 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 16 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 17 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l 2.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 18 Hexavalent chromium 0.1 2.0 1.0 1.0 (as Cr +6 ) mg/l 19 Total chromium (as 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 Cr)mg/l 20 Copper (as Cu) mg/l 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 21 Zinc (as Zn) mg/l 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 22 Selenium (as Se) mg/l 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 23 Nickel (as Ni) mg/l 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 24 Boron (as B) mg/l 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 25 Percent sodium % -- 60 60 -- 26 Residual sodium -- -- 5.0 -- carbonate mg/l 27 Cyanide (as CN) mg/l 0.2 2.0 0.2 0.2 28 Chloride (as CI) mg/l 1000 1000 600 -- 29 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 30 Dissolved phosphates 5.0 ------(as P) mg/l

31 Sulphates (as SO 4) mg/l 1000 1000 1000 1000 32 Sulphide (as S) mg/l 2.0 -- 2.0 5.0 33 Pesticides Absent Absent Absent Absent 34 Phenolic compounds 1.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 (as C 6H5OH) mg/l 35 Radio active materials 10 -7 10 -7 10 -8 10 -7 a) Alpha emitters micro curie/ ml b) Beta emitters micro 10 -6 10 -6 10 -6 10 -7 curie/ml

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

3.3.2 Standards for Discharge of Sewage

Sl No Characteristics Tolerance Limit 1 pH 5.5 to 9 2 Total suspended solids mg/l 30 3 Biochemical Oxygen Demand 20 (3 days at 27°C) mg/l

3.3.3 Drinking Water Standards

Sl No Characteristics 1 Colour (HU) 5 2 Odour Unobjectionable 3 Taste Agreeable 4 Turbidity (NTU) 5 5 Total dissolved solids 500 6 pH value 6.5 to 8.5

7 Total hardness (CaCO 3) 300 8 Calcium (as Ca) 75 9 Magnesium 30 10 Copper (as Cu) 0.05 11 Iron (as Fe) 0.3 12 Manganese (as Mn) 0.1 13 Chlorides (As CI) 250

14 Sulphate (as SO 4) 200

15 Nitrates (as NO 3) 45 16 Fluorides (as F) 1

17 Phenolic compounds (as C 6H5OH) 0.001 18 Mercury 0.001 19 Cadmium 0.01 20 Arsenic 0.05 21 Cyanides (as CN) 0.05 22 Lead (Pb) 0.05 23 Zinc 5.00 +6 24 Chromium (as C r ) 0.05 25 Mineral oil 0.02 26 Residual chlorine Note: Max. Limits (mg/l except for Sl. no. 1, 2, 3, 4 & 6)

3.3.4 Ambient Air Quality – Standards for Noise-as per Section 17(1) (g) of the Air (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act 1981

C3-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Section 17(1) (g) of the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, as amended in 1987, empowers the State Board to lay down in consultation with the Central Pollution Control Board, standards for emission of air pollutants into the atmosphere from different Industrial Plants and automobiles or for the discharge of any air pollutant to the atmosphere from any other source.

The Central Pollution Control Board has since finalised the Ambient Air Quality standards in respect of Noise under Section 16 (2) (h) of the Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 as amended in 1987 as follows:

Area Code Category of Area Limits in dB (A) Leq Day time Night time A Industrial Area 75 70 B Commercial Area 65 55 C Residential Area 55 45 D Silence Zone 50 40

Definition

1. Day time: is reckoned in between 6 AM and 10 PM

2. Night time: is reckoned in between 10 PM and 6 AM

3. Silence Zone: is defined as areas upto 100 metres around such premises as hospitals, educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by the Competent Authority. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these zones.

Note :

1. Mixed categories of areas should be declared as one of the four above mentioned categories by the competent authority and the corresponding standards shall apply.

NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS

Pollutant Time Concentration in Ambient Air Weighted Average Industrial Residential, Sensitive Method of area Rural & Other Area Measurement (1) Areas (6) (2) (3) (4) (5) Sulphur Annual 80 µg/m³ 60 µg/m³ 15 µg/m³ Improved west Dioxide average * and Gaeke (SO 2) method 24 hours** 120 µg/m³ 80 µg/m³ 30 µg/m³ Ultra violet fluorescence

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Pollutant Time Concentration in Ambient Air Weighted Average Industrial Residential, Sensitive Method of area Rural & Other Area Measurement (1) Areas (6) (2) (3) (4) (5) Oxides of Nitrogen Annual 80 µg/m³ 60 µg/m³ 15 µg/m³ 1. Jacob and average * Hochheiser (as NO X) modified (Na- Arsenite) Method

24 hours** 120 µg/m³ 80 µg/m³ 30 µg/m³ 2. Gas phase chemiluminesce nce Suspended Particulate Annual 360 µg/m³ 140 µg/m³ 70 µg/m³ High volume Matter average * sampling (average flow rate not less 24 hours** 500 µg/m³ 200 µg/m³ 100 µg/m³ than 1.1 m³ per minute) Respirable Particulate Matter Annual 120 µg/m³ 60 µg/m³ 50 µg/m³ Respirable (Size less than average * Particulate 10 µm) Matter sampler 24 hours** 150 µg/m³ 100 µg/m³ 75 µg/m³

Lead (Pb) Annual 1.0 µg/m³ 0.75 µg/m³ 0.5 µg/m³ AAS Method average * after sampling using EPM 2000 or equivalent 24 hours** 1.5µg/m³ 1.0 µg/m³ 0.75 µg/m³ filter paper Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hours * 5.0 mg/m³ 2.0 mg/m³ 1.0 mg/m³ Non dispersive infrared 1 hour 10.00 4.0 mg/m³ 2.0 mg/m³ Spectroscopy mg/m³ Note:

* Annual Arithmetic Mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly / 8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

1. National Ambient Air Quality Standard: The levels of air quality necessary with an adequate margin of safety, to protect the public health, vegetation and property.

2. Whenever and wherever two consecutive values exceed the limit specified above for the respective category, it would be considered adequate reason to institute regular/continuous monitoring and further investigations.

3.3.5 Standards for Chlorine Emission dated 29.08.1991

C3-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

As per section 17 (1) of the Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, the Board may lay down standards for emission of any air pollutant and ambient air quality in consultation with CPCB. The following limits were suggested by TNPCB for the emission from the stacks and in the ambient air.

1. Chlorine Gas Prescribed Limit

a. Emission from Hypo-tower of 15 mg/m³ chlor-alkali industry b. In the ambient air 3 mg/m³

2. Hydrochloric acid Vapours and Mist

a. Emission from all processes HCl 35 mg/m³ manufacturing unit b. In the ambient air 7 mg/m³

3.3.6 Standards for Motor Vehicle Emissions

Standards for emission of smoke, vapour etc. from motor vehicles

1) Every motor vehicle shall be manufactured and maintained in such condition and shall be so driven that smoke, visible vapour, grit, sparks, ashes, cinders or oily substance do not emit therefrom.

2) On and from the 1 st day of March 1990, every motor vehicle in use shall comply with the following standards:

a. Idling CO (carbon monoxide) emission limit for all four wheeled petrol driven vehicles shall not exceed 3 per cent by volume.

b. Idling CO emission limit for all two and three wheeled petrol driven vehicles shall not exceed 4.5 percent by volume.

c. Smoke density for all diesel driven vehicles shall be as follows:

Method of Test Maximum smoke density Limit Bosch units Hatridge units absorption co-efficient

a) Full load at a speed of 60% to 3.1 5.2 75 70% of maximum engine rated speed declared by the manufacturer

b) Free acceleration 2.3 -- 65

3.4 Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 with subsequent Amendments 2000, 2002 and 2003

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, has enacted the above rules so as to ensure effective collection, storage, treatment, transport, reception, import and disposal of hazardous wastes. Any occupier or unit, generating hazardous wastes and involved in the collection, storage, treatment, transport, reception import and disposal of hazardous wastes will have to obtain authorisation of the Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board. Also, units involved in collection and treatment of hazardous wastes or engaged in the business of collection, transportation and disposal of hazardous wastes will have to obtain the authorisation of the Board for performing such activities.

All units generating or handling hazardous wastes more than the regulatory quantities will have to apply for the authorisation of the Board in a prescribed form. In 2000 amendments, 44 categories were listed. TNPL was granted authorisation on 17 th December 2001 for disposal of hazardous wastes under category 44 and 44.2.

In 2002, list of processes generating hazardous were regrouped into total number of 47 hazardous processes, generating hazardous wastes. In 2003 amendment, the list of hazardous processes and waste from them were reduced to 36 after regrouping. The following are applicable to pulp and paper industry presently:

C3-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

LIST OF HAZARDOUS WASTES AS APPLICABLE TO PULP & PAPER INDUSTRY

Sl Processes Hazardous wastes No

5 Industrial operations using 5.1 Used/spent oil mineral/synthetic oil as lubricant in hydraulic 5.2 Wastes/residues containing oil systems or other applications

32 Pulp & Paper industry 32.1 Spent chemicals 32.2 Corrosive wastes arising from use of strong acid and bases

32.3 Sludge containing adsorbable organic halides

3.5 Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP)

The Charter on CREP, which was launched in 2002, in a National Seminar at New Delhi, enlists time-bound action plans in respect of highly polluting categories of various industries, including pulp and paper, for progressive upgradation of technologies and in-plant practices for reduction of pollutants as well as improvement in waste management systems. An industry specific interaction meet with respect to pulp and paper industry was organised in December 2002 and the CREP norms came into force in 2003. The charter on CREP requires the following norms for the pulp and paper industry to be implemented within the schedule specified.

Type of Industry/Requirement Implementation Schedule Large Pulp and Paper Mill - Discharge of AOX kg/tonne of paper AOX 1.5 kg/tonne of paper within 2 years AOX 1 kg/tonne of paper within 5 years Installation of lime kiln Within 4 years Wastewater discharge m 3/tonne of paper Less than 140 m 3/tonne of paper within 2 years Less than 120 m 3/tonne of paper within 4 years for units installed before 1992 Less than 100 m 3/tonne of paper per units installed after 1992 Odour control by burning the reduced Installation of odour control system within 4 sulphur emissions in the boiler/lime kiln years Utilisation of treated wastewater for Utilisation of treated wastewater for irrigation irrigation wherever possible Colour removal form the wastewater Indian Paper Manufacturers Association to take up project with Central Pulp & Paper Research

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C3-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Type of Industry/Requirement Implementation Schedule Institute

C3-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4 PROJECT DETAILS AND SOURCES OF POLLUTION

4.1 Introduction

The ongoing Mill Development Plan (MDP) is nearing completion and the proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is intended to take off dovetailing the completion of MDP. The environmental scenario as achieved post MDP will continue to prevail unaltered post MEP too, without any adverse impact on the environment.

This chapter highlights the features of plant layout and design, details of the process to be adopted, raw material requirement, utilities and services, infrastructural facilities and sources of waste generation, their quantity, treatment and safe disposal of the waste.

4.2 Project Category

The industrial unit comes under the specified project (expansion/ modernisation) categories as listed in schedule I Appendix 1 .

4.3 Layout of the Proposed Project

The layout plan of the existing plant with the proposed paper machine and coal fired boiler is enclosed as Appendix 2 . Green belt has been provided all round the plant boundary to provide an environmental cover.

4.4 Land Requirement

No additional land needs to be procured for the proposed mill development, as all new additions shall be located within the available area.

4.5 Process Description

The manufacturing process involves three basic steps, which are pulp making, pulp bleaching and papermaking. A brief introduction to pulp and paper manufacturing is presented below.

4.5.1 General Process of Paper Making

4.5.1.1 Pulp Making

Pulp is produced from cellulosic raw materials like wood, bamboo, bagasse, rice straw, wheat straw, cotton linter etc. These raw materials contain, in addition to cellulose and hemi-cellulose, a significant amount of lignin, which binds the cellulosic fibres. In pulping, the cellulosic fibre is separated from the surrounding lignin, either by mechanical or chemical means. Removal of lignin is further accomplished by oxygen delignification.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.5.1.2 Pulp Bleaching

Conventionally, the cooked unbleached pulp is brown in colour, due to the presence of residual lignin and chemicals. In order to obtain good brightness of paper, the pulp is bleached using strong oxidants like chlorine, oxygen, chlorine dioxide, NaOH, hydrogen peroxide, ozone, etc. The goal is to obtain good brightness without degradation or loss of cellulosic fibre. The utilisation of chlorine is dispensed with, in recent new installations, by way of a change over in the bleaching technology.

4.5.1.3 Stock Preparation

Pulp is refined in the stock preparation section for better bondage to form sheet. The pulp received from pulp mill is passed through a series of refiners and then the required additives viz, fillers, dyes, whitening agents, rosin and alum, are added. These additions are added to impart functional properties to the final paper such as opacity, reflectance, shade and water resistance. The final blended stock is pumped to PM machine chest.

4.5.1.4 Paper Making

The blended stock in very dilute suspension is allowed to flow and spread on a moving wire where water is drained and fibre binds together to form a wet web. The wet paper web is then pressed, dried and wound. Papermaking is purely mechanical in nature and the variations exist only in the design of the paper machine.

4.6 Details of Existing Process

4.6.1 Paper Machines

The mill has two (2) paper machines producing a wide range of both surface sized (SS) and non-surface sized (NSS) printing and writing (P&W) papers and newsprint (NP).

4.6.1.1 Paper Machine # 1 (PM #1)

PM#1, supplied by Beloit-Walmsley, UK, can produce surface and non- surface sized printing & writing paper with a trim width of 6.8 m (at reel), at a maximum operating speed of 750 mpm and a design basis weight range of 40-90 gsm. The dynamic balancing speed of the machine is 850 mpm.

The paper machine is designed to manufacture 357 tpd of 48.8 gsm newsprint (or) 303 tpd of 56 gsm P&W paper at 100% machine efficiency.

C4-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.6.1.2 Paper Machine # 2 (PM # 2)

PM # 2, supplied by Voith Germany, is designed to produce newsprint with a trim width of 6.6 m at a continuous maximum operating speed of 850 mpm. The basis weight range is 40-80 gsm. The machine has capacity to produce 394 tpd of newsprint at 100% efficiency at 48.8 gsm. The dynamic balancing speed of the machine is 1000 mpm. In tune with the market conditions, PM#2 is running as a dual purpose machine, making both newsprint and P&W paper ranging from 40 to 80 gsm.

4.6.1.3 Stock and Approach Flow System

PM #1

The stock preparation system of PM #1 is of a continuous type and is designed to handle hardwood pulp, chemical bagasse pulp and imported softwood pulp. While hardwood pulp street and imported softwood pulp street are provided with double disc refiners, chemical bagasse pulp street is provided with low intensity conical refiners.

Its approach flow system consists of a Deculator System with a four (4) stage centricleaning system and a three (3) stage screening system.

PM #2

The stock preparation system of PM #2 too is of a continuous type and is designed to handle 60% chemical bagasse pulp and 40% mechanical bagasse pulp or hardwood pulp.

Its approach flow system is similar to that of PM#1 approach flow system and consists of a Deculator System, centricleaning system and a screening system.

4.6.2 Pulp Mill

The mill has the following pulping streets:

 Hardwood pulping street

 Chemical bagasse pulping street #1

 Chemical bagasse pulping street #2

 Mechanical bagasse pulping street

The hardwood pulping street has its own dedicated raw material preparation system, while the bagasse receipt and storage system is common to all the three bagasse pulping streets.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.6.2.1 Raw Material Preparation System

Hardwood Pulping Street

The raw material preparation system for the hardwood pulping street consists of a wood chipping section.

There are two (2) disc chippers of CARTHAGE make, each with a design throughput of 16 tph and with inclined feed.

Each chipper, with a disc diameter of 66", is provided with six (6) fly knives and one (1) bed knife. The cutting angle is 40°. Chips are discharged to individual short belt cross conveyors which feed the chips to a common conveyor. The common conveyor takes the chips to a chips screen having two (2) decks with 35 mm square opening in the top deck and 3 mm round holes in the bottom deck for dust removal. Accepted chips are discharged to an inclined belt conveyor, which takes the chips to the storage silo of 200 tonnes capacity.

Oversized chips fall into another belt conveyor which discharges the chips to a rechipper of swing hammer type. Accepts from the rechipper are diverted to the inclined conveyor and mixed with chips screen accepted chips. TNPL is in the process of replacing the existing rechipper with a new re-chipper of drum type.

The chips storage silo is provided with silo extraction screw arrangement. The dimensions of the extraction screw are 625 mm dia x 6500 mm length.

Digester

The mill has five (5) vertical stationary digesters, each of 80 m 3 capacity, for chemical pulping of wood. Digesters, each of 3.5 m dia. x 12.35 m height, are supplied by UTKAL MACHINERY, Kansbahal, Orissa. One (1) liquor pre-heater for each digester is provided for indirect heating of the cooking liquor. Direct heating of the digesters is resorted to whenever liquor pre-heaters are out of operation for any tube cleaning or breakdown. Liquor pre-heater is shell and tube type.

Condensate from the pre-heater is collected in a condensate receiver.

The typical digester operation cycle is as follows:

minutes

Charging of chips and liquor 60 Steaming 105 Cooking 75

C4-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Blowing and lid opening etc., 60 Total 300 5 hours

About 18 tonnes BD chips are charged into the digester. Cooking chemical

is around 18% as Na 2O. White liquor sulphidity is maintained between 17% and 18%. Digester bath ratio is 1:3. The unbleached pulp yield across the digester is around 45%. The kappa number of pulp at blow tank is around 20-22.

Pulp from digester is blown to a blow tank of 250 m3 capacity. .

The mill has a full fledged heat recovery system but, at present the heat exchanger is not in use as the heat exchanger tubes often get choked; blow vapours are directly condensed in the condensers. All the digesters have DCS control.

Brown Stock Washing

Pulp from blow tank is pumped to three (3) vibratory knotter screens. Knotter screen perforations size is 6 mm. The accepts from the knotter screens flow by gravity to the inlet of first stage brown stock washer. Rejects from vibratory knotter screens are collected and taken back to digester for recooking. The capacity of each vibratory knotter is 3 tph.

Pulp washing street consists of three (3) stage counter-current rotary vacuum drum washers of Hindustan Dorr-Oliver Limited, India (HDO) make. Each brown stock washer is of 8' dia x 12' face length, having a filtration area of 302 ft 2. Hot water at a temperature of 65°C is used on the third washer for mat spray. Each washer is provided with dedicated seal tank for the filtrate. Seal tank #1 is fitted with a foam breaker of HDO make. The mill has utilized the screw presses removed from bagasse washing area for pressing the third brown stock washer pulp. Squeezed liquor from the presses is used for BSW #2 shredder dilution.

Washed pulp from the screw presses is discharged to a washed stock storage tower, of 250 m 3 capacity, through a conveyor. There is a vacuum pump for the brown stock washer #3 while the washers #1 and #2 are

running on natural vacuum. Washing loss is around 15 kg/t as Na 2SO 4.

Screening and Thickening

Pulp from the washed pulp storage tower is pumped to one (1) primary screen, having a capacity of 6 tph. The mill has replaced the screen with a slotted screen of METSO make, having a slot size of 0.2 mm.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The accepted pulp from the primary pressure screen is pumped to the thickener. Rejects from primary screen are collected in a rejects chest and pumped to a secondary slotted pressure screen. The accepts from the secondary pressure screen are cascaded back to the feed of primary pressure screen, while the rejects are sent to a vibrating screen. The accepts of the vibrating screen join the secondary screen feed and rejects are collected manually and removed to pith yard.

The decker thickener, supplied by HDO, is of rotary vacuum drum type of 8' diameter x 14' face width. The thickened pulp is stored in a screened unbleached pulp storage tower, of 250 m 3 capacity, through a conveyor.

Bleaching

The mill adopts C-Ep-H-H sequence for bleaching the wood pulp. The capacity of the bleach plant is reported to be around 100 tpd. There are four (4) bleach washers. Each bleach washer is of size 8' diameter x 10' face width, having a filtration area of around 251 ft 2. The unbleached pulp is pumped to the chlorine mixer. Chlorine is mixed with the stock. The chlorine tower is an upward flow, tile-lined RCC tower. Pulp overflows to the vat of the chlorine washer. Caustic (about 3.6% on pulp) is added at the chlorine washer repulper. Along with caustic, hydrogen peroxide at a concentration of 50% is added. Pulp from chlorine washer repulper conveyor is discharged to a heater mixer, where steam is injected. From heater mixer, pulp is discharged to alkali reaction tower of 100 m 3 capacity. Here, pulp is stored for one hour for the reaction to take place.

Pulp from alkali reaction tower is pumped to caustic washer. Filtrate from the chlorine washer is collected in a chlorine filtrate seal tank of 13 m 3 capacity and is used for diluting the pulp in the vat of chlorine washer. The filtrate from caustic washer is collected in a caustic filtrate seal tank of 13 m3 capacity and is used for caustic tower ring dilution and alkali washer vat dilution. From alkali washer, pulp is discharged to a repulper conveyor, where hypo solution at a strength of 25-30 gpl and sulphamic acid are added and, subsequently, pulp is discharged to a heater mixer. From this heater mixer, pulp is discharged to a hypo stage reaction tower #1 of 200 m3 capacity.

Pulp is retained in the hypo stage reaction tower #1 for 2 hours for the reaction to take place. Filtrate from hypo washer #1 is collected in a filtrate tank of 26 m³. Filtrate is used for the ring dilution of the tower and for the hypo washer vat dilution.

Hypochlorite solution, if required, is added again in hypo washer #1 repulper. Pulp from hypo washer #1 is discharged to hypo tower #2

C4-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

through a heater mixer and retained for one and half hours for the reaction to take place. Pulp is pumped to hypo washer #2 for washing the pulp free of chlorine. After washing, pulp is dumped into one of the two bleached high density (HD) storage towers through a conveyor. The filtrate from hypo washer #2 is collected in a filtrate tank of capacity 26 m³. The filtrate is used for the ring dilution of the tower and for hypo washer #2 vat dilution.

From the bleached HD storage towers, pulp is pumped to the stock preparation section.

Bagasse Pulping Streets

Chemical Bagasse Pulping Street #1 (CBP #1)

The raw material preparation system for the bagasse pulping streets consists of bagasse receipt, storage and reclaim, which caters to the requirements of chemical bagasse pulping street #1, chemical bagasse pulping street #2, and mechanical bagasse pulp street.

General

Prior to expansion, TNPL was receiving bagasse from five (5) sugar mills on `substitution' basis. TNPL had installed coal/lignite-fired boilers in these sugar mills to meet the steam requirement of these sugar mills, and, in exchange, was lifting the bagasse from these sugar mills. Over the years, TNPL has also been procuring bagasse on `surplus' basis from various sugar mills to supplement its bagasse requirement. When the mill first commenced operations, depithing of bagasse was done at TNPL mill site, and the pith fired in TNPL's boilers. Later on, however, the depithing operations were shifted to the sugar mills, except Pugalur, to avoid transportation of pith along with bagasse to TNPL mill site and the pith was burnt in the sugar mill boilers itself.

After expansion, TNPL has tied up with one (1) more sugar mill for procurement of bagasse on substitution basis. In addition, TNPL also continues procurement of surplus bagasse from various sugar mills to supplement its requirement of bagasse.

Bagasse Receipt

Bagasse is received from the sugar mills in trucks and unloaded by means of hydraulic tipplers. There are two (2) tippler stations for receiving and unloading the bagasse - the old station ((tippler station #1) and the new station (tippler station #2).

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Tippler Station #1

The tippler station #1 consists of six (6) hydraulic tipplers, supplied by M/s Usha Atlas Hydraulic Equipment Ltd, Calcutta. Each tippler is of 25 t capacity and is capable of unloading a truck in 15 minutes. An unloading hopper with pin drum feeders is provided for each tippler. Two (2) belt conveyors are provided under the unloading hoppers, each receiving bagasse from three (3) unloading hoppers. From these belt conveyors, bagasse is fed to classifier screens. There are two (2) classifier screens supplied by Rader Inc, USA. These classifier screens remove any contraries and lumps from the bagasse. The screened bagasse is then fed to the depithers (if received as surplus bagasse), or directly to a bagasse transfer conveyor for feeding to the bagasse storage system (if received as depithed bagasse). The screened surplus bagasse is fed through a belt conveyor to a battery of five (5) vertical stationary depithers. The depithers are of the rotating hammer type and are connected to a rotating carousel having a central shaft. Each depither is of capacity 16 tph bagasse, and has its dedicated feed screw. While the pith is transferred to the pith storage yard, the depithed bagasse is taken to bagasse storage yard #1 by means of a conveying system.

Tippler Station #2

The tippler station #2, consists of four (4) hydraulic tipplers, supplied by M/s Carter Hydraulic Limited, Calcutta. Each tippler is of 30 t capacity and is capable of unloading a truck in 15 minutes. An unloading hopper with pin drum feeders is provided for each tippler. Bagasse is transferred to the bagasse yard #2 through a conveying system.

Bagasse Storage

There are two (2) bagasse storage yards - old bagasse yard (bagasse yard #1) and new bagasse yard (bagasse yard #2) - for storage of bagasse required for TNPL's operations. In both these yards, bagasse is stored using the wet-bulk pile storage method.

Bagasse Yard #1

Bagasse yard #1 is of size 530 m (l) x 80 m (w). Wet pile storage of bagasse in the bagasse yard #1 is carried out using a twin boom, mobile bagasse stacker #1. The stacker was supplied by KONE, Finland and has a stacking capacity of 92 tph moist depithed bagasse. It can be moved on rails along the entire length of the bagasse yard #1. The stacker consists of a main structure with wheels capable of moving along the entire length of the bagasse yard; a slab feed conveyor with a movable tripper conveyor; a reversible conveyor for feeding bagasse to either of the

C4-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

booms; two (2) booms with boom conveyors - one (1) on either side of the stacker - with mixing for mixing bagasse with back water prior to discharging the slurry on the pile; three (3) vertical pumps (mounted on the structure) for pumping bagasse back water from a central drain below the stacker to the cyclones for slushing the bagasse; a system of pipelines and valves for carrying the bagasse back water to the cyclones; instrumentation and controls consisting of necessary control valves, an anemometer for measuring wind speed, and safety alarms with necessary interlocks which will prevent movement and operation of the stacker if the wind speed exceeds pre-set values; electrical equipment consisting of distribution transformer, cable entrance junction boxes, medium voltage (MV) power cables, MV switchgear and motor controllers, a power transformer low voltage (LV) power and control cables, motor control centres (MCCs), cable trays, lighting with necessary lighting fixtures for proper illumination of the stacker, an operator's control cabin mounted on top of the stacker frame, air conditioning units for maintaining a comfortable room temperature inside the control cabin/MCC room, local emergency stop systems to stop the stacker movement and/or operation in case of emergencies, power and control cable reels, and necessary motors for operation of the stacker.

The storage slabs are suitably sloped to allow the water to drain off from the pile and get collected in the central drain. The bagasse pile is levelled using dozers. A number of mobile reclaim hoppers at various points in the bagasse storage yard and a system of belt conveyors have been installed around the periphery of the bagasse storage yard to reclaim bagasse and convey the same to the pulp mills.

Bagasse Yard #2

Bagasse yard #2 is of size 360 m (l) x 80 m (w). Wet pile storage of bagasse in the bagasse yard #2 is also carried out using a twin boom, mobile bagasse stacker #2. The stacker has been supplied by FMW, Austria and has a stacking capacity of 100 tph moist bagasse. It can be moved on rails along the entire length of the bagasse yard #2. Other technical details and method of operation of the bagasse stacker #2 are similar to those of the bagasse stacker #1.

The mobile reclaim hoppers and belt conveyors in both the bagasse yards have been so configured that the bagasse from either storage yard can be fed to any of the bagasse pulp mills. Water sprinkler system is provided to wet the top layer of the bagasse piles.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Reclaim

Bagasse is reclaimed from both the bagasse yards by means of front end loaders, which load the bagasse into mobile reclaim hoppers situated at various points along the bagasse yards. The mobile reclaim hoppers are provided with live bottom conveyors, which transfer bagasse on to the main reclaim conveyors. From the reclaim conveyors, bagasse is transferred to pulp mill feed conveyor, and from there into a stone catch tank of capacity 100 m³. Heavy stones settle at the bottom of this tank and are periodically removed. The bagasse slurry overflows into a reclaim chest.

Bagasse overfeed from the digestion section is also added into the reclaim chest. Pulp slurry from the reclaim chest is then pumped at about 1% consistency to a destoner. The pulp slurry enters the destoner tangentially. Heavier stones and sand settle at the bottom of the destoner and are periodically removed by timer-operated dump valves. The bagasse slurry overflows from the top of the destoner into sand rifflers.

There are four (4) sand rifflers, in stainless steel construction. The sand is periodically removed manually from the bottom of the rifflers. The cleaned bagasse slurry overflows into a collection tank of capacity 125 m 3.

The bagasse slurry is then pumped to the bagasse distribution headbox. From the distribution headbox, the bagasse slurry flows by gravity into five (5) aqua separators. The aqua separators are inclined screws, with perforated troughs. As the bagasse slurry flows through the aqua separators, the water drains off through the perforated bottoms and is passed through a side hill screen to remove fines and pith. The dewatered bagasse, at about 13-15% consistency, then falls by gravity on to a bagasse collection conveyor and fed to a distribution screw conveyor, from where it is fed to the digestion section.

The back water drained off from the aqua separators, is passed over an inclined side hill screen, mounted on top of a water storage chest. The water passes through the screen and is collected in the water storage chest, while the pith slurry is collected and thickened on a belt press to about 20% consistency. The thickened pith is conveyed to the pith storage yard, where it is further thickened by two (2) screw presses to around 50% dryness, to be burnt in the boilers. The back water collected in the water storage chest is reused for dilution at the destoner feed, rifflers and bagasse distribution headbox.

C4-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Continuous Digester

CBP #1 has two (2) continuous digesters, each of capacity 5 tph of unbleached pulp. A screw conveyor feeds bagasse to continuous digester through a pin drum feeder. The excess bagasse from screw conveyor is taken back to reclaim chest. Bagasse from pin drum feeder falls into the feeding chute of a 18" diameter plug screw feeder. Cooking liquor is added at the top of the digester inlet chamber. Blowback damper is located at the inlet chamber, which helps in avoidance of any steam blow back from the digester.

Cooking Conditions

Active alkali/charge as Na 2O % 13.5 on BD bagasse Bagasse feed/h t 10-11 BD Yield % 52-53 Pulp output/h t 5.5 Cooking temperature °C 168 2 Cooking pressure kg/cm 6.8-7 Cooking time min 20

Strength of white liquor gpl (as Na 2O) 83-87 Sulphidity % 17-18

After cooking, the pulp falls into a discharger. Black liquor at a temperature of 80°C is injected into the discharger from where pulp is blown to the blow tank. The discharger is fitted with a junk trap chamber, for removal of foreign materials, if any.

Brown Stock Washing

From the blow tank, pulp is pumped through a riffler to the first stage brown stock washer. The brown stock washing is a three (3) stage counter current washing system, supplied by HDO. Each washer is of 11.5 ' diameter x 26' face length, having a filtration area of 939 ft 2. Each washer has its own dedicated filtrate seal tank. Hot water at 65°C is used for pulp washing in the third stage washer; and the filtrate of each stage is used in the preceding washing stage.

The washed pulp, after the third stage brown stock washer, falls into an unbleached pulp storage tower, of capacity 530 m 3. There is no separate foam tank, and the foam breaker is installed in the top of the first seal tank itself. The brown stock washers are running on natural vacuum.

Screening and Thickening

Pulp is pumped from unbleached washed pulp storage tower to a surge chest and pumped to four (4) primary knotter screens, running in parallel.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The accepts from the primary knotter screens are diverted to the common accepts and pumped to two (2) primary screens, also running in parallel. Accepts from primary screens are pumped to two (2) deckers. Rejects from the primary screens are fed to a secondary screen, from where the accepts are connected to primary screen accepts line, while the rejects are sent to sewer.

The thickened pulp is stored in a screened unbleached pulp HD storage tower.

Bleaching

The mill practices C-Ep-H bleaching sequence for bagasse pulp. The bleach plant consists of three (3) vacuum drum washers of HDO make.

Each washer is of 11.5’ diameter x 24’ face length.

Pulp from unbleached screened storage tower is pumped to chlorine mixer. Chlorine is injected directly to the pulp before the chlorine mixer in the stock line itself. From the chlorine mixer, pulp enters the bottom of the chlorine tower. Chlorine tower is of upflow design, in RCC tile-lined construction. Pulp overflows from the top of the chlorine tower and enters the vat of the chlorine washer. The chlorine washer is of 11.5' diameter X 24' face width, with a surface area of 867 ft 2. Pulp, having been washed and thickened to a consistency of 10%, falls into a repulper conveyor. Filtrate from chlorine washer is collected in a seal tank and is used for the dilution of the pulp before chlorine washer as well as for screened tower dilution. Caustic at 75 gpl is added in the repulper of chlorine washer. The addition of caustic is around 2% on pulp. Also, hydrogen peroxide at 50% concentration is added in the repulper.

Pulp from the chlorine washer repulper conveyor is discharged to a heater mixer, where steam is injected. From this heater mixer, pulp is discharged to an alkali reaction tower. Here, pulp is stored for 3 hours for the reaction to take place. Pulp is pumped to alkali washer. Alkali washer is also of 11.5' diameter X 24' face length with a filtration area of 867 ft 2. Filtrate from alkali washer is collected in an alkali stage filtrate seal tank and is used for alkali storage tower ring dilution and washer vat dilution.

In addition to hypo solution at a strength of 30 tpd, sodium hydroxide (0.2% on pulp) and sulphamic acid (2 kg/t of pulp) are added in the repulper. Through a heater mixer, pulp is discharged to a hypo stage reaction tower.

Pulp is retained in the hypo storage reaction tower for 3 hours for the reaction to take place. Pulp is pumped to hypo stage washer. Hypo washer is of 11.5' diameter X 24' face length, with a filtration area of 867

C4-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

ft 2. Filtrate from hypo washer is collected in a hypo stage filtrate seal tank and is used for hypo stage reaction tower ring dilution and washer vat dilution.

Pulp from hypo washer is discharged through a belt conveyor to two (2) bleached HD storage towers of 530 m³ capacity each from where it is pumped to stock preparation section.

Chemical Bagasse Pulping Street #2

Reclaim

Bagasse is reclaimed from both the bagasse yards by means of front-end loaders, which load the bagasse into mobile reclaim hoppers situated at various points along the bagasse yards. The mobile reclaim hoppers are provided with live bottom conveyors, which transfer bagasse on to the main reclaim conveyors. From the reclaim conveyors, bagasse is transferred to a pulp mill feed conveyor, and from there into a stone catch tank of capacity 100 m 3. Heavy stones settle at the bottom of this tank and are periodically removed. The bagasse slurry overflows into a reclaim chest of capacity 500 m³.

Bagasse overfeed from the digestion section is also added into the reclaim chest. Pulp slurry from the reclaim chest is then pumped at about 1% consistency to a destoner of capacity 60 m³. Heavier stones and sand settle at the bottom of the destoner and are periodically removed by timer- operated dump valves. The bagasse slurry overflows from the top of the destoner into sand rifflers.

There are three (3) sand rifflers. The sand is periodically manually removed from the bottom of the rifflers. The cleaned bagasse slurry overflows into a collection tank of capacity 120 m 3.

The bagasse slurry is then pumped to the bagasse distribution headbox. From the distribution headbox, the bagasse slurry flows by gravity into seven (7) aqua separators. The aqua separators are inclined screws with perforated bottoms. As the bagasse slurry flows through the aqua separators, the water drains off through the perforated bottoms. The dewatered bagasse, at about 13-15% consistency is fed to the digestion section, by means of a conveying system.

The backwater drained off from the aqua separators is passed over an inclined side hill screen. The water passes through the screen and is collected in the water storage chest, while the pith slurry is collected and thickened to about 20% dryness on a twin wire pith press, supplied by Andritz Sprout-Bauer GmbH, Austria (ANDRITZ). The thickened pith is

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

conveyed to the pith storage yard where it is further dried by using two (2) screw presses before it is fed to the boilers. The backwater collected in the water storage chest is used for dilution at the destoner feed, rifflers and bagasse distribution headbox.

Cooking

There are three (3) continuous digesters of 5.5 tph pulp capacity. The diameter of each screw feeder is 18". About 13% of active alkali is used as

Na 2O.

The bagasse is transported to a screw conveyor with a continuous flow. This ensures that the chutes ahead of the pin drum feeders are always filled with bagasse. Bagasse through pin drum feeder falls into feeding chute of pulp screw feeder.

Cooking liquor in the required amount is injected in to the digester. The pulp, after cooking, is blown to blow tank. The cold blow black liquor is cooled from 90 oC to 45 oC before injecting it to the discharger by passing through a heat exchanger. The scrap materials collected in the bottom of the discharger are removed periodically.

Cooking Conditions

Active alkali/charge as Na 2O % 13.5 on BD Bagasse Bagasse feed/h t BD 11 to 12 Yield % 52 - 53 Pulp Output t 5.5 Cooking temperature 0C 168-170 Cooking pressure kg/cm 2(g) 6.8-7

Strength of white liquor gpl as Na 2O 83-87 Sulphidity % 17-18 Cooking time minutes 20

Brown Stock Washing

From the blow tank, pulp is pumped to primary pressure knotters of AHLSTROM make. The accepts of the pressure knotters flow to the vat of brown stock washer #1. The rejects of the pressure knotter are pumped to a vibrating screen. The accepts of the vibrating screen are diverted to brown stock washer #1 vat, while the rejects are sewered. The brown stock washing is a four (4) stage counter current washing system. All washers are of HDO make of Ripple Deck Type, and each washer is of 11.5' diameter x 26' face length. Each washer has its own dedicated filtrate seal tank. Hot water at 65°C is used for pulp washing in the fourth stage washer. The filtrate of the each stage is used for washing in the preceding stage.

C4-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The washed pulp falls into an unbleached pulp HD storage tower of 650 m³ capacity.

Screening, Cleaning and Thickening

Pulp in the washed pulp chest is pumped to primary slotted (0.25 mm slot) pressure screen of AHLSTROM make of capacity 12.5 tph or (300 tpd). The accepts of primary screen are pumped to the primary centricleaners. The rejects of primary pressure screen are taken to secondary pressure screen (1.2 mm perforation) of AHLSTROM make. Accepts from the secondary pressure screen are fed to the inlet of preceding stage. Rejects of secondary pressure screen are diverted to a pith press.

The primary pressure screen accepts are pumped to a centricleaning system, supplied by AHLSTROM, The centricleaning system is on cascade control where the rejects of each stage are fed to the succeeding stage. Accepts from the primary centricleaners are diverted to two (2) pulp thickeners, of HDO make, of dimensions 11.5' diameter x 16' face length, each having a filtration area of 578 ft 2. The thickened pulp is dumped in a screened pulp HD storage tower of 650 m³ capacity.

Bleaching

The mill practices C-Ep-H bleaching sequence for bagasse pulp. The bleach plant consists of three vacuum drum washers, of HDO make, of dimensions 11.5' diameter x 26' face length, having a filtration area of 939 ft 2 each. It was informed that a new chlorine washer of ripple deck type is installed recently. The old chlorine washer has been converted to ripple deck type and will replace the existing caustic washer shortly.

Screened pulp, stored in the screened pulp HD storage tower, is pumped to a chlorine mixer. The chlorine mixer is a T-mixer supplied by Sunds Defibrator, Sweden (SUNDS). Chlorine is injected into the pulp in the mixer. From the chlorine mixer, pulp enters the chlorine tower.

Pulp from the chlorine tower top overflows to the vat of chlorine washer. Caustic at 75 gpl strength is added at the repulper of the chlorine washer. Also hydrogen peroxide at 50% concentration is added. Pulp from chlorine washer repulper conveyor is discharged to a heater mixer where steam is injected. From heater mixer, pulp is discharged to an alkali reaction tower. Here, pulp is stored for two (2) hours for the reaction to be completed. Pulp is pumped to alkali washer. Hypo at a concentration 28-30 gpl is added in the alkali washer repulper. Sulphamic acid at the rate of 2 kg/t of pulp and caustic are added. The filtrate of alkali washer is collected in a filtrate tank and used for the alkali tower ring dilution and alkali washer vat dilution.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Pulp from the alkali washer repulper is discharged through a heater mixer into hypo stage reaction tower. Pulp is retained in the hypo tower for two (2) hours for the reaction to complete. Hypo tower pulp is pumped to hypo washer for washing. The washed pulp, free of chemicals, is diverted to two (2) bleached HD storage towers of 650 m³ capacity each. The filtrate of hypo washer is collected in a filtrate tank and used for hypo tower ring dilution and hypo washer vat dilution.

Mechanical Bagasse Pulping Street

The mechanical bagasse pulping street has a dedicated bagasse reclaim system.

Reclaim

Bagasse from the bagasse yards, by a conveying system is transferred to a stone catch tank of capacity 90 m 3. Heavy stones settle at the bottom of this tank and are periodically removed. The bagasse slurry overflows into a reclaim chest of capacity 500 m³.

Bagasse overfeed from the distribution conveyor is in digester house also added into the reclaim chest. Bagasse slurry from the reclaim chest is then pumped at about 1% consistency to a destoner of capacity 60 m 3. Heavier stones and sand settle at the bottom of the destoner and are periodically removed by timer-operated dump valves. The bagasse slurry overflows from the top of the destoner into sand rifflers.

There are three (3) sand rifflers, in stainless steel construction. The sand is periodically manually removed from the bottom of the rifflers. The cleaned bagasse slurry overflows into a collection tank of capacity 120 m 3.

The bagasse slurry is then pumped to the bagasse distribution headbox. From the distribution headbox, the bagasse slurry flows by gravity into four (4) aqua separators. The aqua separators are inclined screws with perforated bottoms. As the bagasse slurry flows through the aqua separators, the water drains off through the perforated bottoms and is passed through a side hill screen to remove fines and pith. The dewatered bagasse, at about 13-15% consistency, is fed to a distribution screw conveyor, from where it is fed to the Chemi Thermo Mechanical Pulp (CTMP) refining section, by means of a conveying system. Overfeed from the bagasse distribution system is fed back to the reclaim chest.

The back water drained off from the aqua separators is passed over an inclined side hill screen. The water passes through the screen and is collected in the water storage chest of 275 m³, while the pith slurry is collected and thickened to about 20% dryness on a twin wire pith press, supplied by ANDRITZ. The thickened pith is further dewatered in screw

C4-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

press to 50% consistency and is fed to the boilers. The back water collected is used for dilution at the destoner feed, rifflers and bagasse distribution headbox.

CTMP Refining

There are two (2) CTMP refiners - CTMP refiner #1 (designated as R1) and CTMP refiner #2 (designated as R2) Each CTMP refiner has its own dedicated feeding system consisting of the following :

 One (1) pin drum feeder

 One (1) weighing conveyor

 One (1) plug screw feeder

 One (1) heating screw

From the pin drum feeder, bagasse is discharged through a weighing conveyor into a plug screw feeder. In the inlet chamber, a mixture of

NaOH and Na 2SO 3 is added. The bagasse is then fed into the CTMP heating screw, where it is heated by low pressure (LP) steam.

The refiner is a pressurised BELOIT Unimount Refiner of size 56", with one stationary disc and one rotating disc. Bagasse is refined between the two (2) discs of the refiner, and the resulting chemi thermo mechanical pulp, at about 25-30% consistency, is blown into a blow tank of 175 m 3 capacity. The pulp from the blow tank is pumped to the CTMP intermediate chest. From the CTMP intermediate chest, the pulp is pumped to the chemi- mechanical pulp (CMP) refining section.

CMP Refining

There are two (2) CMP refining streets.

CMP Street #1

The major equipment in this street consist of the following :

 Two (2) screw presses with predrainers

 CMP screw conveyor

 Lump breaker

 Chemical heater mixer

 Upper steaming tube

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-17 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Lower steaming tube

 Metering screw

 CMP Unimount refiner (designated as R3) with its ribbon screw feeder

CMP Street #2

The major equipment in this street consist of the following:

 One (1) screw press

 Lump breaker (levelling conveyor)

 Mixer refiner (designated as R5) with its ribbon screw feeder

 Heating screw (Steaming tube)

 Metering screw

 CMP refiner (designated as R4) with its ribbon screw feeder

Screening, Cleaning and Thickening

Screening

Pulp from the CMP intermediate chest is pumped to the screening section. The screening section consists of one (1) pressure screen supplied by Ahlstrom Corporation, Finland (AHLSTROM). The pressure screen is provided with a slotted basket of size 0.20 mm. Accepts from the screen are joined at the suction of the primary centricleaner feed pump. The rejects are taken to refiner #4 (R4) for refining

Cleaning

The cleaning system has been supplied by Celleco-Hedemora, Sweden (CELLECO) and consists of three stages of cleaning. Accepts from the primary screen are pumped to the primary centricleaners.

Accepts from the primary cleaners are fed to the thickening system, while the rejects are fed to the subsequent cleaning stages. The accepts from the secondary and tertiary cleaning stages are cascaded back to the preceding stages. The tertiary stage rejects are then drained.

Thickening

The thickening system, consists of a pre-thickener and a twin-roll dewatering press, supplied by Sunds Defibrator, Sweden (SUNDS).

C4-18 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The pre-thickener is a rotary drum thickener of 3 m diameter x 4 m face width, having a dewatering area of about 38 m 2. The thickened pulp from the pre-thickener falls into a low density (LD) tank of capacity 20 m 3. Pulp from the LD tank is fed to a twin roll dewatering press, where it is thickened to about 30-35% consistency.

The twin roll dewatering press, Model DWA-719, consists of two (2) synchronous counter-rotating dewatering rolls in a pressurised vat.

The filtrates from both the pre-thickener and the twin roll dewatering press are collected in a dilution water surge chest, from where it is pumped to various points for system dilution.

Bleaching

At present, the mill has a single stage hydrogen peroxide bleaching system. The bleaching system consists of the following equipment :

 Peroxide mixer

 Heater mixer

 Pulp discharge system, installed in a RCC tile lined peroxide reaction tower

 Dilution screw conveyor

 Post bleach dewatering press

 Transfer belt conveyor from post bleach dewatering press to reversible belt conveyor over the bleached HD storage towers

 Reversible belt conveyor over the bleached HD storage towers

 Two (2) agitators for bleached HD storage towers of 650 m 3 capacity each.

The peroxide mixer, peroxide tower pulp discharge system, the post bleach washer and the bleached HD storage tower agitators have been supplied by SUNDS.

Thickened pulp from the twin-roll dewatering press is discharged into a mixer, where the 'peroxide soup' (consisting of hydrogen peroxide, sodium hydroxide, magnesium sulphate and sodium silicate) is added. Presently, about 80 kg soup is being consumed per ton of pulp. The mixer is a SUNDS Model T-mixer, with wetted parts lined with Hastalloy C-22. From the T-mixer, the pulp is discharged into a heater mixer, where LP steam is added to raise the temperature of the pulp to about 75 oC. The heater

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-19 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

mixer has wetted parts in stainless steel construction. From the heater mixer, the pulp is discharged into the downflow peroxide reaction tower. The peroxide reaction tower is a RCC tile lined tower, of capacity 250 m³. It is provided with a high consistency discharge arrangement consisting of the following:

 One (1) rotating discharger

 Four (4) supports

 Two (2) discharge conveyors with wetted parts in stainless steel

 Ultrasonic type level indicator for the peroxide tower

The pulp from the two (2) discharge conveyors is discharged via a dilution screw conveyor into a bleached pulp dilution chest, which is a RCC tile- lined chest of capacity 50 m 3 from where it is pumped to the post-bleach dewatering press. The post-bleach dewatering press is similar in all respects to the dewatering press provided in the pulp thickening section. The backwater from the post-bleach dewatering press is collected in a RCC tile lined seal tank of capacity 125 m 3. The bleached pulp from the post- bleach dewatering press is discharged into either of the two (2) bleached HD storage towers. Each bleached HD storage tower is in RCC tile lined construction and has a capacity of 650 m 3.

Bleached pulp from either of the bleached HD storage towers is then pumped to the stock preparation section.

4.6.4 Details of ongoing MDP

4.6.4.1 Chipper house

Loading of Wood Logs

Loaders are off-load logs from log trucks and are fed the live log deck directly in front of each loader. These loaders are capable of unloading and loading 30 tph BD wood logs for each Disc chipper.

Live Log Decks

The live log deck is maintained a constant supply of logs feeding the chipper infeed conveyor, which in turn keeps logs continuously in the chipper mouth.

C4-20 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Log Sorting Bin and Metal Detector Infeed Conveyor

Logs are dropped from the live log deck into the log sorting bin so that the chipper infeed conveyor is filled with logs of the same width and height as the chipper mouth.

Two (2) chains move the logs into the metal detector.

Fibreglass Section, Metal Detector and Slider Belt

A tunnel style metal detector is provided, for giving optimum protection to downstream processing equipment. The system included pressure regulator, solenoid valve, 0.75 litre reservoir, spray head mounting brackets, hardware, terminals, one gallon of red dye, air tubing and a NEMA 4 control cabinet.

A bulkhead is located near the infeed of the metal detector to prevent logs from contacting and damaging the top of the metal detector.

Trough in metal free areas is solid fibreglass section. The logs travel through the metal detector on a rubber slider belt, which in turn feeds the log wash roller infeed section.

Log Wash Section

The log wash conveyor has a powered roll case bottom with 12” diameter rolls, a hooded cover with multiple spray nozzles. The closed loop system delivers 20 gallons of water per minute for cleaning.

Two (2) Strand Chipper Infeed Conveyor

The log wash conveyor is fed the logs into the two strand chipper infeed conveyor, which operates at 95% of the chipper feed rate. Then, the chipper infeed conveyor is fed the chips into the chippers.

Two (2) Fulghum 75-8K, Horizontal Feed, Bottom Discharge Chippers

The Fulghum 75” 8-knife horizontal feed bottom discharge chipper is provided to process 30 BD tph chips. The chips are bottom discharged on to a belt conveyor.

Two (2) chippers are provided.

Chipper Discharge Conveyor

The discharge belt conveyor is delivered the chips from chipper to the gross overs chips screening system.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-21 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Chips Screen, Vibrating Conveyor, Rechipper and Blowing System

The chips are deposited on to the chips screens, which allow all but the gross oversized chips to continue on to the surge bins. The gross oversized chips are then deposited in the vibrating conveyor, which delivers them to the 60”, 8-knife rechipper. A fibreglass conveyor trough is necessary in the magnet location to avoid magnetizing the trough. A special transition piece is provided the vibrating conveyor and rechipper to aid in transitioning material in the rechipper spout. The magnetic separator is placed above conveyor feeding rechipper. After being chipped, the material is blown to a and redeposited on the chips screens.

Screen Discharge Conveyor and Surge Bins and Star Feeders

The chips screen discharge belt conveyor is delivered all accept chips to the surge bins and star feeders. Rotary type star feeder and surge a bin is evenly distributed chips to screens.

Chips storage and chips feeding system to digesters

Chips are screened and accepted chips are stored in a rectangular RCC silo of 2000 m³ volume. Two (2) trolley mounted chip extraction screw conveyors (Variable frequency drives (VFD)) are provided in the new chips silo. In each trolley there are two screws each of 50 tph capacity. Screw conveyors will extract the wood chips from new chip silo for feeding to the digester feed conveyor#1 (140 BD tph and 1000 mm belt width). Digester feed conveyor#1 will feed the chips into the digester feed belt conveyor#2. The digester feed belt conveyor # 2 which is provided with an electro magnetic separator is horizontal type and feeds the wood chips to super batch cooking system.

4.6.4.2 Hard Wood Cooking Plant

TNPL has installed the SuperBatch™ Cooking system.

The system consists of the following operational sequences:

 Combined chip and impregnation liquor fill

 Hot black liquor treatment

 Hot cooking liquor charge

 Heating and cooking

 Terminal displacement

 Pump discharge

C4-22 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Combined Chip and Impregnation Liquor Fill

The cooking cycle commences with the chip filling with LP steam packing. The chip feeding is done with screw conveyors.

During the chip fill, impregnation liquor fill is started as well by pumping black liquor into the digester from the displacement liquor tank. The excess amount of the black liquor is taken into the digester and the overflow is returned to the same tank. Air is removed from the digester through the displacement screen by using evacuation fans, chips are preheated and preimpregnated. At the end of this stage, the digester is pressurised with a liquor pump and the digester is hydraulically full.

The residual alkali of the impregnation liquor can be adjusted by introducing white liquor during the fill.

Hot Black Liquor Treatment

In this stage, hot black liquor from the hot black liquor accumulator displaces the black liquor into the displacement liquor tank. The displaced liquor, at a temperature greater than 100 oC, is led to the hot black liquor accumulator.

Hot black liquor residual alkali level is adjusted to the desired level with white liquor addition.

Hot Cooking Liquor Charge

Hot cooking liquor charge starts after the initial hot black liquor treatment by mixing hot white liquor together with hot black liquor. The digester contents reach a temperature of 150-170 oC.

Heating and Cooking

Heating is carried out with MP steam in the circulation pipe. No heat exchanger is needed due to the small steam amount required. Instead, direct steam nozzles are used.

At the cooking phase, the digester is kept at a desired cooking temperature and pressure until the target H-factor is reached. Part of the hot white liquor is introduced during the pressure phase (alkali split). Extra liquor from the digester is led to the hot black liquor accumulator.

Terminal Displacement

At the end of the cooking stage, with the cooking conditions still prevailing, terminal displacement is carried out by pumping black liquor from the

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-23 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

displacement tank. Hot black liquor in the digester is displaced into the hot black liquor accumulator, thus terminating the cooking reactions. The amount of displacement liquor corresponds to the total volume of the brown stock washing filtrate. As a result, pulp temperature is below 100 oC.

Pump Discharge

The digester is discharged by a pump at a low digester pressure to a storage tower. During discharge, the pulp is diluted in the digester bottom with the liquor from the displacement liquor tank. Pulp temperature is normally below 90 oC.

4.6.4.3 Screening, Washing and Oxygen Delignification System

Screening

Pulp from the digester discharge tank is diluted to about 3.5% and pumped to a knotter-cum-primary screen (DeltaCombi™, type DC10). Coarse rejects (knots) from the knotter-cum-primary screen are fed to a junk trap. Accepts from the junk trap are fed to a coarse screen (type KFA-50). Rejects from the junk trap are sewered. Accepts from the coarse screen are fed (along with accepts from the sand cleaner) to a drum thickener. Rejects from the coarse screen are collected and fed back to the cooking plant.

Fine rejects from the knotter-cum-primary screen are pumped to a secondary pressure screen. Accepts from the secondary pressure screen are fed back to the digester discharge tank, while rejects are fed to the vibrating screen. Accepts from the vibrating screen are fed back to the suction of the sand cleaner feed pump. Rejects from the vibrating screen are disposed. Accepts from the sand cleaner are fed to the suction of a pump feeding a delta thickener. In the delta thickener, sand cleaner accepts and coarse screen accepts are thickened. The thickened material from the thickener is pumped to the digester discharge tank. Filtrate from the thickener is fed into the first stage seal tank of brown stock washing.

Brown Stock Washing

Accepts from the knotter-cum-primary screen (at approximately 3.2% consistency) are fed to the first brown stock washing stage (Twin Roll Press, Model TRPA-924). The pulp is washed with filtrate from the second brown stock washing stage. The pulp is thickened to about 32% consistency at the outlet of the twin roll press and discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump. Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the first brown stock washing stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

C4-24 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is further diluted to about 7% consistency and pumped to the second brown stock washing stage (Twin Roll Press, Model TRPB-924). The pulp is washed with filtrate from the first post oxygen washing stage. The pulp is thickened to about 32% consistency at the outlet of the twin roll press and discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump. Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the second brown stock washing stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

Oxygen Delignification system

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is pumped to the first stage oxygen mixer, where oxygen gas is added to the pulp. The pulp then passes through an upward flow first stage oxygen reactor. The oxygen reactor is provided with an inlet pulp distributor and an outlet pulp discharger. From the first stage oxygen reactor, the pulp discharges into a steam heater, where MP steam is added. The pulp is then pumped by means of a MC pump into the second stage oxygen mixer. The pulp then passes through an upward flow second stage oxygen reactor. The oxygen reactor is provided with an inlet pulp distributor and an outlet pulp discharger. From the second stage oxygen reactor, the pulp discharges into an oxygen stage blow tank. The blow tank is provided with a bottom scraper. From the oxygen blow tank, the pulp is discharged into the standpipe of a MC pump, to be fed to the post-oxygen washing system.

Post-Oxygen Washing

There are two (2) stages of post-oxygen washing, both stages using Twin Roll Presses.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is further diluted to about 7% consistency and pumped to the first post oxygen washing stage (Twin Roll Press). The pulp is washed with filtrate from the second post oxygen washing stage. The pulp is thickened to about 32% consistency at the outlet of the twin roll press and discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump. Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the first post oxygen washing stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the above MC pump is pumped to the Unbleached MC Storage Tower. The Unbleached MC Storage Tower is provided with a bottom pulp discharge arrangement (FlowScraper). From the Unbleached MC Storage Tower, the pulp is discharged into the standpipe of a MC pump.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-25 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is further diluted to about 7% consistency and pumped to the second post oxygen washing stage (Twin Roll Press). The pulp is washed with hot water. The pulp is thickened to about 32% consistency at the outlet of the twin roll press and discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump. Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the second post oxygen washing stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

From the outlet of the shredder conveyor, the pulp is fed to the bleach plant.

Hardwood Pulp Bleach plant

Unbleached pulp from the second post oxygen washing stage discharges at about 12% consistency into the standpipe of a MC pump. Prior to discharging into this standpipe, sulphuric acid is added to the dilution liquor to the shredder conveyor of the second post oxygen washing stage.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is pumped to the D HT stage chemical mixer, where chlorine dioxide solution is added to the pulp.

The pulp then passes through an upward flow D HT stage reaction tower.

The D HT stage reaction tower is provided with an inlet pulp distributor and

an outlet tower scraper. From the D HT stage reaction tower, the pulp discharges into the stand pipe of a MC pump. The pulp is diluted in the

standpipe and pumped to the D HT stage bleach washer (Twin Roll Press). The pulp is then discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the

standpipe of a MC pump. Hydrogen peroxide (H 2O2) and caustic are added to the dilution liquor to this shredder conveyor. Filtrate generated from

this twin roll press is collected in the D HT stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is pumped to the EOP stage chemical mixer, where oxygen gas is added to the pulp. The pulp then passes through an upward flow EOP stage pre-reaction tower. From the top of the pre-reaction tower, the pulp is discharged into a downward flow EOP stage reaction tower. The EOP stage reaction tower is provided with a flow scraper, to facilitate discharging of pulp, at medium consistency, into a standpipe at the bottom of the EOP stage reaction tower. The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is further diluted to about 7% consistency and pumped to the EOP stage bleach washer (Twin Roll Press). The pulp is washed and thickened to about 32% consistency at the outlet of this twin roll press. The pulp is then discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump.

C4-26 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the EOP stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is pumped to the D 1 stage chemical mixer, where chlorine dioxide solution is added to the pulp.

The pulp then passes through an upward flow D 1 stage reaction tower. The

D1 stage reaction tower is provided with an inlet pulp distributor and an

outlet tower scraper. From the D 1 stage reaction tower, the pulp discharges into the stand pipe of a MC pump. The pulp is diluted in the

standpipe and pumped to the D 1 stage bleach washer. The pulp is then discharged to a shredder conveyor. In the shredder conveyor, the pulp is diluted to 12% consistency and discharged to the standpipe of a MC pump.

Filtrate generated from this twin roll press is collected in the D 1 stage seal tank and reused for dilution in the process.

The pulp collected in the standpipe of the MC pump is pumped to the Bleached MC Storage Tower, from where it is used for paper-making. The Bleached MC Storage Tower is provided with an agitator for keeping the pulp in suspension at the bottom of the tower.

The bleach plant is also provided with a two (2) stage scrubber for scrubbing of vapours collected from the equipment, reaction towers and seal tanks of the various bleaching stages, a fan for alkaline ventilation and a fan for acidic ventilation.

Chemical Bagasse ECF Bleach Plant

The washed pulp from the two existing brown stock lines goes by deckers down to new low consistency chest.

From the low consistency chest, the low consistency pulp is fed to a displacement wash press, TRPA. The press creates an excellent barrier between the brown stock and bleach plant as it gives a high and even outlet consistency on the pulp.

The bleaching starts with the D 0 stage, chlorine dioxide is added by a

mixer, type SMF before the pulp enters the D 0 reaction tower. After the chlorine dioxide stage, the pulp is washed in a dewatering press and once again diluted before the pulp drops down into a standpipe and is pumped to the Eop reactor. Before the extraction stage, oxygen and hydrogen peroxide are added. After the extraction stage, the pulp goes through a

wash press and thereafter to the D 1 stage. Before the pulp goes into the storage tower, it is dewatered to suitable consistency.

The presses between the stages ensure a high and stable pulp inlet consistency to reactor and the towers, which is important for an efficient system. In all three bleaching stages dewatering presses, TRPW are used,

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-27 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

but in the post oxygen position a displacement wash press, TRPA is used. The pulp from the brown stock contains a high amount of COD; to decrease the carry over into the bleach plant, a displacement wash press is used in this position.

Hot water is used as washing liquor on the Eop and D 1 stages. In the Do

stage, filtrate from the D 1 stage is used. After the washing, the pulp is diluted with filtrate from the following stage. Finally, all filtrates are taken through the liquor filters to recover the fibres in the filtrates.

4.6.5 Purchased Bleached Kraft Pulp System

The soft wood pulp is generally added in the paper making to take care of special quality paper or attains to meet the demands of higher production.

The purchased pulp is fed to the hydrapulper through a belt conveyor. Then, the back water is fed to the hydrapulper from paper machines to dilute the pulp. After mixing the pulp uniformly, the diluted pulp at 3.5 % to 4 % is fed to the stock preparation system after due refining.

4.6.6 Chemical Plant

4.6.6.1 Chlorine Dioxide

A new chlorine dioxide generation plant, based on the integrated process is installed to meet the total requirements of chlorine dioxide for both the new hardwood and chemical bagasse lines.

The Chemetics Integrated Chlorine Dioxide System, consisting of three (3) plant areas to produce the two (2) intermediate products, sodium chlorate

(NaClO 3) and hydrochloric acid (HCl), and the final product, chlorine

dioxide (ClO 2).

Sodium chlorate is produced by passing an electric current through a solution that contains sodium chloride (salt). The salt for this reaction is a recycled by-product from the chlorine dioxide production reaction. Hydrogen gas is co-produced with the sodium chlorate and is used as a feedstock for hydrochloric acid production.

Hydrochloric acid is produced by burning chlorine gas and hydrogen gas. The hydrogen gas comes from the sodium chlorate electrolysis area. Make-up chlorine gas comes from the battery limits of the plant. Weak chlorine gas, a recycled by-product of the chlorine dioxide generation reaction, is combined with the chlorine make-up stream prior to being burnt with the hydrogen gas.

C4-28 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Chlorine dioxide gas is produced, along with chlorine gas and sodium chloride (salt), by combining strong chlorate liquor and hydrochloric acid in the chlorine dioxide generator. The chlorine dioxide gas is absorbed in chilled water to produce the chlorine dioxide solution for use in the bleach plant. The liquor leaving the generator contains unreacted sodium chlorate and the by-product salt. This solution, called weak chlorate liquor, is recycled back to the sodium chlorate electrolysis area for reconcentration. The chlorine by-product (weak chlorine), which is not absorbed, is sent to the hydrochloric acid synthesis unit to be used as a feedstock for HCl production.

Sodium Chlorate Production Area

Sodium chlorate liquor is produced in the sodium chlorate production area.

In the electrolysers, each of which consists of a number of cells connected together, sodium chloride and water are electrochemically converted to chlorine, sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas. The liquid/gas mixture rises to the degassifiers where the hydrogen gas is separated from the liquor. The liquor then passes to the chlorate reactor where the reaction to form sodium chlorate is completed. The electrolyte cooler removes the heat generated during electrolysis.

Weak liquor returning from the chlorine dioxide generation area displaces strong chlorate liquor from the chlorate reactor, causing an overflow into the strong chlorate feed tank. This tank provides strong chlorate surge volume for feed to the chlorine dioxide generator.

Chlorate liquor is cooled and filtered before introduction to the chlorine dioxide generator, by pumping it through the chlorate cooler, chlorate filter and chlorate chiller using the strong chlorate feed pump.

Hydrogen, containing small quantities of chlorine and oxygen, is co- produced with sodium chlorate. Most of the hydrogen is used for HCl synthesis, while the remainder is passed through the hydrogen scrubber for chlorine removal before venting to the atmosphere.

The chlorine is absorbed in the hydrogen scrubber using a circulating stream of sodium hydroxide solution. The hydrogen scrubber pump provides circulation, while the hydrogen scrubber cooler removes the heat produced in the hydrogen scrubber.

Hydrochloric Acid Synthesis Area

Hydrochloric acid is produced by the combustion of hydrogen gas and chlorine gas, followed by absorption of the hydrogen chloride vapours in demineralised water. Hydrogen from the chlorate production area, weak

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-29 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

chlorine from the chlorine dioxide generator and strong chlorine are fed to the HCl synthesis unit.

The HCl synthesis unit has the dual purpose of burning the hydrogen and chlorine gases and absorbing most of the resulting hydrogen chloride gas in the weak acid stream from the tail gas scrubber. Product acid flows by gravity from the HCl synthesis unit to the HCl storage tank.

The HCl synthesis unit consists of a series of graphite blocks enclosed by a carbon steel jacket. Hydrogen and chlorine gases are introduced into the HCl synthesis unit through separate inlet ports and are combined in the burner assembly. Cooling water is supplied to the HCl synthesis unit to remove the heat that is generated by the combustion of hydrogen with chlorine and by the absorption of HCl.

Hydrogen gas from the sodium chlorate plant is hot and saturated with water vapour. Droplets of condensate must be removed from the hydrogen stream as they can cause damage to the HCl synthesis unit. This is accompanied by cooling the hydrogen in the hydrogen cooler and then passing the gas through the hydrogen demister.

The tail gas scrubber absorbs the residual hydrogen chloride gas from the HCl synthesis unit in demineralised water. The resulting weak acid flows to the HCl synthesis unit, where it absorbs more hydrogen chloride gas. The vent gas from the tail gas scrubber consists of excess hydrogen and inerts (such as nitrogen), which are present in the chlorine feed streams.

The product hydrochloric acid is stored in the HCl storage tank and fed to the chlorine dioxide generator by the HCl supply pump.

Chlorine Dioxide Generation Area

Chlorine dioxide is produced by reacting sodium chlorate liquor and hydrochloric acid in the Chemetics chlorine dioxide generator.

Chlorine dioxide, chlorine, sodium chloride and water are formed in the chlorine dioxide generator from the reaction of sodium chlorate and hydrochloric acid.

Weak chlorate liquor overflows from the generator to the weak chlorate evaporator, where excess water is removed to maintain the water balance in the closed loop chlorate liquor circuit. Water is added to the liquor with the hydrochloric acid and is produced by the chlorine dioxide generation reaction. Water is removed from the liquor by the hydrogen and chlorine dioxide gas streams and is consumed in the sodium chlorate production reaction. The weak chlorate liquor from the evaporator is pumped back to the chlorate reactor for reconcentration using the weak chlorate pump.

C4-30 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Vapour from the evaporator is condensed in the generator evaporator condenser and combined with the chlorine dioxide solution.

Chlorine dioxide is unstable at high concentrations and requires dilution to prevent decomposition. The dilution air compressor transfers air into the generator to dilute the chlorine dioxide gas.

The gas stream from the generator containing air, chlorine and chlorine dioxide passes to the chlorine dioxide absorber. The chlorine dioxide is preferentially absorbed in chilled water, while the air/chlorine mixture (weak chlorine) passes through and is transported to the HCl synthesis unit by the weak chlorine blower. Some of the weak chlorine is recycled back to the generator to reduce the quantity of air required for chlorine dioxide gas dilution. The chlorine dioxide pump tank provides a reservoir for the chlorine dioxide transfer pump, which transfers the chlorine dioxide solution to storage.

The chlorine dioxide supply pump provides chlorine dioxide solution to the mill from the chlorine dioxide storage tanks.

The hypo system absorbs the weak chlorine from the absorber in emergency situations or when the HCl synthesis unit is shut down. The weak chlorine blower transfers weak chlorine from the chlorine dioxide absorber to the hypo system.

Sodium hydroxide solution is circulated around the hypo tower and hypo tower pump tank by the hypo tower pump. The hypo tower cooler removes the heat generated by the above reaction. The hypo fan maintains the hypo system under vacuum to draw in the weak chlorine.

Chlorine Vaporisation

Liquid chlorine is withdrawn from the chlorine cylinders through the valves and piping. Dry air is provided for padding.

Liquid chlorine is vaporised in a chlorine vaporiser, which consists of a monel tube installed in a carbon steel jacket. LP steam is injected in the jacket to vaporise the liquid chlorine within the tube.

The chlorine superheater consists of a monel tube with a carbon steel jacket. Steam is used to raise the chlorine gas temperature to approximately 50 oC.

4.6.6.2 Oxygen Generation

A new oxygen generation plant is installed to meet the total requirements of oxygen for both the new hardwood and chemical bagasse lines.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-31 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TNPL has installed Vacuum Pressure Swing Adsorption (VPSA) system for oxygen generation.

Two (2) molecular sieves vessels operate in a cycle. At a time, one vessel remains in oxygen production while second vessel remains under vacuum regeneration.

Feed air at around 30°C temperature from blower after cooler is taken to molecular sieves vessels. Oxygen is continuously produced and is collected in a surge vessel.

Vacuum pump produces 530 mm Hg vacuum during regeneration. The vacuum pump exhaust goes to atmosphere through a silencer. In regeneration process, a little amount of pure oxygen purge is used from the oxygen production and it regenerates molecular sieves.

Oxygen gas is continuously taken to oxygen compressor for increasing the pressure to 25 kg/cm 2 (g). Then the compressed gas is stored in two (2) storage tanks. After storage tank, gas pressure is reduced to 14 bar in pressure reducing station and from there, Oxygen gas will go to process.

4.6.6.3 White Liquor Oxidation

For oxygen delignification, a new white liquor oxidation plant is installed to meet the total requirements of oxidised white liquor for the new hardwood pulp mill.

The concept of white liquor oxidation is a natural development following the commercialization of the oxygen delignification. Oxygen delignification requires a source of caustic which is often supplied by white liquor. However, to maximise oxygen selectivity for lignin and to stabilise temperature control, the sodium sulphide in the white liquor must be pre- oxidised to sodium thio-sulphate.

The conversion of sodium sulphide to sodium thio-sulphate may be expressed as:

2Na 2S + 2O 2 + H 2O = Na 2S2O3 + 2NaOH

The oxidation of sodium sulphide in white liquor is slower than in black liquor and a small addition of black liquor can be added to catalyse the reaction. However, oxidation systems designed by AHLA give efficiencies of 95% and even higher, without addition of black liquor or any other catalyst.

The molecular oxygen system is operated under pressure and at a higher temperature than the air based system. Fresh oxygen and white liquor are

C4-32 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

added in a proprietary reactor system. During cold start-ups a small quantity of steam is added through a static mixer ahead of the proprietary oxygen reactor. The steam injection is not required to be added during normal operation of the plant. The reactor is followed by a phase separator to allow for degassing of any entrained vapours and gases. The hot white liquor can be transported to delignification where the heat will be recovered in the pulp stock. This will require the liquor to be injected under pressure, otherwise flashing may occur.

Oxygen is reacted with the white liquor under a solution pressure of about 10.5 kg/cm² (g). Most of the reaction occurs in the white liquor reactor. Less than 20% excess oxygen is required to complete the oxidation of the sodium sulphide to thio-sulphate. The phase separator is a pressure vessel with a quiet surface to allow the release of any entrained gases. The exothermic reaction typically adds a temperature increase of 55 to 85°C to the white liquor. The white liquor booster pump is included to allow turn- down within the system.

4.6.6.4 Nitrogen Generation Plant

TNPL has installed Pressure Swing Adsorption (PSA) system for nitrogen generation.

One screw type compressor is provided to feed the compressed air to Nitrogen generator. Compressed air from the compressor is taken to the after cooler and from there to air receiver. Air is filtered and oil removed in three (3) special coalescing filters down to 0.01 ppm level.

Then compressed air from air receiver is taken to PSA unit. PSA unit vessels are packed with Alumina bed at bottom and Carbon molecular sieves at top. This unit has automatic changeover valves operated by sequence programmer. Nitrogen is produced with around 0.5% oxygen and collected in a surge vessel. A three way vent valve is provided to vent the gas in the beginning or in the event of any abnormality. In case of any abnormality, this vent valve opens to atmosphere and indication / alarm will come on the control panel.

Nitrogen gas is continuously taken to nitrogen booster compressor for increasing the pressure to 15 kg/cm 2 (g). Then the compressed gas is stored in two (2) storage tanks. From storage tank, Nitrogen gas will go the process consumption point after the gas pressure is reduced to 3.5 to 4.5 kg/cm 2 (g) in pressure reducing station.

When pressure in storage tank comes down to 3 kg/cm² (g) due to consumption of nitrogen gas, pressure switch automatically restarts the gas generator for refilling the storage tank.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-33 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.6.7 Chemical Recovery System

General

Taking into consideration recent developments in the chemical recovery systems and practices, the MEP was focussing on environmentally friendly modern technology, the containment of operating costs and process improvements. With the increasing cost of energy, and far more stringent environment regulations due to increasing public awareness and corporate commitment to provide clean water and air in and around the mill, the pollution abatement aspect has been well-addressed.

The changes in the cooking and bleaching system, return of part of bleach plant wastewater to the liquor cycle to minimise water consumption, increase in concentration of non-process elements in the liquor cycle and low calorific value have been taken care of in the design of the system.

4.6.7.1 Evaporation Plant

The present trend in mills is to fire black liquor at a concentration of 80% or more dry solids. However, limited by the high viscosity of the black liquor from kraft pulping of bagasse, the production of liquor from evaporation plant is limited to 70% dry solids. The proposed evaporation plant is conservatively sized to evaporate spill liquor and secondary sludge also. The plant is equipped with a condensate segregation system, in view of water conservation and pollution control.

The total water evaporation capacity requirement, after the present expansion will be 530 tph. The existing falling film evaporator of 170 tph water evaporation capacity will be derated to 150 tph capacity, as there will be an increase in feed liquor solids from 8% to 10.5%. The feed liquor will be mixed liquor from wood fibre line and chemical bagasse fibre line as well. For the additional capacity of 380 tph, a new evaporation plant of falling film type, tubular type is being installed. The product concentration will be 70% dry solids. The system will be designed with process condensate segregation facility.

The new evaporation plant is a seven-effect street with three bodies for the first effect along with a finisher effect. The plant will be operated through DCS, with facility to automatically change over for cleaning of high concentration effects and its spare for washing and descaling operations without warranting any outage and production loss.

The condensate segregation system enables 90% of the process condensate to be reused in washing and recausticising plants, as this will not have any contamination and foul odour. The capacity of the evaporation plant considers the spill liquor also. This system helps in water

C4-34 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

conservation and reducing the load on the waste water treatment plant (WWTP).

The new evaporation plant along with the existing falling film evaporation plant will suffice the requirement. The existing plant will be operating with a product concentration of 45%. However, the plant will be derated to 150 tph, as there will be an increase in feed liquor solids, from 8% to 10.5%. The product liquor from the existing evaporator will be mixed with black liquor to first effect of the new evaporation plant. This arrangement will eliminate the need for retrofitting the existing evaporator with additional bodies to 70% solids, and thus will eliminate the down time that would have been necessitated for retrofitting the existing evaporator. The proposed evaporation plant will have a first effect with sufficient heating surface to accommodate 45% solids liquor from the existing plant. The new plant will have a first effect consisting of three bodies. Out of the three bodies, two will be in black liquor processing and the third in washing mode. The three bodies can be sequentially changed over from the DCS, depending upon the requirement for washing. This will ensure continuous production of CBL at uniform concentration. The non condensable gases shall be collected and led to the lime kilns for incineration, as part of non condensable system in compliance with CREP guidelines.

4.6.7.2 Chemical Recovery Boiler

Changes in pulping trends, increasing energy costs, and growing environmental awareness, have necessitated improvements in the chemical recovery boilers. A high solid firing has eliminated the use of direct contact evaporators, which are mainly responsible for emission of total reduced sulphur (TRS) gases from the recovery boilers. This has helped in increasing energy savings and in complying with more stringent emission limits. The boilers are being designed for high pressures and temperature (460 oC) to take maximum advantage of the power generating capacity of the boiler. With high solids content, uninterrupted liquor firing can be achieved without any blackouts and unstable conditions. With the increased solids content, ratio of steam production increases.

Flue gas heat loss reduces, as the flue gas volume comes down. The firing rate can be maximised without interruption, maintaining continuity of operations. With the decrease in water content in black liquor and less heat loss through radiation as a result of membrane type wall construction, thermal efficiency of the boiler will increase. With the high solids firing, the carry over of chemical particles is less, reducing the entry of particulates into the ESP and resulting in lower stack emissions. With the increase in hearth temperature and elimination of direct control (DC) evaporators, the TRS emission is minimised. With reduced carry over and pluggage of boiler flue gas passes, availability of the unit increases.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-35 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Improved combustion air system for the modern recovery boilers has helped significantly to achieve the above advantages. Instead of a conventional two level air system, all modern boilers have three, or four level air systems. Environmental protection is gaining in importance day by day and the particulate emission through the flue gas is to be within the Pollution Control Board norms (less than 150 mg/Nm 3).

A new chemical recovery boiler with a BL solids firing design capacity of 1300 tpd has been installed recently. This capacity also considers the solids from oxygen delignification plant. The boiler is with a large economiser, without any DC evaporator, in view of the pollution abatement measures and energy efficiency.

The recovery boiler is DCS operated. The ESP is of twin chamber, each chamber with three fields in the gas path. Tall stack of height 90 m for dispersion of flue gas in to the atmosphere is installed.

4.6.7.3 Recausticising Plant

To minimise silica content in the cooking liquor cycle, presently TNPL operates a two-stage recausticising plant with an active alkali production capacity of 170 tpd. The lime mud from the first stage slaking is disposed of to cement mills and lime mud from the second stage is reburned.

The future active alkali requirement, after the ongoing expansion, is about 310 tpd. Claridisc (CD) filters for white liquor clarification and lime mud washing are being installed along with additional slaker and lime handling system.

The existing slakers, unit clarifiers along with the existing washers will be made use of for first stage slaking and green liquor clarification. The new second stage causticising system has modern slow speed screw type slaker, multi compartmental causticisers, claridisc (CD) filters for white liquor clarification and CD lime mud filter.

To minimise the silica content in the liquor cycle, the two-stage recausticising as practised now will continue. It is expected that the silica concentration will be lower in the system, as the mill will produce about 300 tpd of hardwood pulp in place of the present production of 100 tpd. To contain the project cost, the existing causticising equipment will be used for two streets of preslaking as much as possible. The lime from preslaking will be better washed and filtered for an alkali content of less than 0.5% in the lime mud on dry basis, so that the lime mud can be used in cement mills.

C4-36 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.6.7.4 Lime Mud Reburning Kiln

The mill is presently operating a lime mud-reburning kiln of 170 tpd capacity. Lime requirement post-MDP will be 340 tpd including 20 tpd lime required for methanation plant. A new modern lime mud reburning kiln is being installed for the additional capacity of 170 tpd. The kiln energy efficient with double layer refractory and with satellite type burnt lime coolers. The kiln have provision for firing non-condensable gas (NCG), and biogas, besides fuel oil. The kiln will be operated through DCS with kiln control system.

The ESP of the latest design has adequate collection efficiency to bring down the emission levels to 150 mg/Nm 3 as per the guidelines of pollution control authorities. A tall stack for dispersion of flue gas in to the atmosphere is being installed.

4.6.8 Captive Power Plant

4.6.8.1 Steam Plant

The power plant comprises various sections as detailed below:

 Power boilers

 Turbo alternators

 Air Compressor plant

 Coal handling system

 Ash handling system

4.6.8.2 Power Boilers

The details of the existing power boilers (PB) and chemical recovery boilers (CRB) are furnished below.

PB and CRB Steam Pressure Steam Temperature MCR (ata) (°C) (tph) PB # 1 45 440 60 PB # 2 45 440 60 PB # 3 45 440 60 PB # 4 45 440 60 PB # 5 65 485 90 CRB # 1 45 440 40 CRB # 2 45 440 50

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-37 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The above boilers meet the steam demand of the entire mill including the steam required for power generation of the mill’s requirement and also exporting around 12 to 15 MW power to TNEB grid.

Boiler house consists of a battery of five (5) multi-fuel boilers. Boilers #1, #2 & #3 are supplied by Fives Cail Babcock, France. Boiler #4 is supplied by BHEL. While boilers #1, #2 & #3 adopt ignifluid fluidised bed combustion system, boiler #4 adopts conventional fluidised bed combustion system.

The boiler #5 is also a fludised bed boiler capable of firing coal/lignite/pith/wastewater sludge. These boilers are operating in parallel with two (2) recovery boilers of 320 tpd and 440 tpd of dry solids capacity.

As part of the MDP, one (1) CRB (CRB # 3) with operating parameters of 65 ata and 460°C and black liquor solids firing capacity of 1300 tpd has been installed recently. After stabilising the new chemical recovery boiler at its full capacity, the other two (2) chemical recovery boilers will be stopped and taken out of service.

Normal steam generating capacity of CRB # 3 will be around 153 tph. As the power requirement of the mill will increase from 45 MW to 55 MW, one (1) turbo alternator (TA # 5) of 20 MW is also proposed to operate mainly by the steam generated by CRB # 3, with a flexibility to operate by the steam generated by PB #5.

4.6.8.3 Turbo Alternators

Power house consists of four (4) turbo alternator (TA) sets. The details of the existing turbo alternator (TA) sets are given below:

TA Type Steam Steam MCR Description Extraction Pressure Temperature MW MP LP Condensing ata °C TA # 1 √ √ X 45 440 8 TA # 2 X √ √ 45 440 18 TA # 3 √ √ √ 45 440 10.5 TA # 4 X √ √ 65 480 24.62 Total 61.12

√ : Available X : Not available

Presently, the above TG sets are meeting the power demands of the entire mill and also exporting around 12 to 15 MW power to TNEB grid.

C4-38 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The power requirement by the mill post-MEP will increase from 45 MW to 55 MW. However, the turbo alternator (TA #5) of 20 MW, operated mainly by the steam generated by CRB # 3, with a flexibility to operate by the steam generated by PB # 5, will take care of this additional requirement.

Cooling Tower

The mill has a cooling tower of RCC construction exclusively to meet the cooling water requirements of condensers of turbo generators, black liquor evaporation plants and chilling plants.

4.6.8.4 Air compressors

The mill has seven (7) (six (6) working + one (1) stand-by) compressors each of 2000 m 3/hr at 7 kg/cm 2 (g) caters to compressed air needs of the mill.

To meet the total compressed air requirement of the ongoing MDP, two (2) centrifugal air compressors each of 7000 m³/hr are being installed.

4.6.8.5 Coal Handling System

The mill has a dedicated coal handling system consisting of primary crushing system of capacity 200 tph, secondary crushing system of capacity 65 tph and conveyors. This crushing system is to crush the coal to less than 25 mm size.

4.6.8.6 Ash Handling System

Bottom ash of the boilers are collected through ash extractors and stored in ash hopper through a belt conveying system. Fly ash from all the above boilers are collected at ESP hoppers is excavated to a common silo through lean phase pneumatic vacuum system.

4.6.8.7 DM Plant

DM plant consists of two (2) streets. The capacity of DM plant #1 and #2 are 2 x 75 m 3/hr and 2 x 65 m 3/hr respectively.

An ultra filtration (UF)/reverse osmosis (RO) plant, with a capacity of 160 m³/h, is also added to the inlet to the demineralisation plant to resolve the problem of poor river water quality which currently reduces the capacity of the demineralisation plant.

The down stream of UF will be taken to Reverse Osmosis (RO) plant, the outlet of which will be taken to the existing two (2) DM plants.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-39 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.6.8.8 Water Softening Plant

The softening plant has a capacity of 2 x 300 m 3/hr, to meet the requirements of the mill. As part of MDP, the mill is installing four (4) softening plants, each of capacity 325 m 3/hr, including one as standby.

4.6.9 Electricals

The power requirement of the mill is met by in plant power generation as well as by the power from the electricity grid of Tamil Nadu state electricity board (TNEB) during power boiler/TG outages.

The grid power is drawn/exported through a single circuit line from Kagithapuram 230/110 kV substation of TNEB, located adjacent to the mill site. The power is stepped down using three 12.5/15MVA, 110/11 kV transformers. All these transformers have provision for dual power flow, which facilitates import/export of power.

The mill presently has four (4) alternators of capacities as follows.

 TA #1 – 8 MW – 11 kV

 TA #2 – 18 MW - 11 kV

 TA #3 – 10.5 MW – 11 kV

 TA #4 – 24.62 MW – 11 kV

As part of ongoing expansion, a new TA of 20 MW at 11 kV is being added to the above electrical system, utilising the steam from the proposed recovery boiler.

All the alternators are provided with necessary control and metering facility for parallel operation of TAs with grid. The existing 11 kV distribution system is of double bus bar type and provided with required interlocks through the dedicated PLC to restrict the fault level below 500MVA. With the addition of the above TA # 5, the fault level will be restricted to less than 500 MVA by facilitating operation of one or two TAs and one grid transformer at a time, (3 three sources at a time).

The 11 kV distribution arrangement of the plant, division of loads between the grid and co-generation with bus-coupler and tie arrangement between the alternator and the grid power with required interlocks are available in the system.

The distribution of power to individual plants is effected through necessary incomer, HT breaker, transformer, LT PCC & LT MCC to feed power to various load centres.

C4-40 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.6.10 Water Treatment Plant

The mill has two (2) water intake wells situated at the bank of the river Cauvery. The water is pumped to the water treatment plant at mill site through two (2) underground pipelines. The total raw water consumption is about 70,370 m³/day, including supplies for mill colony and adjoining villages. The specific water consumption works out to 100 m³/t of paper.

Water from the intake well is pumped through a combination of flash mixers and clariflocculators. The clarified water from the clariflocculator is pumped to a storage reservoir.

The flash mixer#1 is of size 3.15 m x 3.15 m and 3.3 m deep. The clariflocculator#1 is of 50 m diameter and 3.9 m side water depth (SWD). The storage capacity of the reservoir#1 is 8150 m³. Alum dosing and pre- chlorination is done at the inlet of flash mixer.

The flash mixer#2 is of size 3.05 m square x 3.65 m deep. The clariflocculator#2 is of size 50 m dia x 4.5 m SWD. The storage reservoir#2 is of capacity 11400 m³. Alum dosing and pre-chlorination is done at the inlet of flash mixer. A common alum preparation unit is dedicated to both water treatment lines. The process water is pumped to mill and to softener plant from the reservoirs.

Process water is passed through the pressure sand filters and stored in an overhead tank. Filtered water from the overhead tank is also supplied to residential colony and nearby villages.

4.6.11 Wastewater Treatment Plant

The wastewater from the mill is divided into two main streams. One is bagasse wastewater stream and the other is mill wastewaters combined stream.

Bagasse Wastewater Stream

Bagasse wastewater consists of wastewater only from the bagasse preparation and reclamation area. This is segregated from the rest of the wastewater in view of its high BOD load. The typical characteristics of bagasse wastewater stream are given below.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-41 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Characteristics Unit Value pH -- 4.5 Temperature °C 28 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l 2750 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l 3000

Bio chemical Oxygen Demand (BOD 5) mg/l 3650 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l 4250

Bagasse stream wastewater is passed through a series of screens to remove large floating matters and is stored in a sump. From the sump, it is pumped into a primary clarifier#1 of size 30 m diameter and 3 m SWD. The clarified wastewater is led to an equalisation tank designed for four hours of retention time. During surges, part of the clarified wastewater is led to anaerobic lagoon of size 120 m x110 mx4 m depth.

The equalised wastewater is then led by gravity into a neutralisation tank where MOL is dosed to increase the pH to 6.8-7.2. The MOL is dosed from a MOL dosing tank. The neutralised wastewater is then led into another clarifier #2 of size 26.4 m diameter and 2.5 m SWD. The clarified wastewater is again led by gravity to a buffer tank. From the buffer tank, the wastewater is pumped to two (2) UASB Optima Reactors through a series of distribution pipes. The biogas generated is collected in a gasholder and then sent to rotary lime mud reburning kiln for combustion. There is facility to fire the gas in coal fired boilers also in the event of lime kiln shut.

The wastewater from the UASB reactors along with the anaerobic lagoon overflow is led to another clarifier #3 of size 50 m diameter and 3.8 m SWD. The overflow from this clarifier is led to the aeration basin for treatment by activated sludge process along with other mill clarified wastewaters. From here on, combined treatment of wastewater by activated sludge process is carried out.

Other Mill Wastewaters Combined Stream

Wastewaters from pulp mill, paper machine and other areas are combined together and are treated as a single stream. The typical characteristics of other mill wastewater stream are given below.

C4-42 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Characteristics Unit Value pH -- 6.5 Temperature °C 28 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l 500 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l 1850

Bio chemical Oxygen Demand (BOD 5) mg/l 400 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l 950

This stream, which is comparatively less in pollution load, is passed through a manual bar screen and a common detritor. The wastewater is then passed through a primary clarifier #4 of size 50 m diameter and 3.5 m SWD.

The overflow from the primary clarifier flows by gravity along with anaerobically treated bagasse clarifier wastewater, to an aeration basin of size 190m x 98 m x 3.75 m SWD, equipped with 26 fixed surface aerators, each of 75 HP. The overflow from the aeration basin is sent to two (2) secondary clarifiers, each of 45 m diameter and 4.0 m SWD, operating in parallel. The underflow from each secondary clarifier is recycled partially into the aeration basin to maintain a MLSS concentration of 3500 mg/l in the basin.

The characteristics of the treated wastewater from the secondary clarifiers are well within the standards prescribed for discharge into inland surface water, even though the wastewater is being discharged on land for irrigation.

Characteristics Unit Value pH -- 7.1 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l 38 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS)-inorganic mg/l 1327

Bio chemical Oxygen Demand (BOD 5) mg/l 12.5 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) mg/l 145.2

Sludge Handling and Disposal System

The underflow from primary clarifier#1 is dewatered along with excess secondary sludge (after thickening in a thickener of size 20 m diameter and 3 m SWD) in a vacuum belt filter to dewater the sludge; this sludge is used as a fuel in boilers.

The sludge from clarifier #2 along with excess anaerobic sludge (as bleed) is dewatered in a centrifuge and fired in boilers.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-43 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The sludge from clarifier #3 and thickener clarifier is dewatered through two (2) centrifugal decanters each of capacity 30 m³/h and fired in boilers. Mill wide pith generated in a pith press is also fired as fuel in boilers.

The sludge from primary clarifier #4 is pumped to a sludge-blending chest. From this chest, the sludge is pumped to vacuum belt filter and dewatered and disposed of to secondary users for board manufacture/egg tray manufacture. The flow diagram of the existing wastewater treatment plant is depicted below

C4-44 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The ongoing MDP operations are structured in such a way that it aims at

 Reduction of specific consumption of fresh water.

 Elimination of elemental chlorine usage in bleaching of pulp.

 Reduction in BOD, COD and AOX levels in the wastewater due to the oxygen delignification, peroxide bleaching and chlorine dioxide usage.

In a nutshell, it may be stated that the ongoing MDP operations could result in a 10-15% reduction in suspended solids, 35-40% reduction in BOD levels and 40-45% reduction in COD levels of bleach plant wastewaters. A colour reduction of about 30-50% is expected in bleach plant wastewaters. The oxygen stage washed liquor from oxygen delignification, which would otherwise go through the bleach plant wastewater, due to lignin removal, will be used in chemical recovery operations for recovering sodium chemicals and potential heat energy. The total BOD load per day will not increase compared to the present day operations, even though pulp production capacity increases, because of the modern bleaching techniques and closed loop system of water recycling in the process.

Hence, the post-MEP operations do not envisage any change in the process of treating the wastewater and it shall continue to be on the same lines as practised presently. As the ongoing MDP is aimed at reduction of pollution load at source due to the installation of oxygen delignification system, as a continuation of delignification process, the chemical recovery system shall be designed to handle for the filtrate received from oxygen delignification plant of both hardwood and bagasse chemical pulp lines.

The use of chlorine dioxide in bleaching operations and the elimination of chlorine in bleaching operations, (possible due to the delignification carried out by oxygen delignification) results in less pollution load to the wastewater treatment plant.

Hence, in the light of the above, the treated wastewater after the expansion shall meet the discharge standards as specified by Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board Authorities/MoEF.

The treated wastewater shall continue to meet the discharge standards as applicable for discharge into inland surface waters. The treated wastewater shall be disposed of for land irrigation. Town sewage treatment system, TNPL has a housing colony consisting of 750 quarters of various types. The sewage from the individual quarter is carried through underground sewage pipe line system to three (3) underground septic tanks. From these tanks, sewage water is pumped to individual filtration beds #1, #2 and # 3. After sedimentation of solids in the filtration beds, the clear sewage water is

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-45 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

pumped out and utilised for irrigating the horticulture farm land and coconut groves available inside the colony area. The filter beds are cleared and refilled with new pebbles once in two (2) years so as to maintain smooth functioning of the system. Around 900 kl/day of wastewater sewage is being handled in the colony sewage treatment and pumped from a newly constructed tank opposite to administration black inside the colony along with canteen wastewater sent to wastewater treatment plant for further treatment.

4.6.12 Existing Environment Set-up

The mill has a dedicated team for monitoring the overall environmental compliance. The team is led by technical professionals, reporting to the General Manager (Operations). The mill has an “Environmental Laboratory” for regular monitoring.

C4-46 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.6.12.1 Laboratory and Research Facilities at TNPL

The mill is equipped with a full-fledged laboratory facility with the state-of- the-art pulp and paper testing equipment and instruments, conforming to international standards. With facilities worth Rs 2.5 to 3 crores, the mill’s R&D is recognised by the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR), New Delhi. Since recognition in 1989, the mill has been focussing on the broad objectives such as pollution abatement, new product development, product improvement, alternative raw materials for papermaking, process improvement etc. About 55 technical papers have been published in National and International journals on the R&D findings.

The laboratory has the following facilities.

Pulping

Complete range of equipments from M/s Lorentzen and Wettre, Sweden, including rotating programmable digester, screen, pulp washer, pulp shredder, PFI mill for refining, standard sheet former, sheet press, rapid dryer, Canadian standard freeness tester, pulp disintegrator and Somerville screen.

Paper Testing

Complete paper testing range of equipments from M/s Lorentzen and Wettre Sweden, including GSM scale, thickness, horizontal tensile tester, tear tester, bursting strength tester, folding endurance tester, sizing tester, smoothness and porosity tester, Elrepho brightness tester, colour scan equipment, zero span tensile tester, formation tester, parker print surf roughness tester, dimensional stability tester, stiffness tester, curl tester, droop rigidity tester, wet web strength tester, fluff tester.

Printability Testing

IGT printability tester, K&N ink absorbency tester, unger oil absorbency tester, mini offset press, wax pick.

Chemical and Fundamental Analysis

Microscopic fibre projector, DMRB epifluoresence microscope, stereo microscope, pulmac permeability tester, facilities for proximate chemical analysis, pH, conductometer, potentiograph, automatic titrator, end point titrator, charge analyser, bomb calorimeter, furnaces, ovens, vacuum oven, britt dynamic drainage jar, gas chromatograph, spectrophotometer, flame photometer, vacuum flash evaporator, biofermentor, high speed centrifuge.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-47 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Pollution Control

Stack monitoring kit, ambient air quality, RSPM, SOx, NOx, CO, CO 2, O 2, AOX analyser, BOD manometric apparatus, COD reactor, BOD incubator, noise monitoring, weather monitoring station.

Additionally, the laboratory at the wastewater treatment plant, located at the bio-methanation plant, has the following facilities to analyse the following parameters of the various wastewater streams:

 pH

 Colour

 Total suspended solids

 Total dissolved solids

 Dissolved oxygen

 Alkalinity

 Volatile suspended solids

 Volatile fatty acids

 COD

 Wastewater Bio-degradability

 Bio gas analysis

 Consistency of sludge

4.6.13 Status of Implementation of ongoing MDP

TNPL has submitted the status report to MoEF/CPCB/TNPCB, for the period ending 31 st December 2007 towards implementation of the MDP project. The details of progress on implementation of the ongoing MDP are given in Appendix – 3.

C4-48 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.7 Details of Proposed Expansion

4.7.1 New Paper Machine (PM#3)

General

The paper machine proposed under the Mill Expansion Plant (MEP) will have facilities to produce both uncoated and pigment grades papers with a saleable capacity of 155,000 tpa. Subsequent to the new machine installation, TNPL will have flexibility to sell pigmented papers (25,000 tpa) depending on market condition.

Objectives of the TNPL MEP with respect to the Paper Machine area are as follows:

 Add coated paper production capability to meet increasing future demands expected for SS writing and printing, copier, pigment grades, coated production.

 Designate the new PM#3 for SS writing and printing, copier, pigment grades, coated production.

 Design PM#3 for low water consumption to reduce the specific fresh water requirement (m 3/t).

 Reduce the specific energy consumption with energy-efficient design of PM#3 at the rated production capacity

The new Paper Machine - PM #3, will be a diversified paper machine, capable of producing paper with basis weight ranging from 45 gsm to 110 gsm with the following varieties of papers:

 Surface sized and non surface sized printing and writing papers

 SS Maplitho varieties

 Pigmented papers

Basic characteristics/properties of uncoated, coated wood-free paper include:

 Good archival characteristics

 High opacity

 High strength

 High brightness

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-49 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Some important properties for pigmented grades are:

 Porosity and tensile strength of base paper

 Porosity of the coated paper

 High surface strength of the final coated paper

 High rub-off resistance and double fold

 Good flatness (no cockling/curling)

 Roughness and gloss level

The new paper machine selected will be of state of art technology to achieve the above paper properties at high machine efficiency.

The new proposed paper machine configuration shall be based on the prospective vendor's design to achieve the targeted production. The main features of the paper machine are listed below:

 Hydraulic type headbox with consistency dilution control system

 Fourdrinier with top wire

 Tri-nip press with shoe press in III press position

Alternatively

 Bi-nip press with separate pick-up followed by separate shoe press in III-Press position.

 First two dryer groups with single tier and the rest of the groups with two-tier arrangement in pre-dryer section

 Pre-metered size press

 Conventional two-tier post dryer section

 Back-to-back soft nip calender

 Pope reel section with spool magazine

 Two drum winder

C4-50 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Design Data of PM #3 (Preliminary)

Paper grade Coated wood free, SS P&W, and Copier grades

Trim width at reel mm based on Machine Supplier’s design Basis weight - Surface Sized paper gsm 45-90 - Copier grades gsm 70-80 - coated woodfree grades gsm 60-110 Design basis weight gsm 70

Shrinkage to be considered - Minimum % 3.5 - Maximum % 4.5

Speed to be decided by Machine supplier Coating or sizing - Sizing/side gsm/side 1.5 - Size solution concentration % 10 - Coating gsm/side 8-10 - Coating slip concentration % 55-65

Process Description

Head box

The proposed hydraulic headbox is specially designed to produce a stable slice jet required on hybrid formers, and good CD profiles at a high efficiency. The headbox is equipped with an integrated attenuator. For optimum pressure pulsation attenuation capacity, the attenuator is located as close to the slice jet as possible.

The basic functions of the headbox are uniform stock distribution through a round inlet pipe across the entire width of the machine, deflocculation at two steps of tube banks from a larger to a smaller scale, management and adjustment of the slice jet velocity and direction during operation as well as selection of the turbulence scale and level for the dewatering process taking place in the forming unit. Furthermore, a task of the SymFlo headbox is basis weight profiling across the entire width of the machine by diluting the main flow in 60 mm zones in the cross direction.

The stock flow delivered from the headbox approach system is distributed evenly across the entire width of the machine through a converging inlet

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-51 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

header. The shape of the inlet header is optimised for each machine to distribute the stock as evenly as possible across the entire width of the machine. Dilution water is mixed with the main flow in mixing chambers before the manifold tube bank. The dilution water supply is controlled locally with a dilution valve according to the basis weight profile adjustment need. White water is used as dilution water.

All pressure and flow velocity profiles are balanced in the equalising chamber. The upper section of the equalising chamber opens into a separate attenuator, which attenuates pressure pulsations in the main and dilution flows.

Adjustable edge flow is delivered to the turbulence generator edges through valves for compensating the friction at the edges of the headbox and former and thus producing a more uniform formation of paper web over the trim width.

Forming Section

A hybrid former developed for printing paper grades is proposed. The former concept is optimised for each paper grade by choosing the predrainage properties for the fourdrinier section on the basis of the properties of the furnish used.

On the fourdrinier, the predrained web is guided into the gap formed by the top fabric in the preforming table area. The top surface of the web is drained on the curved surface of the preforming table by low pulsation caused by the blades and the tension of the fabric. The drained water is collected into the first, so called deflector chamber of the top former unit. Uniform drainage is followed by pulsating drainage between the second chamber of the Top former and the loading unit. This affects several quality properties of the paper web.

Paper web formation and two sidedness are affected by adjusting the dewatering and the drainage split on the fourdrinier and top former unit. Adjustment on the fourdrinier takes place by adjusting the dewatering element blade angles, number and vacuum. Paper web formation can also be affected by use of Form Master shaker. In the top former unit area, pulsation and dewatering is controlled by adjusting the loading pressure of the pulse elements and vacuum of the suction box.

Dewatering continues on the suction boxes and couch roll after the forming zone. To ensure press section runnability, the web dryness after the former is maximised by increasing the vacuum level of the dewatering elements in the web run direction.

C4-52 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

A sufficiently high web dryness level for detaching the top fabric off the web surface is achieved by means of the MB suction box third chamber and transfer suction boxes. The release occurs on the curved transfer suction box to guarantee trouble-free operation. The number and vacuum levels of the flat suction boxes are optimised for each paper grade by observing the desired final dryness, stock properties and bottom fabric drive power consumption as well as fabric life.

Due to its adjustable dewatering pressure, the top former is suitable for wide basis weight and speed ranges. The quality properties of paper, such as formation and filler distribution, can be significantly affected by MB-unit. High dewatering capacity and stable dryness after the forming section guarantee good runnability also at high production speeds.

Press Section

Generally, the main obstacle while increasing machine speed is the draw between the last press and the dryer section, due to the web tension.

The proposed press section is a conventional Tri-nip press with shoe press in third nip position (or) any other press section suitable for the proposed operating speed and to achieve high off-press dryness.

The press section is designed in such a way that a constantly high efficiency level is possible.

The web is picked up from the forming section onto the pick-up felt by the pick-up suction roll and carried on the felt to the first press.

Before the first press, the web is supported by the bottom felt, thus eliminating felt flutter before the nip. The first press is double-felted and the web is transferred further to the second press by the press suction roll.

On the second press, the web adheres to the centre roll and travels along the roll surface further to the third press.

Before the 3rd press, the web is received with a felt wrap prior to the nip, thus eliminating air blow problems even at high speeds.

The third nip of press section will be shoe press with a designed nip load of 900 kN/m.

Designed off-press dryness of the proposed press section will be around 45-46%.

Higher dryness levels increase the wet strength of the web, thereby improving runnability, particularly in the beginning of the dryer section. At the same time, drying energy is saved.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-53 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The web is blown from the centre roll to the dryer section as a tail. After taking the tail through the dryer section, the web is widened into full width.

The steam box against the suction roll increases the web temperature and intensifies dewatering in the second and third nips. At the same time, it assures an excellent moisture profile.

Dryer Section

To improve dimensional stability and minimise shrinkage, restrained drying will be provided by a single tier arrangement for the first two groups of pre-dryer section.

The post dryer section will be a conventional two-tier dryer section with special alloy cylinders in the first two dryer cylinder positions to protect the coated sheet from marring.

Pre-metered Size Press

The pre-metered size press is an on-line size/coat application system for applying starch sizing up to 1.5 gsm/side or coating colour upto 10 gsm/side.

The size solution/coating slip is pre-metered onto an applicator roll as an even film and applied to the web in the press nip.

The heart of the pre-metered size press is a pre-metering unit either with a profiled rod or a smooth rod. While profiled rod provides a volumetric application of coating slip, smooth rod shows a hydro dynamic application, which is suitable for pre-metering coating formulations of higher viscosity.

After the pre-metered size press, the web is transferred to post-dryer through a contact less air turn and/or air floatation dryer and an infra-red dryer to avoid any picking problem on the first drying cylinder.

Soft Nip Calender

Soft-nip calendering has become a well-established method for finishing a wide variety of paper and board grades, with the ability to achieve much higher levels of smoothness, gloss and printability over hard nip calendering.

The post dryer section will be followed by a back-to-back hot soft nip calender to achieve required smoothness and gloss level of coated wood- free grades.

C4-54 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Design Data

Maximum nip load kN/m 350-450 Maximum surface temperature °C 170-200 Heating medium Oil

The calender comprises a pair of rolls, mounted in fabricated steel frame, with two (2) soft covered rolls and peripherally drilled chilled iron rolls with heating in alternative top and bottom position for even finishing of both sides of the sheet. Calender loading is by hydraulic cylinders.

Reel

The reel section of the paper machine will be state-of-the art, centre wind assisted, designed for a maximum paper roll diameter of 3000 mm. The innovative concept strictly controls linear load, web tension and centre wind torque control throughout the entire reeling process, as well as through the reel change sequence.

The fully automatic sequence of reel change takes less than 30 seconds. To get uniform winding during reeling process, the reel is equipped with reel density control. The reel section is provided with reel spool storage, spool lowering arm and automatic turn-up system. The paper reel will be transferred automatically by rails connecting the reel section to the winder.

Paper Machine Winder

A new modern high-speed winder will be installed to slit the parent roll into small width reels. The winder will also form part of the paper machine. The jumbo reels from the paper machine will be transferred to winder unwind stand with directly connected rails. Both PM reel and winder unwind will be provided with an empty spool magazine. The operator will transfer empty spool from the winder spool magazine to the reel spool magazine with the dry end crane.

Finishing House Area

The finishing house section of the PM #3 will comprise the following facilities:

 Fully automated roll handling and reel handling & wrapping system capable of handling 45 rolls/h.

 One (1) 1.9/2.2 m folio sheeter with automatic ream wrapping to meet 50% production capacity of PM.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-55 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 One (1) 4/6 pocket cut-size sheeter including wrapping and cartoniser with a production capacity of 100 tpd to meet copier production requirement.

 One (1) new salvage rewinder (indigenous make) to rewind damaged reels or to meet the requirements of small customers.

4.7.2 Pulp Mills

4.7.2.1 Chemical Bagasse Pulp Mill

Presently, CBP #1 has two (2) continuous digesters for cooking of bagasse, a three (3) stage brown stock washing system having vacuum washers, a three (3) stage screening and cleaning system and a bleach plant. CBP #2 has three (3) continuous digesters for cooking of bagasse, brown stock washing system, screening and cleaning system and bleach plant.

The five (5) continuous digesters of CBP #1 and CBP #2 are capable of producing a total of 500 BD tpd unbleached pulp. Hence, it is recommended that one (1) more continuous digester of capacity 225 tpd be added.

As the washing and screening plants are based on old technology, it is proposed to install a state-of-the-art washing and screening plant, consisting of presses and slotted screens to process unbleached pulp of 600 BD tpd.

The new washing and screening plant will be located near the CBP ECF bleach plant. The existing brown stock washing and screening plants of CBP #1 and CBP #2 will be phased out. It is proposed to relocate the continuous digesters of CBP #1 adjacent to the continuous digesters of CBP #2 and also locate the new continuous digester adjacent to the CBP #2 digesters. These measures will result in a convenient layout for ease of operation.

The new equipment proposed are as follows:

 One (1) continuous digester of capacity 225 BD tpd unbleached pulp

 One (1) brown stock washing street, consisting of three (3) twin roll presses for 600 BD tpd unbleached pulp

 One (1) screening plant, consisting of combined pressure knotter and primary screen, secondary, tertiary and quaternary screens with cleaning system, for 600 BD tpd unbleached pulp capacity

C4-56 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.7.2.2 Hardwood Pulp Mill

The installed capacity of hardwood pulp mill is 300 BD tpd bleached pulp. By balancing the pumps and the piping wherever required, the hardwood pulp mill will be able to operate at 10% higher than the installed capacity, i.e., 330 tpd.

4.7.3 Power Plant

4.7.3.1 Power Boiler

To meet the steam and power requirement post MEP during shut down of any of the existing boilers, it is proposed to install one power boiler (PB #6) of 150 tph with parameters similar to those of PB #5. The design data of PB #6 are given below:

Design Data

PB # 6 MCR of boiler tph 150 Type of boiler Atmospheric Fluidised Bed Combustion Outlet steam parameters Pressure ata 65 Temperature from 60% to 110% MCR °C 485 ± 5 Purity of superheated steam ppm < 0.02 Feed water temperature °C 135 Temperature of flue gas leaving air heater °C 145 Maximum dust loading in flue gas after ESP mg/Nm³ 100 Efficiency of boiler % 80

4.7.3.2 Steam Turbine

No steam turbine is proposed in the MEP.

4.7.3.3 Air Compressors

Post MEP, two (2) centrifugal air compressors each of capacity 4500 Nm 3/h will be installed in the new air compressor house and most of the existing air compressors of old compressor house located in power house will be stopped.

Post MEP, one (1) centrifugal air compressor of capacity 4500 Nm 3/h will be installed to operate in parallel with the two (2) new centrifugal air compressors installed.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-57 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.7.3.4 Cooling Tower

No cooling tower is proposed.

4.7.3.5 D M Plant

No retrofit or increase the capacity of D M Plant is required, as the retrofit taken up during on going MDP will be sufficient to take care of feed water requirement after the proposed MEP.

4.7.3.6 Coal handling Plant

Suitable coal conveying system to supply coal of <6 mm size to the proposed boiler (PB #6) shall be arranged. At least three (3) conveyors of 600 mm width to supply coal from coal yard to PB #6 shall be arranged.

4.7.3.7 Ash Handling Plant

Bed ash from bed ash coolers and fly ash from economiser, air heater, three (3) ESP fields shall be evacuated by dense phase ash handling system to a new ash silo.

4.7.4 Electrical System

After the implementation of MEP, the power required is estimated to go up to 75 MW, which will be entirely met from captive generation.

All electrical system design will be similar to the existing plant. Energy saving measures as appropriate will be adopted by using VFDs, energy efficient motors and energy efficient electrical equipment.

The existing TAs will be adequate to cater to the post MEP requirements, after the installation of PM#3.

4.7.5 Water Supply and Treatment

4.7.5.1 Water Supply and Intake

The water balance after the expansion is as below:

Category Average daily requirement (in m 3) Sep 2004 - 05 Jan 2008 Post- Post- MEP MDP Raw Water Hardwood pulp mill 10865 24870 6000 7300 Chemical bagasse pulp mill 10000 16700 13750 16320 Mechanical bagasse pulp mill 2885 - 2000 2000

C4-58 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Category Average daily requirement (in m 3) Sep 2004 - 05 Jan 2008 Post- Post- MEP MDP Paper Machines #1 & #2 9490 13000 9000 9000 Paper Machine #3 - - - 7050 Chemical Recovery Plant and others 8160 11000 6000 6000 including cooling tower Boiler house and DM Plant 2330 3500 3500 5000 Domestic 1130 1300 1130 1300 Recycled Treated Wastewater Bagasse wash water chest make-up 3000 3000 3000 3500 Bagasse yard central channel make-up 3000 3000 3000 3500 Pith press wire cleaning 2400 2400 2400 3000 Pulp mill floor cleaning 100 100 100 100 MOL flash cooling and evaporator floor 3600 3600 3600 - cleaning SRP vacuum pump seal pit make-up 1800 1800 1800 1800 Power boiler ash quenching, floor 3000 3000 3000 4000 cleaning and coal yard sprinklers WWTP vacuum pump seal pit, wire 4000 4000 4000 4000 cleaning Horticulture and plantation 100 100 100 100 Bagasse yard sprinklers 4000 4000 4000 4000 Total 69860 95370 66380 77970 Less: Recycled treated wastewater 25000 25000 25000 24000 Net fresh water 44860 70370 41380 53970 Specific Water consumption (m³/t of 75 103 47 44 finished production)

The additional water requirement of post MEP operations shall be about 12,590 m 3/day which can be met by the existing intake and distribution system and hence no augmentation is considered. The specific overall fresh water consumption shall be 44 m³/t of finished paper for a production level of 400,000 tpa.

Water Treatment Plant

As the present system is sufficient to supply additional water required by the mill post- MEP operations (of about 12,590 m 3/day), no new water treatment plant or any equipment is required.

Wastewater Collection and Treatment General The wastewater generation for discharge after implementation of MEP is expected to be 41,405 m 3/day.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-59 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The water consumption and wastewater generation is as below;

Category Fresh Wastewater Water Generation (m³/day) (m³/day) Raw Water Hardwood pulp mill 7300 5910 Chemical bagasse pulp mill 16320 13870 Mechanical bagasse pulp mill 2000 1700 Paper Machines #1 & #2 9000 7690 Paper machine #3 7050 5995 Chemical Recovery Plant and others including cooling 6000 5100 tower Boiler house and DM Plant 5000 4200 Domestic (Colony sewage) 1300 1040 * Recycled Treated Wastewater Bagasse wash water chest make-up 3500 3500 Bagasse yard central channel make-up 3500 3500 Pith press wire cleaning 3000 3000 Pulp mill floor cleaning 100 100 SRP vacuum pump seal pit make-up 1800 1800 Power boiler ash quenching, floor cleaning and coal yard 4000 -- sprinklers WWTP vacuum pump seal pit, wire cleaning 4000 4000 Horticulture and plantation 100 -- Bagasse yard sprinklers 4000 4000 Total 77970 65405 Less: Recycled treated wastewater 24000 24000 Net fresh water/Net wastewater generation 53970 41405

The total wastewater generated, shall be treated in the existing treatment plant. The existing wastewater treatment plant is designed to handle a flow of 85,000 m³/day and hence the plant is adequate to take care of the post PM#3 operations too.

However, to maintain the continued good performance of the wastewater treatment plant, the mill intends to install the following:

 Additional secondary clarifier for trouble free operation of the existing secondary clarifiers, during any outage due to ageing.

C4-60 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.8 Materials and Resources Requirement

4.8.1 Raw Materials

The requirements of raw materials for the proposed MDP are depicted in the following table.

Raw Material Unit Pre-MEP Post - MEP Wood tpa 315,250 367779 Bagasse (Depithed) Tpa 773,861 900,408 Imported Pulp: Bleached Kraft Pulp (BKP) tpa 23,743 67,045 Chemi Thermo Mechanical tpa 2,416 2,416 Pulp (CTMP)

4.9.1.1 Hard Wood

Wood is procured from governmental sources and open market sources.

The governmental sources comprise Tamil Nadu Forest Department (Territorial Wing and Social Forestry Wing), Tamil Nadu Forest Plantation Corporation Limited (TAFCORN) and Departments other than Forest Department.

The requirement and availability of wood for future plan is given in the following table.

Description 2005-06 2006-07 2007-08 2008-09 2009-10 2010-11 onwards

Requirement (t) 132000 220000 320000 320000 320000 340000

Sources:

TAFCORN 52500 157000 157000 157000 140000 175000 (already tied up)

Territorial forestry 19500 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000

Social forestry 60000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000

Captive plantation/farm 60000 100000 forestry (already started) Open market 13000 13000 13000 15000 10000

Imported woodchips 100000 100000 50000

Total 132000 220000 320000 320000 320000 340000

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-61 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The private sources comprise the innumerable private tree farmers who raise casuarina, eucalyptus, wattle, odai and prosopis in their lands either as pure crop or as a mixture under one of the agro-forestry models. The mode of transport is only by road.

In view of the MDP programme in the mill, the pulpwood raw material requirement will increase from the present level of 1.5 lakh tonnes/annum to four (4) lakh tonnes per annum. Presently, the pulpwood raw material is being obtained from Tamil Nadu Forest Department, TAFCORN, and other sources. Currently, the pulp wood requirement is around 1.4 lakh tonnes and the entire requirement is met from TAFCORN/open market sources. On commissioning the new pulp plant, the annual requirement of pulpwood would be around four (4) lakh tonnes (air dry).

The company has recently signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with Tamil Nadu Forest Corporation Ltd (TAFCORN) for assured supply of Eucalyptus wood. In terms of the agreement, TAFCORN would supply upto 70% of its annual output to TNPL for the next 15 years. Based on its plantation programme, it is estimated that TAFCORN would be able to supply around two (2) lakh tonnes every year. The company is still left with a balance requirement of two (2) lakh tonnes of pulpwood to be met from other sources.

Promulgation of National Forest Policy 1988 and guidelines given in the policy created a major impact on Environment front and utilization of Natural forest. As per the above policy, in its resolution No.4.9 relating to Forest-based Industries the following have been highlighted:

As far as possible, a forest-based industry should raise the raw material needed for meeting its own requirements, preferably by establishment of a direct relationship between the factory and the individuals who can grow the raw material by supporting the individuals with inputs including credit, constant technical advice and finally harvesting and transport services.

Forest-based industries must not only provide employment to local people on priority but also involve them fully in raising trees and raw material. Farmers, particularly small and marginal farmers, would be encouraged to grow, on marginal/degraded lands available with them, wood species required for industries. These may also be grown along with fuel and fodder species on community lands not required for pasture purposes, and by Forest department/corporations on degraded forests, not earmarked for natural regeneration

The Policy clearly spelt out that the industry should create its own wood resources and should not relay upon the Natural Forest Resource. Subsequently Social Forestry and the environment awareness gained

C4-62 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

momentum with the tireless efforts taken by the State Forest Department to promote planting of tree saplings out side the Forest land.

Under these circumstances TNPL Board also suggested that apart from the tie up with TAFCORN/Forest Department, the company shall also resort to farm forestry and captive plantation schemes to meet the entire wood requirements of the new pulp plant.

Visionary management of TNPL timely predicted the pulpwood raw material scenario in the state and laid a keystone for formation of plantation section in the year 2003-04 and started working on promotion & creation of awareness on tree farming on pilot scale. Encouraged by the results of the endeavour, the separate plantation department was formed during the year 2004-05 with appointment of qualified professional for development of plantation in barren lands. The programme envisaged to develop pulpwood cultivation broadly under two schemes.

Captive Plantation and Farm Forestry.

Under captive plantation, the plantation activity would be taken up by the company in own land or the land belonging to others either on long term lease basis or on revenue sharing basis where the yield would be shared at an agreed ratio.

Under farm forestry, the individual land owners would take up the plantation with the technical guidance, quality input supply at subsidized cost and market support provided by TNPL and the produce would be sold to TNPL at a mutually agreed price.

Choice of Species

The choice of species for the plantation programme is primarily based on three aspects, namely, quality of the raw material requirement by the mill, farmer’s preference and site considerations. Based on the above, the major pulpwood species like Eucalyptus, Subabul, Casuarina and Acacia are planted and other suitable species evolved from the research activities of alternate species trial will also be included.Area of operation

In order to have better monitoring and to improve working efficiency as also to have minimum logistics expenses, plantation is being carried out in a compact area i.e. the area with in the radius of around 300 km from the mill as far as possible. Districts covered under this programme are as follows:

Karur Salem Perambalur Cuddalore Vilupuram Trichirapalli Thanjore Pudukkottai Sivaganga Erode Thiruvarur Tirunelveli

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-63 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The total area of around 40000 hectares to be planted in 15 districts over a period of 5 years is around only 2% of the total cultivable fallow land available in the proposed 16 districts.

TNPL Industrial Pulpwood Plantation Area

Operational Area Centre of Operation Field Offices

Awareness Through Extension Activity

To create awareness and to popularise the concepts, the field staff of TNPL Plantation section is carrying out extension activities. The opportunities and potential to the various beneficiaries like farmers, industries, institutions and others have been articulated. Publicity campaigns like advertisements in local dailies and radio and distribution of booklets containing the information about the practices in growing of pulpwood trees, cost of cultivation and benefits, are being carried out.

Land Identification and Agencies for Implementation

While farmers have to be encouraged to cultivate pulpwood trees in their lands, the very success of the programme depends on raising such plantation on marginal and degraded lands, government wastelands, lands along the railway tracks, temple lands and waste lands from other sources like industries and Institutions. The agencies controlling such marginal lands are being encouraged to take up pulpwood plantation.

Production of quality planting material

Initially, a large quantity of planting material is being raised and supplied through seed origin. Productivity of plantation mainly depends on the quality of planting material. The seed routed plantation has inherent

C4-64 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

disadvantages of low survival and low productivity, whereas the clonal plants produced from selected proven superior trees shows uniformity, high survival & growth rate and higher productivity in terms of Biomass yield as well as pulp yield.

TNPL added another feather in its cap by commissioning a State-of-the-Art Clonal Propagation and Research Centre (CPRC) with the infrastructure such as first Tissue culture laboratory for producing high quality Eucalyptus hybrid mother plants, 2500 sq.mtr clonal mini garden, 8000 sq.mtr Mist chambers, 4000 sq.mtr hardening chamber and 12,000 sq.mtr open nursery with updated technological innovations as per international standards to produce about 150 lac clonal plants every year at the Mill site in Kagithapuram in Karur District, Tamil Nadu.

It is a milestone in the history of plantation in India, since it is the largest Clonal Propagation and Research center in a single location with world- class infrastructure facilities. The CPRC is unique in the country by adapting integrated propagation approach of using both Micro (Tissue culture) and Macro (Clonal) Propagation techniques.The main advantage of this integrated technology is that any superior mother plant selected for its pulping as well as biomass yield can be multiplied within a short period by using tissue culture. These tissue cultured plant-lets will be further multiplied through mini-cuttings in clonal technology for mass multiplication. This will help in producing quality plants of superior mother trees in large volume within a short period.

The visionary management of TNPL understood that the Productivity and availability of pulpwood would be influenced by quality planting material and continuous improvement of planting stock and made provision to initiate various research activities including Tree Improvement Programme in Eucalyptus, Casuarina and other alternate pulpwood species. This would facilitate production of preferred, site-specific clones suited to TNPL pulpwood catchment area and bring down the cost of pulpwood.

Past achievements

Initially the Government of Tamil Nadu has allotted about 509 acres of government wastelands in Karur and Trichy Districts to TNPL under Comprehensive Wasteland Development Programme. With the efficient technocrats and support rendered by TNPL management, Plantation department has brought 26891 acres of land under green cover by involving 6033 farmers in 15 Districts of Tamil Nadu by planting 20 million plants within 4 years of its establishment. The target for the year 2008-09 is fixed as 15,000 acres.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-65 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The area covered under different species during the last three years is given below:

Year Eucalyptus seedling Eucalyptus clone Casuarina seedling Total

2004-05 2107.07 (69%) 674.85 (22%) 293.78 (9%) 3075.80 (100%)

2005-06 4447.39 (71%) 1498.57 (24%) 296.57 (5%) 6242.53 (100%) 2006-07 3806.82 (38%) 3577.39 (36%) 2647.10 (26%) 10031.31(100%) 2007-08 3118.16 (41%) 2995.15 (40%) 1429.10 (19%) 7542.41(100%) Total 13479.44 (50%) 8745.96 (33%) 4666.55 (17%) 26891.95(100%)

Status of plantations raised so for:

In order to assess the extent of progress made by TNPL in developing plantation during 04-05 and 05-06, an evaluation work was carried out by an external agency namely Society for Social Forestry Research and Development in Tamil Nadu(SSFRDT). The society had done a detailed study and had expressed satisfaction over the progress made by TNPL in the last two years. As per the report of the society, the overall survival percentage of the plantations raised during 2004-05 and 2005-06 are 80.09% and 71.96% respectively. The comprehensive survival position clubbed together is 76.02%.

CLONAL PROPAGATION AND RESEARCH CENTRE

Clonal Mini garden Mist Chamber Hardening Chamber

CAPTIVE PLANTATION AT BHARATHIDASAN UNIVERSITY

Degraded land before and after development

C4-66 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.8.1.2 Bagasse

The mill has been sourcing bagasse from the following sugar mills within a radius of about 185 km. The mode of transport is only by road and the tarpaulin coverage of bagasse during transportation avoids spillage.

Site Name of the Sugar Mill 1 Sakthi Sugars Limited, Appakudal (SSL) 2 Salem Co-operative Sugars Limited, Mohanur (SCSM) 3 EID Parry Sugars, Pugalur (EID) 4 EID Parry Sugars, Pettaivaithalai (EID) 5 Kallakurichi Co-operative Sugar Mills (Unit II), Kallakurichi 6 Terra Energy Limited, Chittur (TERRA) 7 Supreme Renewable Energy Limited, Pennadam (SREL) 8 Auro Energy Limited, Kattur (AEL)

TNPL is having sufficient bagasse sourcing tie- up with private sources for Post-MEP bagasse requirement for the above organisation.

4.8.1.3 Imported Pulp

The imported pulps (BKP, CTMP) are imported from Indonesia/Canada/New Zealand through . The mode of inland transport from the port to site is by trucks.

4.9 Process Chemicals

4.9.1 Annual Requirement

The major process chemicals required to be procured and used for the production of pulp are given in the following table.

Description Type Unit Pre - MEP Post -MEP Caustic lye Liquid tpa 5158 6565 Sodium sulphite Liquid tpa 212 212 Sodium sulphate Solid tpa 7260 14839 Hydrogen peroxide Liquid tpa 619 733 Sulphuric acid Liquid tpa 3682 4381 Sodium silicate Liquid tpa 87 49

Cl 2 Liquid tpa 5498 3574 Lime stone Solid tpa 62826 70462

4.9.2 Sources of Supply and Mode of Transport

All the process chemicals shall be procured from suppliers from Tamil Nadu//Maharashtra/Karnataka. The materials will be transported by trucks.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-67 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.9.3 Fuels

Black liquor (self generated), imported coal, agro fuel and furnace oil are the fuels used in the mill. Black liquor is generated in pulping operations and is the main fuel for the chemical recovery boilers. Furnace oil is used in lime mud reburning kiln for reburning of lime mud and in start up and stabilising the operations of chemical recovery boilers. Agro fuel is used in multifuel fluidised bed combustion boilers. Imported coal is used for power and steam generation.

Description Nature Unit Average Requirement Remarks and Type Pre - MEP Post MEP

Imported coal Solid tpa 291993 329838 Purchased

Agro fuel Solid tpa 13498 13498 Purchased

Furnace oil Liquid kl/a 14344 16146 Purchased Black Liquor Liquid tpd 1300 1300 Captive Bio- gas Gas m³/a 5610000 8250000 Captive

The characteristics of the fuel used are presented in the following table.

CHARACTERISTICS OF FUEL (AS RECEIVED/AS FIRED)

Description Unit Imported Furnace Raw Black Bagasse Bio - coal oil lignite liquor pith gas Moisture % 15 1 44.5 30 29.6 0.5 Ash (max) % 8 1 6.5 - 5.0 - Sulphur (max) % 0.8 4.5 0.6 2.0 0.1 - Gross calorific kcal/kg 6100 10500 3213 3200 3045 6300 value

4.9.4 Sources of Supply and Mode of Transport

Coal will be imported mainly from Indonesia and the mode of inland transportation shall be by railway wagons. Agro fuel will be procured from nearby places through trucks. Furnace oil will be procured from Indian Oil Corporation Limited (IOCL), Chennai through wagons.

4.9.5 Power and Steam Requirement

The power and steam requirements for the mill before and after MEP are given in the following table.

C4-68 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

POWER AND STEAM REQUIREMENT

Category Unit Pre - MEP Post- MEP Power - Power requirement MW 54.75 69.0 - Captive generation MW 63.75 69.0 - Power export MW 9.00 -- Steam - From coal tph 272 280 - From recovery boiler tph 153 177

4.9.6 Water Requirement

The total water requirement of the mill is drawn from the river Cauvery. The water requirement is detailed below:

Category Average daily requirement (in m 3) Pre - MEP Post - MEP Hardwood pulp mill 6000 7300 Chemical bagasse pulp mill 13750 16320 Mechanical bagasse pulp mill 2000 2000 Paper Machine #1 & #2 9000 9000 Paper Machine #3 - 7050 Chemical Recovery Plant and others including cooling tower 6000 6000 Boiler house and DM Plant 3500 5000 Domestic 1130 1300 Recycled Treated Wastewater Bagasse wash water chest make-up 3000 3500 Bagasse yard central channel make-up 3000 3500 Pith press wire cleaning 2400 3000 Pulp mill floor cleaning 100 100 MOL flash cooling and evaporator floor cleaning 3600 -- SRP vacuum pump seal pit make-up 1800 1800 Power boiler ash quenching, floor cleaning and coal yard 3000 4000 sprinklers WWTP vacuum pump seal pit, wire cleaning 4000 4000 Horticulture and plantation 100 100 Bagasse yard sprinklers 4000 4000 Total 66380 77970 Less: Recycled treated wastewater 25000 24000 Net fresh water requirement 41380 53970

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-69 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

With the implementation of PM#3, the total water requirement including recycled water is 77,970 m³/day out of which 53,970 m³/day shall be the fresh water requirement and 24,000 m³/day shall be the recycled treated wastewater.

4.9.7 Land Requirement

No additional land is required for the MEP; free space available in the mill will be used. The land use break-up are given in the following table.

(In acres)

Description Pre -MEP Post - MEP Plants and Buildings 71.75 75.75

Storage yards, roads & paths etc. 123.0 118.00 Wastewater Treatment Plant 40.25 41.25 Open Space 40.0 40.00 Green Belt & Plantation 100 100.00 Total 375.00 375.00

4.9.8 Manpower Requirement

The mill employs 1602 people for the performance of the mill’s regular functions.

Additional manpower will be required during construction and other activities in the areas of plantations and transport in the post MEP scenario. Moreover, indirect employment potential will be generated.

4.10 Proposed schedule for Implementation

The project envisages a schedule of 32 months for commissioning of the new equipments proposed as part of the expansion.

4.11 Capital Costs

The total investment of the proposed MEP of the mill is Rs. 725 crores. Out of this, Rs 10 crores are planned for investment on pollution control systems and environmental management as presented in the table below.

Sl.No Description Investment (Rs. in Crore)

1 Electrostatic Precipitator for proposed coal fired boiler 1.5 2 Augmentation of Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) 8.5 Total 10.0

C4-70 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.12 Sources of Pollution

4.12.1 General

The various types of pollution from the pulp mill are categorised under the following types:

 Air pollution

 Water pollution

 Solid waste generation and

 Noise pollution.

In the process plants as well as the auxiliary plants, along with the useful products and by-products, several waste products are also generated. These waste products include flue gases, wastewaters and solid wastes.

The waste gases include the flue gases generated in the coal fired boilers, chemical recovery boilers and lime kiln. The atmospheric pollutants from the stacks of these sources include suspended particulates, sulphur dioxide, nitrogen oxides and carbon monoxide.

The wastewater includes pulp mill wastewater, paper mill wastewater, blow down from boilers, cooling tower and DM plant, sanitary wastewater from the plant and other miscellaneous streams.

The black liquor from the pulp mill and the post oxygen delignification filtrate, which contain the lignin separated from the cellulosic raw materials and the cooking chemicals used for lignin separations, is not considered as wastewater, since it will not be discharged from the mill. Instead of being discharged, it will be burnt in the chemical recovery boilers for the recovery and reuse of the cooking chemicals, as well as for energy generation from the combustion of lignin, which is an organic matter.

The solid wastes mainly include chipper dust, lime mud purge from recausticising plant, wastewater sludge, bagasse pith from depithing operations and fly ash from the boilers.

The quantities and the composition of the gaseous, liquid and solid waste that are generated in the plant will be regulated such that their final disposal into the environment meets all the statutory requirements and the environmental impacts are minimised. The applicable environmental regulations and standards have been presented in Chapter 3.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-71 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.12.1.1 Stack Emissions

The emission of SPM, SO 2 and NO X were monitored during the period of study. The stack emissions details from the stacks attached to chemical recovery boilers, lime mud reburning kiln and coal fired boilers are as below:

STACK EMISSIONS FROM EXISTING PLANT

Sl. Parameters Units Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB #2 Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 (BHEL) kiln #1 Boiler #5 #1 & #2 # 3 & #4 (MHI)

1 Stack height m 86 86 42 42 36 86 2 Stack diameter m. 3.2 3.2 2.0 3.2 1.0 3.2 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 6.8 9.9 8.5 7.6 9.5 7.2 4 Flue gas oC 165 140 116 150 160 145 temperature

5 Gas flow rate Nm 3/s 37.5 57.8 20.6 43.4 5.2 41.6 6 Sulphur dioxide mg/Nm 3 152 221 78 42 825 224 (SO 2) emission rate g/s 5.7 12.8 1.6 1.8 4.3 9.3 7 Particulate matter mg/Nm 3 80 72 150 165 105 65 (SPM) emission rate g/s 3.0 4.2 3.1 7.2 0.5 2.7 8 Nox emission rate mg/Nm 3 15.9 18.3 2.3 1.5 - 20.2

During the on going MDP, one (1) stack each is being provided for the new Rotary Lime Mud Reburning Kiln (60 m height) and the new Chemical Recovery Boiler (CRB #3) of 90 m height.

Thus, under normal continuous operation after the MEP, gases will be released to the atmosphere through the stacks attached to CRB #3, coal fired boilers and both the new and existing lime kilns.

The emission rates have been calculated on the basis of emissions monitored at the existing plant and based on the measured values.

Control of Pollutants

Electrostatic precipitators are provided in all the coal fired boilers, chemical recovery boilers and lime mud reburning kiln. SPM emissions from the stack are well within the limits of 150mg/Nm3. Adequate stack height has been provided for SO2 dispersion into the atmosphere.

C4-72 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.12.1.2 Emission from New Chemical Recovery Boiler#3

Characterisation of Emissions

The air pollutants in the flue gases resulting from black liquor combustion will be suspended particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and traces of nitrogen oxide. The black liquor consists of lignin dissolved out from the cellulose in the pulp and the spent cooking chemicals.

Control of Pollutants

The chemical recovery boiler (recently installed) has been provided with new electrostatic precipitator and will be operated continuously. Adequate stack height provided for wider dispersion of pollutants and the emission of suspended particulate matter from the chemical recovery boiler stack designed for an emission level of 80 mg/Nm3 will meet statutory requirements of pollution control authorities.

Details of stack for the New Chemical Recovery Boiler (At full load operation and with Electrostatic precipitator)

Sr. Parameters Units CRB # 3 No. Recently Installed 1 Stack height m 90 2 Stack diameter m. 3.5 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 15 4 Flue gas temperature oC 180 5 Flow rate of gas Nm 3/sec 95.6 6 Type of fuel -- Black Liquor 7 Fuel consumption rate tpd 1300

8 Sulphur dioxide (SO 2) emission rate gm/sec 17.4 9 Particulate matter (SPM) emission rate mg/Nm 3 80 10 Particulate matter (SPM) emission rate Gm/sec 5.4

The emission rates (new stack) are based on design parameters.

4.12.1.3 Emission from new Rotary Lime Mud Reburning Kiln

Characterisation of Emissions

The air pollutants in the flue gases resulting from fuel oil combustion will be suspended particulate matter, sulphur dioxide and traces of nitrogen oxide. The sulphur dioxide emission levels shall be less due to the reaction

with calcium oxide available at a purity of 72%. A reduction of 50% in SO 2 emission level is anticipated. The details of stack emissions from the lime mud reburning kiln being installed are given in the following table .

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-73 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

DETAILS OF PROPOSED STACK AT NEW LIME MUD REBURNING KILN (At full load operation and with Electrostatic precipitator)

Sr. Parameters Units Lime Kiln #2 No. 1 Stack height M 60 2 Stack diameter m. 0.9 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 15 4 Flue gas temperature oC 200 5 Flow rate of gas Nm 3/sec 10.5 6 Type of fuel - Furnace oil 7 Fuel consumption rate Tpd 31.5

8 Sulphur dioxide (SO 2) emission rate gm/sec 16.4 9 Particulate matter (SPM) emission mg/Nm 3 80 rate 10 Particulate matter (SPM) emission gm/sec 0.6 rate

The emission rate for limekiln (new stack) is based on design parameters.

Control of Pollutants

The limekiln has been provided with a new electrostatic precipitator and operates continuously. Adequate stack height has been provided for wider dispersion of pollutants and the emission of suspended particulate matter from the limekiln stack will meet statutory requirements and designed for an emission level of 80 mg/Nm 3.

4.12.1.4 Emission from New Power Boiler #6

Characterisation of Emissions

The air pollutants in the flue gases resulting from coal fired boilers will be sulphur dioxide and traces of nitrogen oxide. Suspended particulates are due to fly ash, sulphur dioxide due to the organic sulphur burnt and nitrogen oxides due to the thermal oxidation of nitrogen in combustion air.

The details of stack emissions from coal fired boiler #6 are given in the following table.

Control of Pollutants

The power boiler will be provided with new electrostatic precipitator and will be operated continuously. Adequate stack height will be provided for wider dispersion of pollutants and the emission of suspended particulate matter from the proposed power boiler stack will meet statutory requirements of pollution control authorities and shall be designed for an emission level of 100 mg/Nm 3.

C4-74 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Details of stack for the new Power Boiler #6 – at normal operation and with Electrostatic precipitator - are given below:

Sl. Parameters Unit New Power Boiler PB #6 No.

1 Stack height m 95.0

2 Stack diameter m. 3.5

3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 10.5

4 Flue gas temperature oC 145

5 Flow rate of gas Nm 3/sec 70.0

6 Type of fuel -- Coal

7 Fuel consumption rate tph 150

8 Sulphur dioxide (SO 2) emission rate mg/Nm³ 1215

9 Particulate matter (SPM) emission rate mg/Nm 3 100

The emission rates (new stack) are based on design parameters.

4.12.1.5 Fugitive Emissions

Fugitive emissions may be expected from the process and auxiliary plant areas. It is difficult to quantify and characterise these fugitive emissions. The pollutants in the fugitive emissions may include particulates, mercaptans etc. To check the mercaptan levels in and around the plant area, the monitoring was carried out and the results are given in the following table . Nevertheless, compared to the stack emissions, the fugitive emissions will be negligible. Yet, in order to reduce the fugitive emissions, adequate measures will be taken in the design and operation of the plant.

The post MEP operation envisages the firing of non-condensable gases emanating from the pulping operations, in the lime mud reburning kiln.

AMBIENT MERCAPTAN LEVELS IN THE PLANT AREA

Sl Location Mercaptans during Mercaptans during No. 2004-05 ( µµµg/m 3) Jan 2008 ( µµµg/m 3) 1 Chipper house 3.1 2.9 2 Bagasse unloading plant 3.4 3.6 3 Coal yard 2.6 2.5 4 Lime godown 2.8 2.7 5 Near WWTP 2.9 3.1

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-75 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.12.2 Wastewater Generation and Treatment

Various streams of wastewater generated are identified and the proposed treatment and disposal is discussed below.

4.12.2.1 Sources of Wastewater Generation

More than 85% of the water used will be ultimately discharged from the mill as wastewater and the balance is carried along with the products or lost into the atmosphere as evaporation or steam losses. There are several sources of wastewater generation in the mill. Based on their origin and characteristics, the various wastewater streams are divided into the following groups:

Process wastewaters from the following sections:

- Pulp Mill - Chemical Recovery Plant - Paper Machine - Utilities area

It may be noted that black liquor is not considered as wastewater stream, since it will be completely recovered and burnt in the chemical recovery plant. The bagasse plant wastewater is expected to have the same characteristics as the bagasse washing and storage shall remain at the present level of operation.

The water balance indicating water consumption and wastewater generation from each unit after the MEP is given in the following table .

Category Fresh Wastewater Water Generation (m³/day) (m³/day) Hardwood pulp mill 7300 5910 Chemical bagasse pulp mill 16320 13870 Mechanical bagasse pulp mill 2000 1700 Paper Machine #1 & #2 9000 7690 Paper machine #3 7050 5995 Chemical Recovery Plant and others including cooling 6000 5100 tower Boiler house and DM Plant 5000 4200 Domestic (Colony sewage) 1300 1040 * Recycled Treated Wastewater Bagasse wash water chest make-up 3500 3500

C4-76 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Bagasse yard central channel make-up 3500 3500 Pith press wire cleaning 3000 3000 Pulp mill floor cleaning 100 100 SRP vacuum pump seal pit make-up 1800 1800 Power boiler ash quenching, floor cleaning and coal yard 4000 -- sprinklers WWTP vacuum pump seal pit, wire cleaning 4000 4000 Horticulture and plantation 100 -- Bagasse yard sprinklers 4000 4000 Total 77970 65405 Less: Recycled treated wastewater 24000 24000 Net fresh water/Net wastewater generation 53970 41405

* The total quantity of domestic wastewater from colony sewage treatment plant is 1,040 m³/day. Part of 440 m³/day is used for plantation around the colony area. About 600 m³/day of excess treated domestic wastewater is pumped to mill’s wastewater treatment plant for further treatment.

The post MEP operations of wastewater treatment plant will be treating about 65,405 m³/day of wastewater and a quantity of 24,000 m 3/day of treated wastewater shall be recycled to non process, non-critical applications as being practised presently, leaving a quantity of 41,405 m 3/day of wastewater to be discharged for irrigation.

4.12.2.2 Characterisation and Treatment of Wastewater

In terms of the quantity and the pollution loads, the combined process wastewaters account for the major portion of the total wastewaters from the mill. Among the wastewaters, the blow downs contain basically dissolved solids and the mill sanitary wastewater contains organic matter. The typical (expected) characteristics of the other mill wastewater streams are given in the following table.

WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS

Combined wastewater Unit Paper Plant Pulp Plant pH 7.5 7.5 Total suspended solids mg/l 1367 225 BOD mg/l 377 200 COD mg/l 1038 500

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-77 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The characteristics of the wastewater from bagasse washing stream are expected to remain the same.

The operation of pulp mill, after the on going MDP as well as post MEP, is aimed at reducing the pollution level. The various measures taken inside the plant like oxygen delignification, increased usage of chlorine dioxide, elimination of elemental chlorine in bleaching processes, condensate segregation facility for evaporators combined with improved inplant control measures will help in reducing the pollution load. The plant design shall incorporate features aimed at reducing the specific water consumption of water in pulp mill.

Moreover, the oxygen delignification coupled with increased chlorine dioxide consumption instead of elemental chlorine shall be beneficial in reducing the colour level in the bleach plant wastewater due to oxidation of colour contributing chromophoric groups in residual lignin together with reduction in BOD and COD values due to oxidation of colour contributing chromophoric group in the residual lignin. The AOX level in the post MEP scenario will continue to be less than 1 kg/AD t of product.

The estimated reduction in colour level shall be about 30% to 50% due to improved bleaching sequence.

The ongoing MDP has been designed in such a way that the colour is being controlled at source, by application of state of art technology like the ones listed below and not mere end of pipe treatment.

 Use of presses in brown stock washers which improves efficiency of brown stock washing

 Use of pressure screens for screening at higher consistency due to which there is no dickering of brown stock pulp, which is one of the main source of colour in a conventional pulp mill i.e., colour from unbleached Decker water

 Oxygen delignification and closing of brown loop

 Reduction in colour of the alkali extraction stage due to EOP stage

The post MEP operations shall mainly result in generation of additional wastewater from PM#3.

To take care of the ageing of existing secondary clarifier, on additional secondary clarifier mechanism is proposed.

The schematic flow diagram of wastewater treatment plant after MEP is enclosed as Annex 9 .

C4-78 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

4.12.2.3 Wastewater Characteristics and Disposal

The quality of treated wastewater from the WWTP outlet shall continue to meet the discharge standards for inland surface water and shall be used for irrigation .

The treated wastewaters from the mill shall be well within the prescribed standards of GSR-422 (E). The existing WWTP will be adequate for treatment of the wastewater generated post MEP. The quality of treated wastewaters would be in the same range as similar treatment is proposed with reduction in pollution load.

The treated wastewater shall continue to be utilised of for irrigation as is being done now.

Ground water analysis around the area of discharge does not show any negative impact due to land treatment. The sodium absorption ratio (SAR) of the soil has not increased above the allowable levels for irrigation. The mill is parallelly, under the guidelines of Tamil Nadu Agricultural University, implementing the soil enrichment measures to maintain the SAR. Photograph showing the growth of the vegetation using treated wastewater are depicted below:

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-79 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

4.12.3 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The solid wastes generated in pulp mill are non-hazardous in nature. The details of major solid wastes generated and quantities, with disposal methods, are presented in the following table.

DETAILS OF MAJOR SOLID WASTES Sl Source Composition Quantity (tpd) Disposal No Pre - MEP Post - MEP 1 Boiler ash Silica 202 240 Cement manufacture 2 Lime sludge Calcium 202 202 Sent to cement purge at 50% carbonate and kilns moisture silica 2 Chip dust Organic 14 15 Fired in boiler 3 Waste pulp Fines and fibre 100 105 Used for card from WWTP board /egg tray manufacture 4 Pith Organic 77 89 Fired in boiler

About 100 tpa of used/spent oil will be collected and disposed of to TNPCB authorised facilities.

About 4,30,000 tpa of spent chemicals (black liquor) shall be used in chemical recovery boiler.

About 5000 tpa of sludge containing adsorbable organic halides shall be used as fuel in power boilers.

TNPL is not disposing of any sludge containing absorbable organic halides. The generated secondary sludge is recirculated in the system and the excess sludge is burnt off in high-pressure boilers.

The ongoing MDP is nearing completion and the proposed MEP is intended to take off dovetailing the completion of MDP. The environmental status as achieved post MDP will continue to prevail post MEP too, without any additional adverse impact.

4.12.4 Noise Levels

Sources of Generation

Both stationary and moving sources of noise will be present. The major stationary sources include paper machines, chippers, winders, boiler house and auxiliaries. The moving sources include the trucks and wagons carrying the raw materials, fuels and finished goods. Source wise noise levels monitored during the study period are dealt within Chapter 5.

C4-80 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Noise Control

Acoustic enclosures will be provided wherever possible to control the noise levels below 80 dB (A). Wherever it is not possible to meet the required noise levels, personnel protection equipment like earplugs and earmuffs will be provided to the workers. Green belt development programme is being implemented in a phased manner. Plants have been planted in and around the plant, residential colony and other areas providing a green belt around the mill. This attenuates the noise to a considerable extent.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C4-81 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

(This page intentionally left blank)

C4-82 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

5.1 Introduction

This chapter provides the description of the existing environmental status of the study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study area of this project covers an area within a radius of 10-km from the paper mill in which the proposed MEP is to be implemented.

The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline environmental conditions, which are described with respect to climate, hydro-geological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, vegetation pattern, ecology, socio-economic profile, land use, and places of archaeological importance.

A regional background to the baseline data is being presented at the very outset, which will help in better appreciation of micro-level field data generated on several environmental and ecological attributes. The background information is based on Karur and gazetteers, the district geo-hydrology reports and information from other sources like National Informatics Centre.

The primary data for micro-meteorology, ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality, noise levels and aquatic and terrestrial ecology in the study area of 10-km radius from mill site has been generated covering all seasons of the year 2004-2005 (9 th September 2004 to 9 th September 2005). In addition, as per TOR conditions of MoEF, baseline data has again been monitored during January 2008. The secondary data on land use pattern and socio-economic aspects of people in the study area, within 10- km radius from mill site has also been incorporated in the report.

5.2 Geology and Hydro-Geology

5.2.1 Physiography

The study area consists of floodplains of river Cauvery and its tributaries, undulating upland areas. Small sporadic hillocks stand here and there. The elevation ranges from 142-m in the plains to 1034-m in the hillocks. The micro topography of the area is highly variable.

5.2.2 Geology

The secondary data regarding geology was collected from district gazettes and state ground water board. The rock types in this region are of gneiss series of Archean and Precambrian ages. They include dark coloured

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

charnokite, basic granulite, magnelite, quaruite, light coloured garnetiferous, sellimanute gneiss etc. The rock formation has a general E-W foliation representing axial planes of folds, which divide this region upto plains and E-W trending hills and moulds. No significant mineral deposits are found in this region.

5.2.3 Mineralogy

Karur district is comprised with khondolite and charnockite group of rocks, both constituting the Eastern Ghat super group of Archaean age. The khondolite group comprises sillimanite gneiss with or without garnet, calc granulite and crystalline limestone, while the charnockite group includes magnetite quartzite with or without grunerite, basic granulite and charnockite. They were all formed due to granulate facies grade metamorphism of preexisting aluminous, calcareous, silicious sediments and basic flows.

Limestone: Low grade to cement grade limestone is found extensively at Kulithalai taluk (Thevarmalai, Melapaguthi, Varavanai, Vellalapatti, keeranur, Pothuravautham patti, Kaladai, Kaliyapatti etc villages), at (Esanatham, Ammapadi Alamarathupatti, Thennilai etc villages) and Karur taluk (K. Pitchampatti village). The limestone of this area is used by cement industries as well as by fertiliser industries.

Quartz and Feldspar: Milky to glassy variety of Quartz and Potash feldspar with an average of 12% potash is the common economic mineral available extensively at Aravakurichi taluk (Pungambadi-West, Nagampalli, Punjaikalkurichi, Pavithram, Soodamani, Venjamangudalur-East, Aravakurichi, kodanthur-South, Rajapuram, Kodaiyur etc villages), less prominently at Kulithalai taluk (D. Edayapatti, Sengal, Varavanai, Pannpatti, Vadavambadi etc Villages) and at Karur taluk (Villiyanai-South Village). High grade Quartz is exported, low grade used in the manufacture of glass and Feldspar in the ceramic and tile manufacturing industries.

Granite: There are good quality of hard rocks, which are particularly available at Kulithalai and Aravakurichi taluks. But the rocks available at Thagamalai, Kalugur and Parunthalur of Kulithalai taluk are export worthy and they are being operated for the extraction of granite blocks.

Roughstone and Sand: The charnockite rocks are found to occur in K. Paramathi, Punnam areas etc, which are exploited to produce building materials and road metals. The river sand of Amaravathi and Cauvery finds very good market in the adjacent districts.

C5-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.2.4 Hydrology

The study area is well traversed by river Cauvery. The river Cauvery enters the study area at its western extremity. After flowing along the northern boundary of Karur taluk for about 32-km, the river forms the boundary between Karur and Namakkal districts. Noyyal River, which is a tributary of Cauvery, flows along the NW boundary of Karur taluk.

5.2.5 Hydrogeology

The depth of the groundwater table varies from 5 to 10 m near the project site and up to 150-m in dry lands. In the hard rock area, the groundwater is confined to the pores in the weathered rocks and joints and fractures in the jointed rocks. Groundwater could be drawn only from wells within a depth of 18-m piercing chiefly weathered and jointed rocks.

5.3 Micro-Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the study period is very useful for proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input to prediction models of air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the region.

5.3.1 Methodology for Monitoring

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS: 8829) and India Meteorological Department (IMD). On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. The generated data is then compared with the meteorological data generated by the nearest IMD station at Salem.

5.3.1.1 Methodology of Data Generation

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment was installed on top of the administrative building at TNPL plant site, at a height of about 10-m above ground level, to record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature. The meteorological monitoring station was located in such a way that it is free from any obstructions and as per the guidelines specified under IS: 8829. Cloud cover was recorded by visual observation. Rainfall was monitored by gauge.

Hourly average, maximum and minimum values of wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature were recorded continuously at this

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

station during the study period i.e. from 9 th September 2004 to 9 th September 2005. The data has again been monitored for one month period from 1 st January 2008 to 31 st January 2008.

5.3.2 Meteorological Data Generated at Site

The site-specific data generated during the study period is presented in Table 5.3.1 and discussed below.

TABLE 5.3.1 SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE

MONTH TEMPERATURE RELATIVE RAIN CLOUD COVER (°C) HUMIDITY (%) FALL (OKTAS) (MM) Max. Min. Max. Min. Min. Max. September 2004 37.1 24.0 88 61 82.2 0/8 8/8 October 2004 38.4 22.3 92 57 89.1 0/8 7/8 November 2004 33.3 20.8 87 55 35.2 1/8 8/8 December 2004 33.0 18.8 83 53 Nil 1/8 6/8 January 2005 34.6 18.6 74 42 Nil 0/8 5/8 February 2005 38.1 17.6 70 39 Nil 0/8 6/8 March 2005 40.6 20.7 65 35 16.0 0/8 5/8 April 2005 39.1 22.5 72 42 73.2 1/8 8/8 May 2005 38.7 23.6 70 41 52.2 2/8 8/8 June 2005 39.5 22.5 71 53 22.0 0/8 7/8 July 2005 38.9 19.1 76 50 86.1 2/8 8/8 August 2005 37.9 21.6 75 53 162.0 2/8 6/8 January 2008 33.6 18.3 72 40 Nil 0/8 6/8

5.3.2.1 Wind Speed and Direction

The wind roses for the study period representing all seasons of the year 2004-05 viz., post , winter, pre-monsoon and monsoon seasons and during the month of January 2008, are shown in Figure-5.3.1(A) to Figure–5.3.4, the summary of wind pattern is presented in Table-5.3.2 and discussed below.

C5-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE- 5.3.2

SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN IN STUDY AREA

SEASON FIRST SECOND PREDOMINANT CALM PREDOMINANT PREDOMINANT WIND SPEEDS (%) WIND WIND (KMPH) DIRECTION DIRECTION

Post Monsoon W (10.7%) NW (9.4 %) 1.0 to 5.0 20.4 (2004) 5.0 to 11.0 Winter (2004-05) ESE (26.8%) SE (21.3%) 1.0 to 5.0 17.8 5.0 to 11.0 Pre-Monsoon W (39.2%) SE (12.2%) 1.0 to 5.0 10.3 (2005) 5.0 to 11.0 Monsoon (2005) W (55.6%) WNW (8.8%) 1.0 to 5.0 15.8 5.0 to 11.0 Winter (2008) ESE (25.6%) SE (20.3%) 1.0 to 5.0 18.1 5.0 to 11.0

Wind Pattern – Post Monsoon Season 2004

Predominant winds are from W direction followed by winds from NW direction. The winds from W direction were observed for 10.7% of the total time, with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (2.9%), 5.01-11 kmph (3.1%), 11.1-19 kmph (2.1%) and >19 kmph (2.6%), whereas, in NW direction, the winds were observed for 9.4% of the total time with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (1.5%) and 5.01-11 kmph (3.1%), 11.1-19 kmph (4.2%) and >19 kmph (0.6%). The calm period was observed to be for 20.4% of the total time. The other directions and percentage frequencies were observed from WNW (8.3%), NNW (8.2%), SE (7.4%), ESE (6.4%), N (5.6%), WSW (4.3%), SSE (2.9%) and SW (2.9%).

Wind Pattern – Winter Season 2004-05

Predominant winds are from ESE direction followed by winds from SE direction. The winds from ESE direction were observed for 26.8% of the total time, with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (1.8%), 5.01-11 kmph (13.4%), and 11.1-19 kmph (11.5%). Whereas, in SE direction the winds were observed for 21.3%. The calm period was observed to be for 17.8% of the total time. The other directions and percentage frequencies were observed from NNW (5.5%), NW (3.7%), E (3.1%), NNE (3.0%), N (2.9%), NE (2.6%), SSE (2.5%), ENE (2.1%), W (2.0%), S (1.6%), WSW (1.5%), SSW (1.0%), and SW (0.5%).

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Wind Pattern – Premonsoon Season 2005

Predominant winds are from W direction followed by winds from SE direction. The winds from W direction were observed for 39.2% of the total time, with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5.0 kmph (1.9%), 5.01-11 kmph (11.6%), and 11.1-19 kmph (24.0%). Whereas in SE direction the winds were observed for 12.2 % of the total time with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (1.5%) and 5.01-11 kmph (5.8%), and 11.1-19 kmph (4.8%). The calm period was observed to be for 10.4% of the total time. The other directions and percentage frequencies were observed from ESE (11.3%), WSW (4.5%), NNW (3.7%), NW (3.6%), SSE (1.8%), NNE (1.5%), NE (1.5%), E (1.4%), N (1.4%), ENE (1.0%), SSW (1.0%), S (0.9%) and SW (0.9%).

Wind Pattern – Monsoon Season 2005

Predominant winds are from W direction followed by winds from WNW direction. The winds from W direction were observed for 55.6% of the total time, with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (2.8%), 5.01-11 kmph (22.0%), and 11.1-19 kmph (3.1%). Whereas in WNW direction the winds were observed for 8.8 % of the total time with wind speeds and frequencies in the range of 1.01-5 kmph (4.4%) and 5.01-11 kmph (3.9%), and 11.1-19 kmph (0.5%). The calm period was observed to be for 15.8% of the total time. The other directions and percentage frequencies were observed from WSW (7.0%), NW (5.8%), NNW (3.2%), SW (0.8%), SSE (0.7%), SSW (0.6%), N (0.5%), S (0.4%), SE (0.4%), ESE (0.3%), NNE (0.1%), NE (0.1%), and ENE (0.1%).

Wind Pattern – Winter Season 2008

Predominant winds are from ESE direction followed by winds from SE direction. The winds from ESE direction were observed for 25.6%, whereas in SE direction the winds were observed for 20.3 % of the total time. The calm period was observed to be for 18.1% of the total time. The other directions and percentage frequencies were observed from WNW (19.0%), NNW (5.8%), NW (3.8%), NNE (3.4%), N (3.2%), E (3.2%), NE (2.8%), SSE (2.7%), ENE (2.5%), W (2.2%), S (1.8%), WSW (1.6%), SSW (1.3%), and SW (0.8%).

C5-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.3.1(A) SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (POST MONSOON SEASON 2004)

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 5.3.1(B) SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (WINTER SEASON 2005)

FIGURE 5.3.1(C) SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (PREMONSOON SEASON 2005)

C5-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.3.1(D) SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (MONSOON SEASON 2005)

FIGURE 5.3.1(E) SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (WINTER SEASON 2008)

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.3.3 Secondary Data Collected from IMD- Salem

Secondary information on meteorological conditions for the period 1993- 2003 was collected from the nearest India Meteorological Department (IMD), Salem station observatory located at about 58-km from the plant site in the North direction.

5.3.3.1 Meteorological Data

The meteorological data have been collected from IMD, Salem for the parameters such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction. The data at IMD are usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr. The data collected from the IMD station are tabulated in Table-5.3.3

TABLE-5.3.3 CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA FOR IMD SALEM

Month Atmospheric Temperature Relative Rainfall Pressure (mb) (°C) Humidity (%) (mm) 0830 1730 Max. Min. 0830 1730 Monthly Hrs Hrs Hrs Hrs Total January 983.2 978.8 33.5 16.4 73 44 8.6 February 982.2 977.4 36.1 16.8 72 35 11.8 March 980.8 975.6 38.4 18.7 69 32 14.8 April 978.9 973.8 39.5 21.8 70 41 55.6 May 976.4 971.9 39.7 22.4 71 47 92.8 June 975.9 972.2 37.7 22.5 74 51 82.4 July 976.2 972.8 36.2 22.0 78 56 104.7 August 976..7 972.7 35.8 21.5 79 55 143.2 September 977.9 973.4 35.5 21.4 77 54 141.6 October 979.4 975.4 34.7 20.4 80 62 185.9 November 981.0 977.4 33.1 17.7 78 61 89.3 December 982.6 978.7 32.3 16.2 75 52 34.3

5.3.3.2 Wind Speed/ Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light and moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon hours the winds were stronger. The seasonal wind roses are shown in Figure-5.3.2 (A) through Figure-5.3.2(E) and presented in Table- 5.3.4.

C5-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE-5.3.4 SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN – IMD SALEM

Season First Second Predominant Calm Predominant Predominant Wind Speeds (%) Wind Direction Wind Direction (kmph) 0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730

Pre-Monsoon NE E E ESE 1.0- 5.0 1.0- 5.0 12 8 (29%) (29%) (25%) (12%) 5.0-11.0 5.0-11.0

Monsoon SW W SSW SW 1.0- 5.0 1.0- 5.0 4 16 (30%) (25%) (24%) (22%) 5.0-11.0 5.0-11.0

Post-Monsoon NE E SW NE 1.0- 5.0 1.0- 5.0 25 25 (17%) (25.5%) (15%) (11.5%) 5.0-11.0 5.0-11.0

Winter E E NE ENE 1.0- 5.0 1.0- 5.0 13 7 (27%) (30%) (25%) (21.3%) 5.0-11.0 5.0-11.0

Annual NE E E ENE 1.0- 5.0 1.0- 5.0 14 14 (17.9%) (21.8%) (10.5%) (9.6%) 5.0-11.0 5.0-11.0

5.3.4 Comments Based on Meteorological Monitoring

The site-specific recorded data have been compared with the data recorded at the nearest IMD station at Salem. The following observations are made:

 The relative humidity levels recorded at the site are comparable with the data generated at IMD station at Salem.

 The temperature recorded at the site shows more or less the same trend when compared to the data monitored at the IMD.

 The wind speeds and directions vary slightly when compared to the data recorded at the IMD station at Salem. This may be due to the geographical feature of the study area.

It is observed that the data generated on the site are broadly compatible with the regional meteorology.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 5.3.2 (A) WIND ROSE - PRE-MONSOON (IMD - SALEM)

C5-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.3.2 (B) WIND ROSE - MONSOON (IMD - SALEM)

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 5.3.2 (C) WIND ROSE – POST MONSOON (IMD - SALEM)

C5-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.3.2 (D) WIND ROSE – WINTER (IMD - SALEM)

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 5.3.2 (E) WIND ROSE – ANNUAL (IMD - SALEM)

C5-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.4 Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to study area of 10-km radius from the paper mill forms the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the region are industrial, transportation and residential activities like domestic fuel burning. The prime objective of the baseline air quality study was to assess the existing air quality of the area. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality after implementation of the MEP. The study area represents mostly the rural and residential environment.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques, frequency of sampling and interpretation of results of monitoring. The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out during September 2004 to September 2005 covering all seasons of the year 2004-05 (excluding monsoon season). AAQ data has also been monitored from 1 st January 2008 to 31 st January 2008, according to TOR conditions of MoEF.

5.4.1 Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

5.4.1.1 Selection of sampling locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically designed Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance programme has been based on the following considerations:

 Broad meteorological conditions on a synoptic basis

 Physiography of the study area

 Representative locations of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status, and

 Representative locations of the likely impact areas.

AAQM were set up at six locations with due consideration to the above mentioned criteria. Table 5.4.1 gives the details of environmental setting around each monitoring station. The locations of the selected stations with reference to the paper mill site is given in the same table and also depicted in Figure 5.4.1.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-17 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.4.1 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS

Station Name of the Distance Direction Environmental Setting Code Station from the w.r.t. Plant Plant site (km) site AAQ1 TNPL Plant Site Plant site Industrial environment associated with frequent movements of heavy- duty trucks. AAQ2 Nalliyampalayam 1.6 SE Rural setting with mixed land uses. village This location represents the downwind direction. AAQ3 Valayakkaranpudur 4.8 ESE Rural setting with mixed land uses. This location represents the village downwind direction. AAQ4 Maravapalayam 4.3 W Rural setting with mixed land uses. This location represents the upwind village direction. AAQ5 Velur village 6.4 NNE Rural setting with mixed land uses. This location represents the cross wind direction. AAQ6 Kuppam village 9.0 SW Rural setting with mixed land uses. This location represents the cross wind direction.

C5-18 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.4.1 AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-19 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.4.1.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

AAQ monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per week at each location representing the post-monsoon, winter and pre-monsoon seasons. The baseline data of air environment were generated for the below mentioned parameters:

 Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM)

 Respirable Particulate Matter (RPM)

 Sulphur dioxide (SO 2)

 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), and

 Carbon Monoxide (CO).

5.4.1.3 Duration of Sampling

The duration of sampling of Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM),

RPM, SO 2 and NOx was one twenty four hourly continuous sample per day and CO was sampled for 8 hours continuous thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) (May 20, 1994).

5.4.1.4 Method of Analysis

The air samples were analysed as per standard methods specified by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), IS: 5184 and American Public Health Association (APHA).

5.4.2 Details of the Sampling Locations

The details of AAQM stations, their relative locations and distances with reference to the Paper Mill site and the environmental setting around the AAQM location are described below.

5.4.2.1 TNPL Plant Site (AAQ1)

The Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS) was installed on top of Project Manager’s office at a height of about 7-m above the ground level. This location represents totally the industrial environment associated with industrial activities and transportation by heavy-duty vehicles, which create dust pollution. Water sprinkling is regularly done inside the plant site on the roads to reduce dust pollution.

C5-20 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.4.2.2 Nalliyampalyam Village (AAQ2)

The AAQM at Nalliyampalayam village is located at a distance of 1.6-km in the SE direction of the mill. The RDS was installed at a height of about 3.5- m above the ground level. The internal roads are of water bound macadam type.

5.4.2.3 Valayakkaranpudur Village (AAQ3)

The AAQM at Valayakkaranpudur village is located at a distance of 4.8-km in the ESE direction from the mill centre. The RDS was installed at about 3.5 m height above the ground level. This location is characterised mostly by residential activities.

5.4.2.4 Maravapalayam Village (AAQ4)

The AAQM at Maravapalayam village is located at a distance of 4.3-km in the W direction of the mill site. The RDS was installed at about 4-m height above the ground level at a distance of 100 m from a pucca road. This location is characterised by residential activities.

5.4.2.5 Velur Village (AAQ5)

The AAQM at Velur village is located at a distance of 6.4-km in the NNE direction from the mill centre. The RDS was installed on the top of Public Works Department building at about 5-m height above the ground level. This location represents semi-urban area and is characterised by residential, commercial activities and transportation.

5.4.2.6 Kuppam Village (AAQ6)

The AAQM at Kuppam village is located at about 9-km in the SW direction of the mill centre. The RDS was installed on top of the Panchayat Office building at about 3.5-m height above the ground level. This location is characterised by mixed land use consisting of residential activities.

5.4.3 Selection of Instruments for Air Quality Sampling

Respirable Dust Samplers APM-451 of Envirotech Instruments were used for monitoring Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM), Respirable

fraction (<10 microns) and gaseous pollutants like SO 2 and NOx. Mylar bags and pulse pumps were deployed for collection of three 8 hourly samples of carbon dioxide. Gas chromatography techniques have been used for the estimation of CO.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-21 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.4.4 Sampling and Analytical Techniques

5.4.4.1 Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM), RPM, SO 2 and NOx

Total Suspended Particulate Matter and RPM present in ambient air are sucked through the cyclone. Coarse and non-respirable dust is separated from the air stream by centrifugal forces acting on the solid particles. These separated particulates fall through the cyclone's conical hopper and collect in the sampling cup placed at the bottom.

The fine dust (<10 microns) forming the respirable fraction of the TSPM passes the cyclone and is retained by the filter paper. A tapping is provided on the suction side of the blower to provide suction for sampling air through a set of impingers. Samples of gases were drawn at a flow rate of 0.2 litres per minute (lpm).

TSPM and RPM have been estimated by gravimetric method. Modified West and Gaeke method (IS-5182 Part-II, 1969) has been adopted for

estimation of SO 2. Jacobs-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 Part-IV, 1975) has been adopted for the estimation of NOx.

5.4.4.2 Carbon Monoxide

CO Tubes have been used to collect the three 8 hourly samples for carbon monoxide. The CO levels were analysed through a gas chromatograph.

Calibration

Calibration charts were prepared for all gaseous pollutants. The calibration was carried out whenever new absorbing solutions were prepared. The techniques shown in Table 5.4.2 have been used for ambient air quality monitoring.

TABLE 5.4.2 TECHNIQUES USED FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Sl. Parameter Technique Minimum Detectable No. Limit ( µµµg/m 3)

1 TSPM Respirable Dust Sampling 5.0 (Gravimetric method) 2 RPM Respirable Dust Sampling 5.0 (Gravimetric method) 3 Sulphur Dioxide West and Gaeke 4.0 4 Nitrogen Oxide Jacob & Hochheiser 4.0 5 Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatography 12.5

C5-22 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.4.5 Presentation of Primary Data

The survey results during the study period comprising post-monsoon, winter and pre-monsoon seasons are presented in detail in Annex 1.

Various statistical parameters like 98 th percentile, average, maximum and minimum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The summary of these results for each location representing post monsoon, winter and pre-monsoon seasons are presented in Table 5.4.3(A) to 5.4.3(D). These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for National Ambient Air Quality. It is observed that the AAQ of the area is well within the CPCB standards for various zones.

TABLE 5.4.3 (A) SUMMARY OF THE AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LEVELS – POST MONSOON 2004

Sl Location TSPM RPM No Max Min Avg. 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 237.2 187.6 208.8 235.0 88.6 56.8 73.0 88.0 2 Nalliyampalayam 184.6 115.8 150.1 183.2 52.3 32.5 41.3 52.3 Village

3 Valayakkaranpudur 132.4 98.8 110.8 129.2 44.2 20.8 30.0 42.6 Village 4 Maravapalayam 130.5 97.6 115.6 129.7 36.5 26.7 30.3 34.8 Village 5 Velur Village 175.2 142.8 161.2 174.0 54.7 42.3 46.4 53.5 6 Kuppam Village 123.5 102.3 112.9 123.5 36.8 23.5 31.8 36.8

Sl Location SO 2 NOx No Max Min Avg 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 23.2 16.7 19.0 23.1 28.6 19.8 24.1 28.5

2 Nalliyampalayam 16.3 9.8 13.6 16.0 20.4 13.7 17.5 20.2 Village 3 Valayakkaranpudur 15.2 9.4 12.3 14.8 19.2 12.8 16.0 19.2 Village 4 Maravapalayam 14.0 10.7 12.0 13.7 18.5 13.7 16.2 18.5 Village 5 Velur Village 22.5 16.8 18.7 22.5 26.5 21.3 23.6 26.5 6 Kuppam Village 14.0 8.7 11.7 14.0 18.5 13.4 16.0 18.3

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-23 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl Location CO No. Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05 2 Nalliyampalayam Village 0.04 0.01 0.02 0.04 3 Valayakkaranpudur Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

4 Maravapalayam Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

5 Velur Village 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05 6 Kuppam Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

All values mentioned above are expressed in g/m 3 except CO, which are expressed in ppm.

TABLE 5.4.3 (B) SUMMARY OF THE AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LEVELS –WINTER 2004-05

Sl Location TSPM RPM No. Max Min Avg. 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 228.6 176.1 199.7 226.9 84.7 53.2 68.5 83.3 2 Nalliyampalayam 174.9 95.8 141.7 173.1 53.6 30.4 39.6 51.0 Village

3 Valayakkaranpudur 113.3 78.5 96.6 112.8 37.8 26.5 31.1 37.5 Village 4 Maravapalayam 131.2 89.7 115.6 130.7 33.8 26.4 30.4 33.8 Village 5 Velur Village 164.7 133.4 152.1 163.6 52.8 32.5 41.9 51.0 6 Kuppam Village 118.4 92.9 106.2 117.8 35.5 24.6 30.9 34.9

Sl Location SO 2 NOx No. Max Min Avg 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 24.9 17.6 20.3 24.5 32.7 21.4 26.1 32.1

2 Nalliyampalayam 17.4 10.7 14.7 17.4 23.4 13.6 14.7 17.4 Village 3 Valayakkaranpudur 17.2 9.7 13.6 16.8 21.3 11.7 17.6 21.3 Village 4 Maravapalayam 15.1 10.2 13.0 15.0 20.5 14.2 17.3 20.4 Village 5 Velur Village 24.2 17.5 19.8 23.9 31.7 21.8 25.3 30.9 6 Kuppam Village 15.4 9.3 12.3 14.8 19.2 11.8 15.8 18.7

C5-24 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl Location CO No. Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05 2 Nalliyampalayam Village 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05 3 Valayakkaranpudur Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

4 Maravapalayam Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

5 Velur Village 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.05

All values mentioned above are expressed in g/m 3 except CO, which are expressed in ppm.

TABLE 5.4.3 (C) SUMMARY OF THE AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LEVELS–PRE MONSOON 2005

Sl Location TSPM RPM No. Max Min Avg. 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 255.9 196.3 219.2 253.9 95.4 60.4 77.9 92.6 2 Nalliyampalayam 187.5 130.3 158.8 186.4 56.4 34.8 45.0 56.4 Village

3 Valayakkaranpudur 143.3 105.9 118.8 139.6 47.7 30.1 33.2 47.0 Village 4 Maravapalayam 138.7 105.1 122.9 136.6 39.5 30.0 33.2 38.1 Village 5 Velur Village 187.8 153.1 169.3 185.5 58.2 42.7 50.1 57.4 6 Kuppam Village 135.6 107.7 120.8 134.4 44.6 30.7 35.6 43.6

Sl Location SO 2 NOx No. Max Min Avg 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 20.4 14.4 16.6 20.4 27.7 18.5 21.6 27.4

2 Nalliyampalayam 14.2 8.4 11.9 14.2 18.1 10.4 15.3 18.0 Village 3 Valayakkaranpudur 13.4 8.5 10.7 13.1 16.8 10.8 13.3 16.2 Village 4 Maravapalayam 12.3 8.8 10.5 12.3 16.3 11.0 13.1 15.9 Village 5 Velur Village 18.2 12.2 14.3 18.0 24.8 15.7 19.1 23.7 6 Kuppam Village 12.2 7.7 10.1 12.2 15.2 9.2 12.8 15.0

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-25 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl Location CO No. Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.05 2 Nalliyampalayam Village 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.04 3 Valayakkaranpudur Village 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.05

4 Maravapalayam Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03

5 Velur Village 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.05 6 Kuppam Village 0.05 0.01 0.03 0.05

All values mentioned above are expressed in g/m 3 except CO, which are expressed in ppm.

TABLE 5.4.3 (D) SUMMARY OF THE AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LEVELS –WINTER 2008

Sl No. Location TSPM RPM Max Min Avg. 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 190.8 170.5 184.3 190.8 82.5 68.9 76.5 82.2

2 Nalliyampalayam Village 3 Valayakkaranpudur 165.8 105.2 138.1 164.6 44 26.9 33.4 43.6 Village 4 Maravapalayam 116.3 82.3 102.9 115.9 30.6 25.2 26.8 30.3 Village

5 Velur Village 150.8 95.3 117.7 149.7 39.1 32.8 36.3 39.1 6 Kuppam Village 180.1 120.7 156 178.0 51.6 37.1 43.6 50.7 111.2 92.9 100.8 110 31.1 21.9 26.7 31.1

Sl No. Location SO 2 NOx Max Min Avg 98% Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 26.8 18.8 20.5 26.7 29.1 21.5 25.7 29 2 Nalliyampalayam Village 18.3 12.4 16 18.1 20.1 14.1 16.2 19.7 3 Valayakkaranpudur 16.6 12.3 15.1 16.5 19.2 11.4 14.7 18.9 Village 4 Maravapalayam 14.1 10.8 12.5 14 18.5 12.8 15 18.2 Village 5 Velur Village 21.8 18.1 20.4 21.8 27.8 21.2 22.8 27.2

6 Kuppam Village 16.3 9.4 13.1 16.1 20 12.1 16.4 19.6

C5-26 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl Location CO No. Max Min Avg 98% 1 TNPL Plant Site 0.05 0.02 0.04 0.05 2 Nalliyampalayam Village 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 3 Valayakkaranpudur Village 0.04 0.02 0.03 0.04 4 Maravapalayam Village 0.03 0.01 0.02 0.03 5 Velur Village 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05 6 Kuppam Village 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.05

All values mentioned above are expressed in g/m 3 except CO, which are expressed in ppm.

5.4.6 Source Emission Monitoring / Stack Monitoring

Stack monitoring has been carried out in the industrial complex twice during the study period and the results are presented in Table 5.4.4 (A) to Table 5.4.4 (D).

TABLE 5.4.4 (A) STACK MONITORING RESULTS – January 2005

Sr. Parameters Unit Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 #2 kiln Boiler #1 & #3 & #4 (MHI) (BHEL) #1 # 5 #2 1 Stack height m 86 86 42 42 36 86 2 Stack diameter m. 3.2 3.2 2.0 3.2 1.0 3.2 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 6.8 9.9 8.5 7.6 9.5 7.2 4 Flue gas oC 165 140 116 150 160 145 temperature 5 Gas flow rate Nm 3/s 37.5 57.8 20.6 43.4 5.2 41.6 6 Sulphur dioxide mg/Nm 3 152 221 78 42 825 224 (SO ) emission 2 rate g/s 5.7 12.8 1.6 1.8 4.3 9.3 7 Particulate mg/Nm 3 80 72 150 165 105 65 matter (SPM) emission rate g/s 3.0 4.2 3.1 7.2 0.5 2.7 3 8 NO x emission mg/Nm 15.9 18.3 2.3 1.5 - 20.2 rate

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-27 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.4.4 (B) STACK MONITORING RESULTS – FEBRUARY 2005

Sr. Parameters Units Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 #2 kiln Boiler #1 & #3 & #4 (MHI) (BHEL) #1 # 5 #2 1 Stack height m 86 86 42 42 36 86 2 Stack diameter m. 3.2 3.2 2.0 3.2 1.0 3.2 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 7.1 8.5 7.8 7.1 9.1 8.3 4 Flue gas oC 172 165 148 157 118 141 temperature 5 Gas flow rate Nm 3/s 41.0 46.5 17.3 39.5 5.4 48.0 6 Sulphur dioxide mg/Nm 3 142 196 53 61 436 207 (SO ) emission 2 rate g/s 5.8 9.1 0.9 6.7 2.3 9.9 7 Particulate mg/Nm 3 67 70 132 171 87 63 matter (SPM) emission rate g/s 2.7 3.3 2.2 6.7 0.4 2.7 3 8 NO x emission mg/Nm 20.1 17.2 1.2 1.7 - 18.5 rate 9 Total Reduced mg/Nm 3 - - 13.2 14.6 1.2 - Sulphur 10 Hydrogen mg/Nm 3 - - 7.3 6.9 0.6 - Sulphide

TABLE 5.4.4 (C) STACK MONITORING RESULTS – May 2005

Sr. Parameters Units Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 #2 kiln Boiler #1 & #2 #3 & #4 (MHI) (BHEL) #1 # 5 1 Stack height m 86 86 42 42 36 86 2 Stack diameter m. 3.2 3.2 2.0 3.2 1.0 3.2 3 Area of the Duct m/sec 8.04 8.04 3.14 3.14 0.78 8.04 4 Flue gas oC 168 151 120 148 152 142 temperature 5 Velocity of the m/sec 7.1 9.94 9.0 7.85 9.85 7.8 flue gas

C5-28 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sr. Parameters Units Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 #2 kiln Boiler #1 & #2 #3 & #4 (MHI) (BHEL) #1 # 5 6 Gas flow rate Nm 3/s 37.3 54.3 20.7 43.2 5.24 43.5 7 Particulate mg/Nm 3 85.7 73.4 142.3 140 117.2 74.0 matter 8 Sulphur dioxide mg/Nm 3 157.0 192.0 87.2 61.0 57.6 218.0

9 Oxides of mg/Nm 3 19.0 16.2 2.4 1.3 1.9 27.0 nitrogen

TABLE 5.4.4 (D) STACK MONITORING RESULTS – January 2008

Sr. Parameters Unit Stacks attached to No. Power Power CRB CRB Lime Power Boilers Boilers #1 #2 kiln Boiler #1 & #3 & #4 (MHI) (BHEL) #1 # 5 #2 1 Stack height m 86 86 42 42 36 86 2 Stack diameter m. 3.2 3.2 2 3.2 1 3.2 3 Flue gas velocity m/sec 7.5 8.2 7.7 7 9.2 8.2 4 Flue gas oC 168 170 142 156 106 152 temperature 5 Gas flow rate Nm 3/s 35.98 39.16 15.33 34.52 5.02 40.82 6 Sulphur dioxide mg/Nm 3 164 172 68 72 226 189 (SO ) emission 2 rate g/s 5.90 6.74 1.04 2.49 1.13 7.71 7 Particulate matter mg/Nm 3 66.2 64.8 79.1 82.4 51.2 65.6 (SPM) emission rate g/s 2.38 2.54 1.21 2.84 0.26 2.68 3 8 NO x emission rate mg/Nm 22.4 18.9 5.2 6.7 - 22.6

9 Total Reduced mg/Nm 3 - - 13.24 14.28 6.8 - Sulphur 10 Hydrogen mg/Nm 3 - - 8.1 8.2 3.9 - Sulphide 3 11. Mercaptans mg/Nm - - 0.2 0.3 - -

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-29 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.4.7 Fugitive Emissions

Fugitive emissions may be expected from the process and auxiliary plant areas. It is difficult to quantify and characterise these fugitive emissions. The pollutants in the fugitive emissions may include particulates, mercaptans etc. To check the mercaptan levels in and around the plant area, the monitoring was carried out and the results are given in Table- 5.4.5 . Nevertheless, compared to the stack emissions, the fugitive emissions will be negligible. Yet, in order to reduce the fugitive emissions, adequate measures will be taken in the design and operation of the plant.

TABLE 5.4.5 MERCAPTAN LEVELS IN THE PLANT AREA

Sr. Location Mercaptans during Mercaptans during No. 2004-05 ( µµµg/m 3) Jan 2008 ( µµµg/m 3) 1 Chipper house 3.1 2.9 2 Bagasse unloading plant 3.4 3.6 3 Coal yard 2.6 2.5 4 Lime godown 2.8 2.7 5 Near WWTP 2.9 3.1

5.5 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of surface and groundwater resources within 10-km radius of the study area have been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluating the anticipated impact of the proposed project.

The purpose of this study is to:

 Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters

 Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions, recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity

 Predict impact on water quality by this project and related activities and

 Suggest appropriate mitigation measures.

C5-30 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.5.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalised based on:

 Drainage pattern

 Location of major water bodies

 Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact areas, and

 Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

Five groundwater sources consisting of bore wells and two surface water samples covering 10-km radial distance from the mill site were examined during the study period for physico-chemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of industrial and other activities on surface and ground water quality. Treated wastewater was also collected for analysis. The samples were analysed as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater' published by American Public Health Association (APHA). The water samples were collected on monthly basis for 12 months.

Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys.

Samples collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO 3. Samples for bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilised glass bottles. Selected physico-chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analysed for projecting the existing water quality status in the study area. Parameters like temperature, Dissolved Oxygen (DO), and pH were analysed at the time of sample collection.

5.5.2 Water Sampling Locations

The water sampling locations are listed below in Table 5.5.1 and depicted in Figure 5.5.1.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-31 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.5.1 DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Location Distance from the Direction mill site w.r.t. (km) mill site Ground Water GW-1 Nalliyampalayam 1.6 SE GW-2 Ponniyakaundan Pudur 4.4 SSW GW-3 Moolimangalam 2.2 SSE GW4 Totampalayam 3.8 SSE GW5 Polamapuram 4.4 SSW Surface Water SW1 Cauvery River Kalipalayam 3.6 NW SW2 Cauvery River Near Nagamanayakkan 8.5 WNW Palayam village Wastewater E-1 TNPL treated wastewater Treated wastewater from WWTP. This wastewater is being utilised for irrigation.

C5-32 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.5.1 - WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-33 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.5.3 Presentation of Results (Primary data)

The results of the water quality monitored during study period covering all the seasons of the year are presented in Table 5.5.2 to Table 5.5.4 (Annex-2). The results were compared with standards for drinking water as per IS:10500-1983 "Specifications for Drinking Water" for ground water and with Class 'C' water quality (fit for drinking after conventional treatment) as per IS:2296-1982 "Tolerance Limits for Inland Surface water subject to Pollution" for surface water. The results of treated wastewater are compared with GSR-422 (E).

5.5.3.1 Ground Water Quality

Most of the villages in the project area have bore well and tube well facilities, as most of the residents of these villages make use of this water for agricultural and other domestic purposes. Therefore, three bore well samples have been considered for sampling.

The analysis of results indicates that the pH ranges in between 7.3 to 8.1, which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 809 to 3671 mg/l. The hardness was found to be exceeding the desirable limit of 300 mg/l at all the locations.

Fluorides are found to be within the permissible limit of 1.0 mg/l except at Nalliyampalayam village. Nitrates are found to be ranging in between 10 and 38.2 mg/l. Calcium is ranging between 220 mg/l and 816mg/l and exceeding the limit of 75 mg/l at all the locations. Bacteriological studies reveal that no coliform bacteria are present in the samples. The heavy metal content is either very low or below detectable limits (Table 5.5.2). Only during three (3) years since inception, the region has experienced acute draught condition and hence more ground water was used due to less availability of treated water for irrigation. This has resulted in increased levels of TDS and hardness in ground water due to leaching and recycling. After the implementation of MEP, the treated wastewater quality in terms of TDS and sodium and chlorides will improve because of steps outlined like oxygen delignification, bleaching and steps taken for spillage control as outlined in chapter 4. Further, the possibility of occurrence of acute draught condition for three consecutive years is remote and normal monsoon will result in better recharging of ground water, leading to better ground water quality.

C5-34 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The analysis of results of ground water samples collected in the month of January, 2008 indicates that the pH ranges in between 7.2 to 7.4, which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 1180 to 1510 mg/l. The hardness was found to be the exceeding the desirable limit of 300 mg/l at all the locations. Fluorides are found to be within the permissible limit of 1.0 mg/l. Nitrates are found to be ranging in between 1.9 to 29.7 mg/l. Calcium is ranging between 264 mg/l to 336 mg/l and exceeding the limit of 75 mg/l at all the locations. Bacteriological studies reveal that no coliform bacteria are present in the samples. The heavy metal content is either very low or below detectable limits (Table 5.5.2).

5.5.3.2 Surface Water Quality

The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges between 8.1 and 8.5, which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The TDS was observed to be between 221 to 452 mg/l, which is well within the permissible limit of 1500 mg/l. DO was observed in the range of 5.6 to 6.5 mg/l, BOD values were observed to be <3 mg/l.

The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in the range of 59.5 to 168.7 mg/l, and 82 to 137.5 mg/l respectively (Table 5.5.3).

The analysis results of Surface Water samples collected in the month of January 2008, indicate that the pH ranges between 7.5 and 7.6, which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The TDS was observed to be between 395 to 461 mg/l, which is well within the permissible limit of 1500 mg/l. DO was observed to be 5.8 mg/l, BOD values were observed to be <3 mg/l.

The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in the range of 118 to 164 mg/l, and 46.6 to 54.9 mg/l respectively (Table 5.5.3).

5.5.3.3 Treated Wastewater Quality

The analysis results indicate that the pH was found to be 7.4. The TSS and TDS values are observed as 47 mg/l and 1638 mg/l, which have been observed to be well within the permissible limits. The temperature of the treated wastewater is almost the same as ambient temperature.

BOD and COD values are about 2.8 and 130 mg/l respectively and are within the prescribed limits. The heavy metal content is found to be within the permissible limits of GSR- 422(E) Standards. Radioactive materials are absent. The treated wastewater from the WWTP is being utilised for agriculture.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-35 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The analysis results of Treated Wastewater samples collected in the month of January 2008 indicate a pH of 7.1. The TSS and TDS values are observed as 38 mg/l and 1427 mg/l, which have been observed to be well within the permissible limits. The temperature of the treated wastewater is almost the same as ambient temperature.

BOD and COD values are about 12.5 and 145.2 mg/l respectively and are within the prescribed limits. The heavy metal content is found to be within the permissible limits of GSR- 422(E) Standards. Radioactive materials are absent.

TABLE 5.5.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY

Note: $ Not Specified, UO : Unobjectionable

Parameters Unit As per IS Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter 10500 Monsoon Season, Monsoon season, Season Season, 2004-05 Season, 2005 (January, 2004 (Range ) 2005 (Range ) 2008 ) (Range ) (Range ) pH -- 6.5 – 8.5 7.3-8.1 7.5-8.1 7.4-8.1 7.2-8.0 7.2-7.4

Colour (Hazen Hazen 10 1-3 1-3 1-3 2-7 Units) 1-3 Odour -- UO UO UO UO UO UO Electrical µmho/ $ 792-8750 815-9790 947-9890 694-8105 4560-6280 Conductivity cm

Taste -- Agreeable Salty Salty Salty Salty Agreeable

Turbidity (NTU) NTU 5.0 1-3 <1-3 1-3 1-3 2-3

Total Dissolved mg/l 500[2000] 475-5250 489-5874 568-5934 416-4863 2830-3916 Solids

Hardness as mg/l 300 809-3671 908-3196 1313-3459 729-2966 1180-1510 CaCO 3

Calcium as Ca mg/l 75 237-780 280-705 395-816 220-708 264-336

Magnesium as mg/l 30 49-413 50-364 68-403 43-328 140.9-269.2 Mg Residual Free mg/l 0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 Chlorine

Chlorides as Cl mg/l 250 695-3190 745 - 2764 625-2872 593-3435 921-1581

Sulphate as SO 4 mg/l 200 227-764 396 - 843 335-832 266-711 133-223

Fluorides as F mg/l 1 0.29-1.1 0.39-0.91 0.49-0.92 0.31-0.92 0.3-0.96

Nitrates as NO 3 mg/l 45 10-38.2 6.8 -30.6 12.1-36 5.1-23.4 1.9-29.7

C5-36 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Parameters Unit As per IS Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter 10500 Monsoon Season, Monsoon season, Season Season, 2004-05 Season, 2005 (January, 2004 (Range ) 2005 (Range ) 2008 ) (Range ) (Range ) Phenolics as mg/l 0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 C6H5OH Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01 Nil Nil Nil Nil <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Arsenic as As mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05 0.01-0.02 <0.01-0.02 0.01-0.02 0.01 0.02-0.04

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 0.01-0.03 0.02 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.04 <0.01

Manganese as mg/l $ 0.01-0.07 <0.01-0.02 0.01-0.02 0.01 0.06-0.13 Mn Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3 0.2-0.5 0.04-0.32 0.04-0.42 0.2 0.09-0..2

Hexavalent mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.05 Chromium as Cr6+

Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/l 5 0.01-4.51 0.01-4.02 0.02-5.12 0.01-3.12 0.09-0.26 Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.1 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

E-Coli MPN/1 Should be Absent Absent Absent Absent 00ml Absent Total Coliform MPN/1 Should be Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 00ml Absent

Note: $ Not Specified, UO : Unobjectionable

TABLE 5.5.3 SURFACE WATER QUALITY

Parameter Unit IS: 2296 Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter Class C Monsoon Season Monsoon season Season Limits Season (Range ) Season (Range ) (January, (Range) (Range ) 2008 )

pH -- 6.5-8.5 8.1-8.5 8.2-8.4 8.2-8.3 8.2-8.3 7.5-7.6

Colour (Hazen Hazen 300 2-3 2-3 2-4 3-6 8-9 units)

Temperature oC $ 24.2-26.2 23.5-24.9 26.1-27.1 25.1-26.7 23.6-25.4

Electrical µmho/ $ 450-536 440-734 679-735 369-452 653-764 Conductivity cm

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-37 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Parameter Unit IS: 2296 Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter Class C Monsoon Season Monsoon season Season Limits Season (Range ) Season (Range ) (January, (Range) (Range ) 2008 )

Total Dissolved mg/l 1500 270-365 264-440 407-449 221-452 395-461 Solids

Total Hardness mg/l 300 136-202 157-206 200-230 134-155 224-228 as CaCO 3 Total Alkalinity mg/l $ 158-187 182-224 144-244 129-174 248 as CaCO 3 Calcium as Ca mg/l $ 30.2-56.1 39.2-48.1 39.8-49.2 29.8-37.6 57.6

Magnesium as mg/l $ 13.8-15.4 13.2-21.8 21.7-26.1 12.3-15.2 23.7-24.7 Mg Chlorides as Cl- mg/l 600 63.1-74.2 64.9-141.8 107.2- 59.5-72.4 118-164 168.7 Sulphates as mg/l 400 82-115.3 105.1- 128.5 - 69.5-91.5 46.6-54.9 SO4 136.4 137.5

Fluorides as F mg/l 1.5 0.39-0.52 0.45-0.57 0.48-0.62 0.37-0.44 0.3-0.7

Sodium as Na mg/l $ 34.5-42.2 35.8-48.2 49.5-65.2 31.5-36.4 113-120

Phenolic mg/l <0.01 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 compounds Oil & Grease mg/l 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

Cadmium mg/l $ <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/l 1.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.02-0.05

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/l 50 0.13-0.21 0.16-0.22 0.21-0.27 0.12-0.18 0.07-0.08

Zinc as Zn mg/l 15 0.01-0.04 0.01-0.03 0.02-0.04 0.01-0.03 0.10-0.11

Total coliform MPN/10 Should 20-40 24-42 22-46 42-71 21-24 organisms 0ml not exceed 5000 BOD mg/l 3 <3 <3 <3 <3 <3

Dissolved mg/l 4 6.1-6.4 5.6-6.1 5.1-5.5 5.7-6.3 5.8 Oxygen

C5-38 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 5.5.4 TREATED WASTEWATER QUALITY

Tolerance Limits as Treated Winter Season Parameters Unit per GSR-422(E) Wastewater (January, 2008 ) pH - 5.5-9.0 7.4 7.1

Shall not exceed 5°C Temperature oC above the receiving 29 28 water temp. All efforts should be Colour Pt-Co made to remove 175 163 color Electrical Conductivity µs/cm $ 2300 3720

Total Suspended Solids mg/l 100 (Max) 47 38

Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 2100 * 1638 1327

Sodium as Na mg/l $ 175 182 Sodium Absorption Ratio - $ 3.1 3.3 (SAR) Residual chlorine mg/l 1.0 (Max) Nil <0.2 Ammoniacal nitrogen (as N) mg/l 50.0 (Max) 6.2 8.2 Kjeldhal nitrogen mg/l 100.0 (Max) 14 17.4 (as N) Free ammonia (as NH3) mg/l 5.0 (Max) <0.1 0.1

BOD mg/l 30.0 (Max) 2.8 12.5

COD mg/l 250 (Max) 130 145.2

Arsenic as As mg/l 0.2 (Max) <0.01 <0.01 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l 0.01 (Max) <0.001 <0.001 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 2.0 (Max) <0.01 <0.001 Hexavalent Chromium as mg/l 0.1 (Max) <0.01 <0.01 Cr+6 Total chromium as Cr mg/l 2.0 (Max) <0.01 <0.01 Copper as Cu mg/l 3.0 (Max) <0.01 <0.01

Selenium as Se mg/l 0.05 (Max) <0.01 <0.01

Nickel as Ni mg/l 3.0 (Max) <0.01 <0.01 Iron as Fe mg/l 3.0 (Max) 0.09 0.12

Oil & grease mg/l 10.0 (Max) 1 4.0

* TDS as inorganic

5.6 Soil Characteristics

The baseline information on soils in the study area is essential to determine the impact of the MDP/MEP along with other associated activities for assessing the current impacts of industrialisation on the soil quality and the anticipated impacts in future after implementation of the MDP/MEP. Accordingly, the assessment of the soil quality has been carried out.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-39 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.6.1 Data Generation

For studying soil quality in the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil conditions in and around the existing plant area representing various land use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil upto a depth of 90 cm.

The present study of the soils establishes the baseline characteristics and this will help in future in identifying the incremental concentrations if any, due to the enhancement of capacity and allied operations.

The sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:

 To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area

 To determine the impact of industrialisation on soil characteristics

 To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural productivity point of view.

Ten locations within 10 km radius around the existing plant were selected for soil sampling. At each location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below the surface and homogenised. The homogenised samples were analysed for physical and chemical characteristics. Samples were taken four times during the study period covering various seasons.

The samples have been analysed as per the established scientific methods for physico-chemical parameters. The heavy metals have been analysed by using Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer and Inductive Coupled Plasma Analyser.

The details of the sampling locations are given in Table 5.6.1 and are depicted in Figure 5.6.1. The soil quality results for all the locations during various seasons are given in Table 5.6.2. The results are compared with standard classification given in Table 5.6.3. The detailed report on soil analysis results is given in Annex-3.

C5-40 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.6.1 SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-41 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.6.1 DETAILS OF SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Location Location Distance Bearing Present land Code from the wrt Mill use Mill site site S1 TNPL farmhouse (km) - - Plantation area S2 Tirukkattuturai village 4.0 N Agricultural land S3 Punjai tottakkurichi village 4.3 ENE Agricultural land S4 Nanjai idaiyar village 7.0 NE Agricultural land S5 Attur village 8.8 SE Agricultural land S6 Kuppam village 8.9 SW Plantation area S7 Ponniyakavundanpudur village 4.4 SSW Agricultural land S8 Vettamangalam village 5.0 WSW Agricultural land

S9 Moolimangalam village 2.2 SSE Plantation area S10 Nalliyampalayam village 1.6 SE Agricultural land

TABLE 5.6.2 (A) SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Sl. Para- Unit Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter No. meters Monsoon Season, Monsoon season, Season Season, 2004- Season, 2005 (January, 2004 2005 2005 (Range ) 2008 ) (Range ) (Range ) (Range ) 1 Colour -- Light Brown- Brown-Black Light Brown- Brown-Black Brown- Black Black Black

2 Type of Soil # -- Sandy clay- Sand loam- Sand loam- Sand loam- Sand clay- Clay loam Clay loam Clay loam Clay Loam clay

3 Sand % 28-72 36-69 29-68 32-71 24-52 Silt % 10-30 12-32 12-42 14-37 8-26 Clay % 16-38 4-38 11-36 7-38 36-60 4 Bulk Density gm/ 1.18-1.64 1.11-1.46 1.21-1.49 1.13-1.42 1.1-1.3 cc 5 pH (1:5) - 7.4-8.6 7.9-8.2 7.7-8.4 7.5-8.4 7.1-8.3 6 Electrical µmho/ 164-365 163-514 167-414 208-479 260-572 Conductivity cm

7 Calcium mg/kg 638-4682 496-3672 743-4142 624-4143 1080-3397 as Ca 8 Magnesium mg/kg 94-903.4 129-1248.1 118-826.4 86-918.5 201-3580 as Mg 9 Sodium mg/kg 72.9-454 92.2-549.5 67.3-423.2 86.2-398.5 46-580 as Na

C5-42 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl. Para- Unit Post Winter Pre Monsoon Winter No. meters Monsoon Season, Monsoon season, Season Season, 2004- Season, 2005 (January, 2004 2005 2005 (Range ) 2008 ) (Range ) (Range ) (Range ) 10 Potassium kg/ha 42.9-217.2 34.6-354.8 29.8-320.8 40.7-264.6 95-1535 as K

11 Phosphorous kg/ha 26.8-59.2 29.1-73.4 16.8-72.4 32.4-67.2 97.9-476 as PO 4

12 Available N kg/ha 6.0-55.0 22.4-61.5 14.2-43.8 11.7-62.2 46.9-109

13 Organic % 0.08-1.06 0.12-0.91 0.06-0.86 0.10-0.37 0.4-1.02 Carbon 14 Organic % 0.15-1.83 0.21-1.57 0.10-1.48 0.17-1.75 0.23-0.53 Matter 15 Sulphate mg/kg 11.4-178.5 42.8-267.5 23.7-175.2 28.4-224.1 24.7-61.2 as SO 4 16 Chlorides mg/kg 105.4-283.9 242.6-370.4 112.5-312.5 164.1-340.0 124-354 as Cl - 17 Zinc as Zn mg/kg 12.4-14.7 17.2-23.7 11.6-31.7 11.2-21.8 12.4-16.2

18 Nickel as Ni mg/kg 12.3-29.5 12.1-41.8 7.4-34.5 12.1-31.5 12.3-29.5

19 Aluminum % 0.4-0.94 0.7-1.4 0.8-1.1 0.6-1.1 0.4-0.94 as Al 20 Copper mg/kg 47.7-201.1 39.5-137.5 32.7-164.2 40.7-118.5 47.7-102.5

21 Iron as Fe % 1.0-1.7 1.2-2.3 0.9-1.9 1.0-2.1 1.2-1.7

22 Total % 0.090-0.005 0.009-0.022 0.005-0.08 0.006-0.019 0.008-0.019 Nitrogen 23 Sodium - 0.1-0.7 0.11-1.42 0.08-0.92 0.09-0.94 0.1-0.56 absorption ratio*

5.6.2 Baseline Soil Status

Soil colour is observed to be varying between ‘black’ to ‘brown’. The texture is observed to be predominantly clayey, which is a typical feature of ‘Delta plains’. The pH indicates that the soils in the study area are moderately alkaline in nature, with the pH varying in the range of 7.4 to 8.4. The bulk density is in the range of 1.18 to 1.64 gm/cc. The Electrical Conductivity was observed to be in the range of 163-514 µS/cm.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-43 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The Nitrogen values are in the range of 6-92.4 kg/ha indicating that soils have very less to less Nitrogen levels. The Phosphorous values are in the range of 16.8-86.2 kg/ha indicating that soils have less to more than sufficient Phosphorous levels. The Potassium values range between 29.8- 320.8 kg/ha, which indicate that the soils have very less to better quantity of Potassium. The Organic Carbon (%) values range between 0.06-1.06 percent, which indicate that the soils have very less to sufficient percentage of Organic Carbon. The soil from the study area shows that they are moderately fertile.

The analysis of Soil samples collected in the month of January 2008, the Soil colour is observed to be varying between ‘blackish’ to ‘brownish’. The texture is observed to be predominantly clayey, which is a typical feature of ‘Delta plains’. The pH indicates that the soils in the study area are moderately alkaline in nature, with the pH varying in the range of 7.1 to 8.3. The bulk density is in the range of 1.1 to 1.3 gm/cc. The Electrical Conductivity was observed to be in the range of 260-572 µS/cm.

The Nitrogen values are in the range of 46.9-109 kg/ha indicating that soils have very less to good Nitrogen levels. The Phosphorous values are in the range of 95-1535 kg/ha indicating that soils have more than sufficient Phosphorous levels. The Potassium values range between 125.3-136.2 kg/ha, which indicate that the soils have less quantity of Potassium. The Organic Carbon (%) values range between 0.23-0.53 percent, which indicate that the soils have less to on an average sufficient percentage of Organic Carbon. The soil from the study area shows that they are moderately fertile.

The following standard soil classification is used as the guidelines for assessing soil status.

TABLE 5.6.3 STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

S No. Soil Test Classification 1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic 4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic 5.01-5.50 Slightly acidic 5 5.51 -6.00 moderately acidic 6.01-6.50 slightly acidic 6.51-7.30 Neutral 7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline 7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline 8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline > 9.01 very strongly alkaline

C5-44 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

S No. Soil Test Classification 2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity (µmhos/cm) Upto 1.00 Average (640 µmho/cm = 1 ppm) 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts) 3 Organic Carbon (%) Upto 0.2: very less 0.21-0.4: less 0.41-0.5 medium, 0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient 0.81-1.00: sufficient >1.0 more than sufficient 4 Nitrogen (kg/ha) Upto 50 very less 51-100 less 101-150 good 151-300 Better >300 sufficient 5 Phosphorus (kg/ha) Upto 15 very less 16-30 less 31-50 medium, 51-65 on an average sufficient 66-80 sufficient >80 more than sufficient 6 Potash (kg/ha) 0 -120 very less 120-180 less 181-240 medium 241-300 average 301-360 better >360 more than sufficient

5.7 Noise Level Survey

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise, in general, is sound which is composed of many frequency components of various types of loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of an average human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and universally accepted scale is the ‘A’ weighted Scale which is measured as dB (A). This is more suitable for audible range of 20 to 20,000 Hz. The scale has been designed to weigh various components of noise according to the response of a human ear. The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-45 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously varying in loudness

 The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance

 The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The environmental impact assessment of noise from the plant operations and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, annoyance and general community responses.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated after implementation of the proposed MDP/MEP.

5.7.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major noise generating sources in the area. Noise levels at different noise generating sources have been identified based on the activities in the village area and ambient noise due to traffic.

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at ten (10) locations including four (4) locations within the plant complex and six (6) locations outside the complex in the study area. The noise levels at each of the locations were recorded for 24 hours. The environmental settings of noise monitoring locations within the plant site as well as outside the plant site are given in Table 5.7.1 and depicted in Figure 5.7.1.

C5-46 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 5.7.1 DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Sl Locations Distance Direction Details of the Surroundings No from the w.r.t. Mill plant Site site (km) 1 TNPL Colony Plant site Predominantly residential zone surrounded by paper mill. 2 Nalliyampalayam 1.6 SE Predominantly rural residential zone Village surrounded by agricultural fields. Normal movements of automobiles consisting of light vehicles on the adjacent road. 3 Valayakkaranpudur 4.8 SE Predominantly rural residential zone surrounded by agricultural fields. Rare Village movements of automobiles on the adjacent road. 4 Maravapalayam 4.3 W Predominantly rural residential zone surrounded by agricultural fields. Normal Village movements of automobiles consisting of light vehicles on the adjacent road. 5 Velur village 6.4 NNE Predominantly semi urban and commercial area. Normal movements of automobiles on the State Highway. 6 Kuppam village 9.0 SW Predominantly residential zone. Intermittent movements of light motor vehicles. 7 Winder Area, TNPL Plant site Predominantly industrial activities associated with transportation through heavy-duty vehicles. 8 Chipper House, Plant site Predominantly industrial activities TNPL associated with transportation through heavy-duty vehicles. 9 Boiler House, Plant site Predominantly industrial activities TNPL associated with transportation through heavy-duty vehicles. 10 Paper Machine Plant site Predominantly industrial activities Area, TNPL associated with transportation.

5.7.2 Method of Monitoring

Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the locations covered in 10-km radius of the study area. The noise levels were measured twice during the study period.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-47 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.7.3 Types of Sound Fields

5.7.3.1 Free Field

Free progressive sound waves have been described as sound waves that propagate without obstruction from source to the receiver. In the case of spherical waves, the inverse square law holds good so that the sound pressure level decreases by 6 dB(A) as the distance is doubled. Such a field is known as free field.

5.7.3.2 Near Field

The near field is defined as that region close to the source where the inverse square law does not apply. Usually, this region is located within a few wavelengths of the source and it is also controlled by the dimensions of the source.

C5-48 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.7.1 NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-49 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.7.3.3 Far Field

The far field consists of two parts, the free part and the reverberation part. In the free part of the far field, the sound pressure level obeys the inverse square law.

The reverberant part of the field exists for enclosed situation where the reflected sound waves are superimposed on the incident sound waves. If there are many reflected waves from all possible direction, a diffuse sound field exists.

5.7.4 Parameters Measured During Monitoring

For noise levels measured over a given period of time, it is possible to describe important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated using the percent of the time certain noise levels exceed the time interval. The notations for the statistical quantities of noise levels are described below:

 L10 is the noise level exceeded 10 per cent of the time

 L50 is the noise level exceeded 50 per cent of the time and

 L90 is the noise level exceeded 90 per cent of the time

Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (L eq )

The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same sound energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is necessary because sound from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given period of time.

This is calculated from the following equation:

2 (L 10 - L 90 ) Leq = L 50 + ------60

Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during day (6 am to 10 pm).

Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during night (10 pm to 6 am).

A noise rating developed by E P A for specification of community noise from

all the sources is the Day-Night Sound Level, (L dn ).

C5-50 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Day-Night Sound Level (L dn )

The noise rating developed for community noise from all sources is the

Day-Night Sound Level (L dn ). It is similar to a 24-hr equivalent sound level except that during night time period (10 pm to 6 am) a 10 dB (A) weighing penalty is added to the instantaneous sound level before computing the 24-hr average.

This night time penalty is added to account for the fact that the noise during night, when people are usually in sleep, is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the day time.

The L dn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the

hourly L eq 's, by the following equation.

Ld/10 (Ln+10)/10 Ldn = 10 log {1/24[16(10 ) + 8 (10 )]}

where L d is the equivalent sound level during the day time (6 am to 10 pm)

and L n is the equivalent sound level during the night time (10 pm to 6 am).

5.7.5 Presentation of Results

The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at all of the

locations for each season. The parameters are analysed for L 10 , L 50 , L 90 , L eq ,

Lday, L night , and L dn . The statistical analysis of results is given in Table 5.7.2. and Table 5.7.3.

5.7.6 Observations

Day time Noise Levels (L day )

Residential zone

The daytime noise levels at the residential locations are found to be ranging in between 45.8 and 54.7 dB (A). The maximum value of 54.7 dB (A) was recorded at TNPL Colony area and the minimum value of 45.8 dB (A) was recorded at Kuppam village. The daytime noise levels are found to be well within the 55 dB (A) level, which is the standard specified limit.

Commercial zone

The daytime noise levels at the Velur market area are found in the range of 63.6 to 67.5 dB (A). The daytime noise level at this location is found to marginally exceed the standard specified for commercial area, viz. 65 dB (A). This may be due to the traffic flow along the highway.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-51 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Industrial zone

The daytime noise levels at the industrial zone found ranging in between 69.6 and 73.1 dB (A). The maximum noise level of 73.1 dB (A) was observed at Chipper house area, which is within the prescribed limit of 75 dB (A) for industrial zone.

Night time Noise Levels (L night )

Residential zone

The nighttime noise levels at the residential locations range in between 42.1 and 44.4 dB (A). The maximum value of 44.4 dB (A) was recorded at Nalliyampalayam village and the minimum value of 42.1 dB (A) was recorded at Kuppam village. The nighttime noise levels at all the locations are found within the prescribed limit of 45 dB (A).

Commercial zone

The nighttime noise levels at the Velur market area are found in the range of 48.9 to 53.6 dB (A). The noise level is found to be within the standard prescribed limit of 55 dB (A) for commercial zone.

Industrial zone

The nighttime noise levels at the industrial zone range between 59.6 and 62.9 dB (A). The maximum noise level of 62.9 dB (A) was observed at Boiler house of the TNPL, which is within the prescribed limit of 65 dB (A).

5.7.7 Observations (January 2008)

Day time Noise Levels (L day )

Residential zone

The daytime noise levels at the residential locations are found to be ranging in between 45.8 and 54.7 dB (A). The maximum value of 54.7 dB (A) was recorded at TNPL Colony area and the minimum value of 45.8 dB (A) was recorded at Kuppam village. The daytime noise levels are found to be well within the 55 dB (A) level, which is the standard specified limit.

Commercial zone

The daytime noise levels at the Velur market area are found in the range of 63.6 to 67.5 dB (A). The daytime noise level at this location is found to marginally exceed the standard specified for commercial area, viz. 65 dB (A). This may be due to the traffic flow along the highway.

C5-52 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Industrial zone

The daytime noise levels at the industrial zone found ranging in between 69.6 and 73.1 dB (A). The maximum noise level of 73.1 dB (A) was observed at Chipper house area, which is within the prescribed limit of 75 dB (A) for industrial zone.

Night time Noise Levels (L night )

Residential zone

The nighttime noise levels at the residential locations range in between 42.1 and 44.4 dB (A). The maximum value of 44.4 dB (A) was recorded at Nalliyampalayam village and the minimum value of 42.1 dB (A) was recorded at Kuppam village. The nighttime noise levels at all the locations are found within the prescribed limit of 45 dB (A).

Commercial zone

The nighttime noise levels at the Velur market area are found in the range of 48.9 to 53.6 dB (A). The noise level is found to be within the standard prescribed limit of 55 dB (A) for commercial zone.

Industrial zone

TABLE 5.7.2 AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS -OCTOBER 2004 (LOCATIONS WITHIN THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn

Winder, TNPL 80.6 61.1 58.7 69.1 71.3 59.6 70.7

Chipper House, TNPL 81.8 63.2 60.4 70.8 72.1 61.8 72.0

Boiler House, TNPL 80.5 63.6 60.8 70.1 71.8 62.9 72.2

Paper Machine, TNPL 78.4 61.1 58.9 67.4 69.6 60.3 69.9

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-53 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS –OCTOBER 2004 (LOCATIONS OUTSIDE THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn TNPL Colony 60.5 47.6 42.6 52.9 54.7 43.9 54.4 Nalliyampalayam Village 59.6 48.9 43.6 53.2 54.1 44.4 54.2 Valayakkaranpudur 48.2 44.6 41.5 45.3 46.9 43.4 50.5 Maravapalayam 53.5 44.8 41.8 47.1 49.8 43.1 51.3 Velur village 68.9 61.2 51.6 66.2 67.5 53.6 66.4 Kuppam village 46.9 42.8 40.1 43.6 45.8 42.1 49.3

TABLE 5.7.3 AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS –MAY 2005 (LOCATIONS WITHIN THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn

Winder, TNPL 80.2 65.2 58.3 73.2 74.6 60.1 73.4

Chipper House, TNPL 81.9 64.4 60.6 72.0 73.1 62.3 72.8

Boiler House, TNPL 80.4 68.1 60.8 74.5 72.5 61.8 72.3

Paper Machine, TNPL 79.1 66.9 59.2 73.5 70.6 60.6 70.6

AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS –MAY 2005 (LOCATIONS OUTSIDE THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn TNPL Colony 59.2 50.1 43.9 54.0 54.6 44.1 54.4 Nalliyampalayam Village 57.5 51.6 44.6 54.4 53.8 43.8 53.8 Valayakkaranpudur 45.2 42.8 39.2 43.4 53.2 43.2 53.2 Maravapalayam 54.4 48 42.7 50.3 52.8 42.6 52.7 Velur village 65.3 59.1 51.4 62.3 63.6 48.9 62.4 Kuppam village 46.2 44.2 42.6 44.4 50.5 43.0 51.6

C5-54 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 5.7.4 AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS – JANUARY 2008 (LOCATIONS WITHIN THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn Winder, TNPL 82.3 67 56.2 75.1 74.2 61.1 74.1 Chipper House, TNPL 78.4 65.1 61.4 74.3 71.8 60.7 71.4

Boiler House, TNPL 81.5 67.2 59.8 72.6 74.8 63.2 73.5 Paper Machine, TNPL 78.5 64.3 59.4 71.8 72.4 61.4 68.4

AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS – JANUARY 2008 (LOCATIONS OUTSIDE THE PLANT SITE)

Location Average Noise Levels in dB(A)

L10 L50 L90 Leq Ld Ln Ldn TNPL Colony 60.7 51.2 45.2 52.4 52.3 45.3 52.1 Nalliyampalayam Village 59.4 50.8 44.1 51.2 51.6 41.7 52.4 Valayakkaranpudur 48.3 43.6 41.2 45.8 54.8 42.1 51.7 Maravapalayam 52.3 46.8 43.1 48.9 51.4 41.3 51.6 Velur village 64.1 57.2 50.8 60.1 62.1 45.2 60.4 Kuppam village 44.7 43.5 46.2 47.2 50.4 42.7 50.4

5.8 Ecological Studies

5.8.1 Introduction

A natural ecosystem is a structural and functional unit of nature. It has components, which exist in harmony and survive by interdependence. An ecosystem has self-sustaining ability and controls the number of organisms at any level by cybernetic rules. The effect of this is that an ecosystem does not become imbalanced.

The main objective of the ecological survey is aimed to assess the existing flora and faunal components in the study area.

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to listing of species and assessment of the existing baseline ecological (terrestrial and aquatic ecosystem) conditions in the study area. Considering the rich bio-diversity of organisms and their role in productivity and their importance in human livelihood, it is vital to protect and safeguard these dynamic ecosystems.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-55 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.8.2 Objectives of Ecological Studies

 The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:

 To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project site

 To assess the distribution of animal life spectra

 To understand the productivity of the water bodies

 To assess the biodiversity and to understand the resource potential, and

 To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds.

5.8.3 Methodology adopted for the Survey

To achieve the above objectives, a detailed study of the area was undertaken within 10 km radius area with the existing paper mill as its centre. The different methods adopted were as follows:

 Compilation of secondary data with respect to the study area from published literature and Government agencies

 Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the area

 Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plants, animals and their uses

 Gathering data for ethnobiology.

The review of published secondary data and the results of field sampling conducted during 2004 – 2005 is presented below.

5.8.4 Review of Secondary Published Data

Karur district comprises four taluks and eight panchayat unions. The four taluks are spread over in 203 revenue villages covering an extent of 289557 hectares of land. In this district, the total extent of forest wealth is 6187 hectares, which represent only 2.1% of the total geographical extent.

C5-56 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The types of forests in this district are

1. Tropical dry deciduous forests 2. Dry mixed deciduous forests 3. Dry evergreen forests 4. Sub-tropical hill forests

The details of forest land are presented in Table 5.8.1.

TABLE- 5.8.1 DETAILS OF FOREST LAND IN KARUR DISTRICT

Sl. No. Taluks Extent (ha) % to total 1 Aravakurichi 294 4.75 2 Karur 18 0.29 3 Krishnarayapuram 152 2.46 4 Kulithalai 5723 92.50 Total 6187 100.00 Source : District census hand book, Karur

Out of the total forest extent of 6187 hectares, Kulithalai taluk alone occupies 5723 (92.50%) hectares. In this district, afforestation measures must be taken up, which will help prevent the sedimentation in rivers and floods and to preserve the fertile soils from erosion. The common plant species are presented in Table 5.8.2.

TABLE 5.8.2 COMMON PLANT SPECIES FROM (FROM RECORDS OF FOREST DEPARTMENT)

Sl. No. Botanical Name Local Name 1 Abrus precatorius Kundumani 2 Abutilon indicum Thuthi 3 Acacia nilotica Karuvelam 4 Acacia conciana Siakakay 5 Acacia ferruginea Parambi 6 Acacia intsia Indu 7 Acacia latrorum Anaimullu 8 Acacia leucophloe Velavelan 9 Acacia planifrons Kodaivelan 10 Acaia pennta Velaiindu 11 Acacia polycantha Othaali 12 Acacia sundra 13 Acalypha fruticosa Seeni 14 Aerocarpus fraxinifolius Maalan konnai 15 Acronchia pendulata Vidukanalai 16 Achyranthes aspera Nayuruvi 17 Actinodaphne angustifolia Thali 18 Adathoda zeylanica Adathodai 19 Adina cordifolia Manja kadambai

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-57 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl. No. Botanical Name Local Name 20 Aegeratum conyzoides Kattu samanthai 21 Aegle marmelos Vilvam 22 Aerva lanata Poolai 23 Agave Americana Kathalai 24 Aglaia elaegnoidea Chokla 25 Agrostachys longifolia Manukulukkai 26 Ailanthes excelsa Peemaram 27 Ailanthes triphysa Mattipal 28 Alangium sacrifolium Aungi 29 Albizzia amara Unjal 30 Albizzia lebbeck Vagai 31 Albizzia odorattissima Selavagai 32 Allophyllus cobbe Perakudukkai 33 Alstonia scholaris Elelaipalai 34 Anacardium occidentale Munthri 35 Albizzia procera Velvegai 36 Annona squamosa Seethaphalam 37 Antiaris toxicaria Maruri 38 Antidesma diandrum Asariphuli 39 Arega wightii Alampanai 40 Aristolochia roxyburghiana Garudakodai 41 Artocarpus heterophyllus Pila 42 Asparagus recemosus Thanuthukodi 43 Atalantia monophyla Kattulemachai 44 Atylosia trinervia Kaattuthovaria 45 Azadirachta indica Vembu 46 Azanza lampas - 47 Barringtonia acutangula Kadappay 48 Bauhinia malabarica Mantahrai 49 Bauhinia purpuria Mantharai 50 Bauhinia recemosa Athi 51 Bauhinia vauhilli Kattumantharai 52 Bischofia javanica Cholavengai 53 Boerhaevia diffusa Satarani 54 Borassus flabellifera Panaimaram 55 Bombax insigne Poolai 56 Bombax ceiba Poolai 57 Boswellia serrata Kungellium 58 Buchanania lanzan Saraiparupu 59 Bridelaia squamosa Mulvengai 60 Butea parviflora Eottavaraikodi 61 Caesalpinia bonduc Kalichikai 62 Caesalpinia mimosoides Pulinakkikonrai 63 Calamus sp Vettilaipettai 64 Catharanthes pusilli - 65 Calophytum elatum Kattupunnai 66 Calophytum inophyum Punnia 67 Calotropis gigantia Erruku 68 Calycopteris floribunda Pilani 69 Canarium strictum Karunigillum 70 Canthium dicoccum Nekkani 71 Canthium parviflorum Karai 72 Capparis dicidua - 73 Capparis zeylanica Athondai

C5-58 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl. No. Botanical Name Local Name 74 Carallia brachiata Andimirium 75 Careya arborea Kolamavu 76 Carissa carandus Kilakkai 77 Caryota urens Koonthal 78 Cassia auriculata Avaram 79 Cassia fistula Konnai 80 Cassia montana Malayavaram 81 Cassia tora Thagai 82 Cassia siamia Manjukonnia 83 Casuarina equisitefolia Chavuku 84 Chloroxylon sweitenia Porasu 85 Chomellia asiatica Pavattai 86 Chakrusia tabularis Vadivembu 87 Chlosophylum roxburghii Kattuluppai 88 Cinnamomum zeylanicum Avangam 89 Cinnamomum sulphuratum - 90 Cipadessa baccifera Savattuchedi 91 Cissus quadrangularis Perandai 92 Cleistanthes collinus Oduvum 93 Clematis sp Kakkakal 94 Cleredendron viscosum Vettakkani 95 Clitoria ternatea Sankupushpam 96 Combretum ovalifolium Odaikodi 97 Commiphora wightii Pachikiluvai 98 Cordia dichotoma Naruvilli 99 Curcuma angustifolia Kattukuvai 100 Curcuma longa Manjal 101 Cycas circinalis Kodicham 102 Cyperus torundus Korai 103 Dalbergia latifolia Itti 104 Dalbergia paniculata Porapachalai 105 Dalbergia sisso Sissoo 106 Datura metal Vallomathu 107 Delonix regia Mayarkonnai 108 Derris sp Yennaikekodai 109 Derris scandens Yennaikekodai 110 Diospyros melanoxylon Thumbai 111 Dodonea viscosavirali Virali 112 Entada phaseolaris Cillu 113 Erythrina variegata Murukku 114 Erythrina suberosa Mulmurukku 115 Erythroxylon monogynum Sebulicham 116 Eucalyptus tereticornis Nilagirimaram 117 Euphorbia antiquorum Kalli 118 Euphorbia longana Shempuvam 119 Euphorbia tirucalli Tirucalli 120 Feronia limonia Ilamaram 121 Ficus benghalensis Alamaram 122 Ficus hispida Choonathai 123 Ficus recemosa Athi 124 Falacourtgia indica Kattukakkala 125 Flacourtia jungomas Mullumukanchi 126 Flemengia sp -- 127 Gardenia turgida Dekkamanthi

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-59 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl. No. Botanical Name Local Name 128 Garuga pinnta Aranelli 129 Gloriosa superba Kalappaikuzungu 130 Gmelina arborea Kumil 131 Grewia subinaqalis Vellakumil 132 Grewia asiatica Palica 133 Grewia hirsuta Thavidu 134 Grewia glabra Anaikattimaram 135 Grewia tiliafolia Thadusu 136 Gymnema montana Magnikighinku 137 Hardwickia binata Achan 138 Helictris isora Valamburi 139 Hemidiscus indicus Nannari 140 Ixora arborea Sulnadu 141 Kydia calcina Vennadi 142 Lagerstromia parviflora Penruthu 143 Lagerstromia lanceolata Vithiku 144 Nerium indicum Anil 145 Ociumum klamanjicarium Kaputhulasi 146 Olea diocea Idli 147 Opuntia elator Sapthakali 148 Oroxylum indicum Palagani 149 Pallaquilum ellipticum Pali 150 Pandanus furcatus Therai 151 Parkinsonia aculeata Karungumurai 152 Pavetta indica Pauttai 153 Pavonia zeylanica Karundoti 154 Phoenix acaulis Sirumachi 155 Phoenix sylvestrix Eachalam 156 Pichocolobium dulce Kompuli 157 Piper longum Thippi 158 Polyalthia serasoides Nemulingum 159 Polyalhtia longifolia Nemulingum 160 Premna integrefolia Minni 161 Prosopis julifera Semavuvanni 162 Pteroscarpus maruspium Vegai 163 Randia dumetorum Kalai 164 Rhododendron arboreum Poola 165 Rhus mysorensis Poola 166 Salvodora persiaca Kumani 167 Samanea saman Thungamunjimarama 168 Santalumalbum Santhanam 169 Sesbania bispinosa - 170 Solanum pubescens Sundai 171 Solanumm trilobatum Sunnakkai 172 Spondias pinnata Mampulichii 173 Sapindus emerginatus Poochakottai 174 Semicarpus anacardium Henkottai 175 Strobilanthes sp Kurunji 176 Strycnos nuxvomica Etti 177 Strebulus asper Kuttipila 178 Strycnos potatarum Thenthamkottai 179 Sygygium cumini Navalmaram 180 Tamarindus indica Puliyamaram 181 Toona ciliata Madagiri vembu

C5-60 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl. No. Botanical Name Local Name 182 Tremna orientalis Ambaruthi 183 Tectona grandis Thekku 184 Tephrosia purpuria Kolinji 185 Thevetia peruviana Theruvichipoo 186 Terminalia arjuna Neermathi 187 Terminalia bellerica Thanni 189 Terminalia chebula Kadukkai 190 Terminalia paniculata Karumaruthi 191 Terminalia crenulata Karumaruthu 192 Thespesia lampas Poovarusu 193 Toddelaia asiatica Kattumilagu 194 Toona ciliata Madagiri vembu 195 Vateveria indica Indirajam 196 Ventilago madrasapatana Vembanda 197 Vitex negundo Noochi 198 Vsicum sp Ottu 199 Wrightia tinctoria Palai 200 Zingiber casumunasr Katatumunja 201 Zizyphus glabrata Karivattan 202 Zizyphus mauritaiana Elandai 203 Zizyphus oenophjila Chirimullu 204 Zizyphus xylophus Kotatai elandai 205 Aristida depressa Oosipullu 206 Arstida hystrix Oosipullu 207 Bambusa bamboos Perumungil 208 Botrichloa persuta Chinnakaraipullu 209 Brachia distachia Murugullu pullu 210 Brachiora remotai Puliyam pullu 211 Cenchrus ciliaris Kolikattiapullu 212 Chloris roxburgiana - 213 Chrysopogon fulvus Solapullu 214 Cymbopogon citratus Tharbapullu 215 Cynodon dactylon Aragam pullu 216 Digitaria adscenedens Arisipullu 217 Dendrocalamus strictus Kalamungil 218 Heteropogon contortus Oosipullu 219 Panicum trypheron - 220 Setataria pallidifusca Korai pullu 221 Tragus biflorus Ottupullu Source: Forest Working Plan, Thiruchirapalli

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C5-61 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE-5.8.3 DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Location Distance Direction Environmental ( in km) setting

TE-1 Maravapalayam village 4.3 WNW Upwind

TE-2 Nalliyapalayam village 1.6 SSE Downwind

TE-3 Valayakkaranpudur 4.8 SSE Downwind

5.8.4.1 Reserve Forest areas in Study Area

As per the Forest records, there are no forest blocks or forest areas in 10-km radius from existing plant site.

5.8.4.2 Wildlife Sanctuaries and National Parks

As per literature survey and forest working plan of Karur, no Wildlife Sanctuaries and National parks or Biospheres exist in 25-km radius.

5.8.5 Primary Survey

5.8.5.1 Phytosociological Studies

A preliminary survey was made and three locations were selected for detailed study within 10-km radius of the existing plant. The selected locations are given in Table-5.8.3 and depicted in Figure-5.8.1.

TABLE-5.8.3 DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

LOCATION DISTANCE DIRECTION ENVIRONMENT AL SETTING (IN KM) TE-1 Maravapalayam village 4.3 WNW Upwind TE-2 Nalliyapalayam village 1.6 SSE Downwind TE-3 Valayakkaranpudur 4.8 SSE Downwind

The primary data was generated through:

1. Preparing a general checklist of all plants encountered in the study area. This would indicate the biodiversity for wild and cultivated plants. The plants so encountered were classified into life form spectrum according to the classification of Raunkiaer's classification of life form spectrum.

C5-62 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

2. Phytosociological studies by using list count quadrate method for woody and herbaceous flora in forest areas and only herbaceous flora in ambient air quality monitoring locations. Sufficient number of quadrates of 100 m 2 size was adopted for study, which is based on the area species curve. The number of quadrates depended on actual field requirements.

3. Estimating basal areas of trees and shrubs at breast height [132 cm from ground or above buttresses].

4. Herbaceous and woody flora was studied by taking 20 quadrates at each location having 100 m 2.

5. Determining frequency, abundance, relative frequency, relative density, relative dominance and importance value indices using Mueller-Dombois-Ellenberge theory [1974].

6. Determining the bird population of migratory and local birds by taking 10 random readings at every location.

7. Observing mammals, amphibians and reptiles, noting their calls, droppings, burrows, pugmarks and other signs.

8. Physical observations were also carried out from the machines for two-twelve hour periods, one during day time and the other during night time for terrestrial fauna.

9. Local inhabitants were interviewed for uses of plants and animals and to get ethnobiological data.

Plot Quadrate Method

This technique is used only when a part of a large area is sampled, on the basis of which the total population of species in the area can be estimated.

Shape and size of Quadrates

Shape and size of the quadrates are selected, derived from previous experience. Plot quadrate method was adopted to evaluate phyto-sociological parameters like density, diversity and the frequency of the plants. The size of the quadrate was selected based on the species area curve method and from past experience. For the present ecological survey, 10m x 10m plots were selected for vegetation pattern. About 20 quadrates were studied at each location depending upon the species diversity. The findings are presented in the following sections.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-63 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Near Village Maravapalayam

In this sampling location, about 36 species were recorded in the quadrates studied (Table-1 of Annex 4. Among the species identified, Azadirachta indica, Tamarindus indica, Acacia arabica, Albizia amara and Sesbania sp are observed to be dominant on the basis of relative basal area in the studied populations. The relative density among all the species was observed to be between 0.06% and 14.44%. Accordingly, species viz. Caasia occidentalis (14.44%) Tephrosia purpuriai (7.22%) , Croton bonplandinum (6.94%), Parthenium hystarophorus (6.94%) and achyranthes asperai (6.25%) recorded the highest relative densities in studied vegetation. The relative frequency among all the species was observed to be between 0.60% and 4.17%. The highest relative frequency was observed for Tephrosia purpuria (4.17%) Solanum xanthocarpum (4.17%), Sida acuta (4.17%) and parthenium hystreophorus (4.17%) and the lowest relative frequency for Ceiba pentandra (0.60%), Millingtonia haratensis (0.60%) and Delonix regia (0.60%) in the studied populations respectively. The Importance Value Index (IVI) estimated for all the species varied between 0.65 and 23.17 in the studied populations. The highest IVI was observed for Cassia occidentalis (23.17), and the lowest IVI was observed for Ceiba pentandra (0.65).

Near Village Nalliyampalayam

In this sampling location, about 31 species were recorded in the quadrates studied (Table-2 of Annex 4). Among the species identified, Terminalia tomentosa, Euphorbia nivula Azadirachta indica, Pongamia glabra are observed to be dominant on the basis of relative basal area in the studied population. The relative density among all the species was observed to be between 0.08% and 10.38%. Accordingly, species viz. Achyrantehs asperai(10.38%), Physalis minima (7.20%) Mimosa pudica (6.95%), and Tephrosia purpuria (6.95%) recorded the highest relative densities in the studied populations. The relative frequency among all the species was observed to be between 0.60% and 4.22%. The highest relative frequency was observed for Mimosa pudica (4.22%), zizyphus sp (4.22%), Achyranthes aspera (4.22%), Amaranthes viridis (4.22%) and Linderbergia sp (4.22%) and the lowest relative frequency for Agave america (0.60%) and Sesbania sp. in the studied populations respectively. The Importance Value Index estimated for all the species varied between 0.68 and 27.729 in the studied populations. The highest IVI was observed for Terminalia tomentosa (27.72) and the lowest IVI was observed for Agave Americana (0.68).

C5-64 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Near Village Valayakkaranpudur

In this sampling location, about 34 species were recorded in the quadrates studied (Table-3 of Annex 4). Among the species identified, Terminalia tomentosa, Azadirachta indica, Tamarindus indica and Sesbania sp are observed to be dominant on the basis of relative basal area in the studied populations. The relative density among all the species was observed to be between 0.08% and 7.91%. Accordingly, species viz., Achyranthes aspera (8.83%), Parthenium hysterophorus (7.91%), Crotaon bonplandinum (6.70%), Oldenlandia umbellta (6.32%) and Tephrosia purpuria (6.16%) recorded highest relative densities in the studied vegetation. The relative frequency among all the species was observed to be between 0.65% and 4.52%. The highest relative frequency was observed for Barleria prionoites (4.52%), Crotallaria juncea (4.52%), Croton bonplandinum (4.52%), Jatropha sp (4.52%) and Tephrosia purpuria (4.52%) and the lowest relative frequency for Terminalia tomentosa (0.65%) in the studied populations respectively. The Importance Value Index estimated for all the species varied between 1.98 and 16.15 in the studied populations. The highest IVI was observed for Achyranthes aspera (16.15) and the lowest IVI was observed for Aegle marmelos (1.98) .

5.8.5.2 Floristic Richness

Cryptogamic Vegetation

The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Algae are present in aquatic bodies or in marshy places. Fungi, particularly from ascomycetes and basidiomycetes, are located on ground or epiphytically. Lichens of crustose, foliose and fruticose types are present on different substrates (Lichens, Ascomycetes and Basidiomycetes could be observed near hilly terrain). Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and old walls of houses. The commonly observed bryophtes in this area are Funaria sp and Polypodium sp. Fern flora of the study area is insignificant. The aquatic weeds Hydrilla sp ,Chara sp, and Salvinia were observed in small ponds in agricultural fields.

Life Form Spectrum

Raunkiaer defined life forms as the sum of adaptations of plants to climate. Braun-Blanquet (1951), whose system is adapted in this study, modified the Raunkiaer's system. The following five of the ten classes created by Braun-Blanquet are present in the study area:

- Phanerophytes : Shrubs and trees - Therophytes : Annuals including ferns - Hydrophytes : Water plants except plankton

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-65 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

- Hemicryptophytes : Plants with perennial shoots and buds close to surface. - Geophytes : Plants, with perennating parts buried in substratum.

During field survey, maximum 362 plant species (except algae, fungi and bryophytes) were recorded from the study area. Classwise distribution of plant species is presented in Table-5.8.4. The list of plant species recorded in study area is presented in Table-4 of Annex 4 .

TABLE-5.8.4 CLASSWISE DISTRIBUTION OF PLANT SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA

Type of Species Post monsoon / winter 2004 No. % Phanerophytes (P) 143 39.50 Therophytes (T) 137 37.85 Hydrophytes (H) 15 4.14 Hemicryptophytes (He) 60 16.57 Geophytes (G) 07 1.94 Total 362 100

Comments on the Life Form Spectrum

Life form spectrum is a reflection of plant community. A plant community is governed by several factors like climatic, edaphic, topographic and biotic. Even local variations in environment affect components of plant community.

In the study area, maximum number of species is phanerophytes (39.50%) followed by therophytes (37.85%). These classes are followed by hemicryptophytes (16.57%) and hydrophytes. Geophytes were found in very few numbers.

Presence of large number of phanerophytes (shrubs and trees) and therophytes (annuals or herbaceous vegetation) indicates semiarid to tropical vegetation structure.

Hemicryptophytes (predominantly grasses and sedges) were found to be significant in the area. These indicate fertile and wet soil in upper layer of soil profile. Hydrophytes were present in both the seasonal and perennial water bodies.

C5-66 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.8.6 Plant Diversity

For better understanding of plant diversity, the following different indices were estimated based on the vegetation studies carried out at the following locations.

Shannon-Weaver Index

Shannon-Weaver index considers two important characters of vegetation i.e. floristic richness and the proportional abundance of species observed. The index is given as:

Shannon-Weaver Index (H' )= - sum (Pi ln Pi)

where Pi = Proportional abundance of the i th (individual) species.

The following Table 5.8.5 shows floristic richness and species diversity indices for sampling locations.

TABLE 5.8.5 FLORISTIC RICHNESS AND SPECIES DIVERSITY INDEX

Code Name of the area Floristic Diversity index for Richness Plants Shannon-Weaver Index TE-1 Maravapalayam village 74.6 2.87 TE-2 Nalliyapalayam village 72.98 2.85 TE-3 Valayakkaranpudur village 72.98 2.74

Observations

The Shannon Weaver index for all the sampling locations are observed to be in the range of 2.74- 3.87 for plant species. The highest index is observed at TE-1 location, which indicates more species diversity. The lowest index is observed at TE-3, which indicates less species diversity.

5.8.7 Plants of Economic Importance

Cultivated plants provide valuable resources to mankind like cereals, millets, vegetables, pulses, fruits, fodder, timber and wood for agricultural implements. In addition, the following cultigens are present in the study area. The list of economic important plants is presented in Table 4 of Annex 4.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-67 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Cereals - Oryza sativa (rice)

- Eleusine coracana (Ragi).

- Zea mays (maize) - Pennisetum typhoideum ( Cumbu)

Millets

- Sorghum spp. (jowar) - Panicum spp.

- Eleucine coracana (ragi)

- Papsalum scrobiculatum ( Varagu)

Pulses

- Cajanus cajan (pigeon pea)

- Cicer aerietinum (gram) - Phaseolus sp. (beans)

- Phaseolus mungo (Greengram)

- Phaseolus radiatus ( Blackgram) - Dolichos liflorites( Horsegram)

- Vigna cating (Cowgram cowpea)

Vegetables (leafy) - Hibiscus cannabinus (ambadi)

- Colocacia esculenta (arum)

- Spinacia oleracea (spinach) - Trigonella foenum-graceum (fenugreek)

- Amaranthus viridis (math)

- Allium cepa (onion)

Vegetables (fruit) - Solanum melongena (egg plant) - Momordica charantia (Bitter gourd) - Lycopersium esculentum (tomato) - Trichosanthes anguina (Ridge gourd) - Abelomoschus indicus (Ochra) - Trapa bispinosa (Singhara) - Hybiscus esculentus( Ladies finger) - Carica papaya (Pappali)

C5-68 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Vegetables (roots) - Raphanus sativus (radish)

- Beta vulagaris (beet)

- Ipomea batatas (Sweet potatoes) - Mannihot esculentus (Tapoica)

- Curcuma lango (Turmeric)

Fruits - Carica papaya (papaya)

- Cucurbita spp.

- Cucumis melo (pumpkin) - Feronia elephantum (wood apple)

- Tamarindus indica (tamarind)

- Musa paardisiaca spp. (banana) - Anona muricata

- Carrisa congesta (karonda)

- Cocos nucifera (Narial) - Citrus lemon (Lemon)

- Anacardium occidentale (Cashew)

- Psidium guava (Koyya)

- Mangifera indica (Aam)

5.8.8 Endangered Plants

The study area did not record the presence of any critically threatened species. The records of Botanical Survey of India and Forest department also did not indicate presence of any endangered and or vulnerable species in this area.

5.8.9 Terrestrial Fauna and Ornithology

5.8.9.1 Review of Secondary Published Data

Wildlife being an important strand in the complex food web in most of forest ecosystems, its status symbolises the functioning efficiency of the entire ecosystem. The forest management, therefore, cannot be isolated for wood exploitation and wild life conservation in the same vulnerable vegetation complex. Just as wild flora needs special treatment for preservation and growth, wild fauna as well deserves specific conservatory

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-69 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

pursuits for posterity. Unfortunately, our past efforts had been unscientific in rearing and preserving our valuable heritage, resulting in dwindling of many interesting species, which the nature had bestowed on us. The broad spectrum of colourful fauna is fading and some species are facing extinction.

Environmental changes through deforestation, spreading urbanisation and destruction of habitats have been of alarmingly high magnitude during the recent past, which has totally disturbed the balance between mortality and reproduction. Some threatened faunal forms are biologically handicapped through an imbibed low rate of reproduction by nature. Fragmentation of population also weakens the vitality of the species due to rarity and normal reproduction process is thwarted leading to extinction. Presence of minor wildlife could be observed during the study period and also from information from local tribal inhabitants.

5.8.9.2 Primary Survey

Avifauna

A number of local migratory and non-migratory birds arrive and depart at different parts of the season adding their share to the noise, bustle and colour of the bird spectacle on the tank. Among these, the recognised are snip, sandpipers, the black winged stilt, blue-winged teal and a few other ducks. The commonly observed birds in the study area are presented in Table-5.8.6.

TABLE-5.8.6 LIST OF BIRDS OBSERVED FROM STUDY AREA

Scientific Name English Name/Local name Distribution Targos calvus King vulture Common near wastelands Milyus migrans Common Kite Common near waste lands Quills contronix Grey quail Common Corvus corvus Jungle crow Rare Corvus splendens House crow Common Turdoides striatus White headed babler Common, near paddy fields Aegithina tiphia Iora Rare Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul Common, near hill region Pycnonotus jokokus White browed Bulbul Common, Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin common, Gallus gallus Red Jungle fowl Rare

C5-70 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Scientific Name English Name/Local name Distribution Columbus livibus Rock Pigeon Common, near waste lands Bubo bubo Indian great horned Owl Common, plantations Copsychus saularis Magpie Robin Common, plantations Tchitrea paradisi Paradise Fl ycatcher Common, plantations Tephrodornis Common Wood shrike Common, plantations pondiceraianus Lalage sykesi Black headed cochoo Shrike Rare, plantataions Artamus fuscus Ashy Swallow Shrike Rare Dicrurus macrocerus Black Drongo Rare, plantations Dicrurus longicaudatus Grey Drongo Rare, plantations Dissemurus paradiseus Rackete tailed Drongo Rare, plantations Oriolus oriolus Indian Oriole Common, plantations Black Headed Oriole Oriolus xanthornus Rare, Temenuchus pagodarum Brahmny Myna Common Acridotheres tristicus Common myna Common Ploceus philippines Weaver bird Common Uroloncha striata Spotted munia Sparse, plantations Passer domisticus House Sparrow Common Motacilla maderaspatensis Large pied wagtail Sparse Cinnyris lotensis Loten's sunbird Sparse Cinnyris asiatica Purple Sunbird Sparse Megalaima merulinus Indian Cuckoo Common, plantations Hierococys varius Common Hawk Cuckoo Common, plantations Eudynamis scolopaceus Koel Rare, seasonal Centropus sinensis Crow Pheasant Common Psittacula Krammeri Rose ringed parakeet Common, Coryllis vaeralis Lorikeet Common Coracias benghalensis Indian Roller Sparse, plantations Merops orinetalis Common Bee Eater Common Merops leschenaulti Chestnut headed Bee Eater Rare Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher Common Microfus affinis House swift Common Cyprirus parvus Palm swift Common Caprimulgus asiaticus Common Indian jar Common Tylo alba Barn Owl Rare Haliastur indus Brahmny kite Common Milvus migrans Pariah kite Common Astur badius Shikra Rare

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-71 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Scientific Name English Name/Local name Distribution Chalcophaps indica Emerald Dove Rare Lobvanella indicus Redwattled Lapwing Rare Lobpluvia malabaraica Yellow wattled Lapwing Rare Anhinga melanogaster Darter Common Egretta garzetta Little Egret Common, agricultural fields Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret Common, wastelands nd agricfields Ardeola grayii Pond Heron Common, near water bodies Anas acuta Common Teal Rare Gallinula chlorpus Moore hen Rare Sterna albifrons Indian River Tern Common, river side Galerida malabarica Malabar Crested Lark Rare

Local/ Migratory Birds in Study Area

Among the identified birds, the Indian myna and common myna are the local migratory birds, which are observed and which are also reported in forest department, working plans of Karur District. The area does not fall in the migratory bird path within the 25 km radius of the study area. The avifauna observed in the study area are basically local migrants only.

Butterflies

A total of 11 species of butterflies were observed and identified during the study period. These varieties of butterflies are commonly observed species in agricultural fields and forest areas. There are no endangered and rare variety of butterflies observed during the study period (Table-5.8.7).

TABLE-5.8.7 LIST OF BUTTERFLIES OBSERVED AT ALL THE SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Order Family Common name Scientific name Lepidoptera Papillionidae Crimson rose Pachliopta hector Lin. Lime butterfly Papilio demoleus Lin. Tailed jay Graphium agamemnon Lin. Great eggfly Hypolimnas bolina Lin. Common crow Euploea core Cramer Common sailor Neptis hylas Moore Pieridae Common grass yellow Eurema hecabe Lin. Emigrant Catopsilia sp.

C5-72 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Order Family Common name Scientific name Psyche Leptosia nina (Fabricius) Danaidae Glassy tiger Parantica aglea Stoll. Satyridae Common cerulean Jamedos celeno

Mammals

There are very less number of major wildlife species in the study area. The commonly observed mammals are presented in Table-5.8.8.

TABLE-5.8.8 MAMMALS RECORDED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. Common name Zoological Name Niche No. 1 Rat Rattus sp. Rodentia 2 Hare Lepus nigricollis Herbivorous 3 Jackal Canis auries Fruits and Small animals 4 Bonnet Macaque Macaca radiata Fruits,berries, leaves insects, spiders 5 Squirrel Funambulus spp. Nuts, Seeds, Fruits 6 Squirrel Funambulus palmarum Nuts, Seeds, Fruits 7 Jungle cat Felis chaus Carnivorous 8 Field mouse Rattus norvegicus Grains, insects 9 House rat Rattus rattus Grains, insects 10 Bat Rhinolopus spp. Fruits, insects 11 Bat Hipposiderus spp. Fruits, insects 12 Common mongoose Herpestes edwardii Grains, Seeds, Small animals 13 Bandicoot Bandicota indica Grains, Seeds 14 Bandicoot Bandicota bengalensis Grains, Seeds 15 Wild fox Vulpus benghalensis Scavenger Amphibians and Reptiles

Amphibians are mainly in fresh water and marshy places. Frogs and toads are present in this area. No tailed amphibians were cited in the survey. Reptilian fauna is comparatively rich which is mainly restricted to the patches with dense vegetation. Larger reptiles like Varanus (monitor islands) were also sighted in few areas. Table 5.8.9 gives the details of different amphibians and reptiles those occur in the study area.

TABLE 5.8.9 AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. Common Name Zoological Name Niche No. Amphibians 1 Common frog Rana tigriana CV

2 Toad Buto melanosticus CV

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-73 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sr. Common Name Zoological Name Niche No. Reptiles 3 Common garden lizard Calotes versicolor CV 4 Indian chamaeleon Chamaleon zeylanicus (Laurenti) CV 5 Cat snake Boiga spp. CV 6 Krait Bangarus spp. CV 7 Indian cobra Naja naja CV 8 Russels viper Vipera spp. CV Note : CV = Carnivorous

5.8.9.3 Endangered Animals

A comprehensive Central Legislation, namely, Wild Life (Protection) Act was enforced in 1972. This law is to provide protection to wild animals and for matters related to their ancillary or incidental death. Schedule-I of this Act included the list of rare and endangered species, which are completely protected throughout the country. The detailed list of wild animals and their conservation status as per Wild Life Act (1972) are presented in Table 5.8.10.

TABLE 5.8.10 FAUNA AND THEIR CONSERVATION STATUS FROM STUDY AREA

Scientific Name English Name/ Distribution Wild Life Local Name Act (1972) Aves Milyus migrans Common Kite Common near waste Sch-IV lands Quills contronix Grey qauil Common Sch-IV Corvus corvus Jungle crow Rare Sch-IV Corvus splendens House crow Common Sch-IV Turdoides striatus White headed babler Common, near paddy Sch-IV fields Aegithina tiphia Iora Rare Sch-IV Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul Common, near hill region Sch-IV Pycnonotus jokokus White browed Bulbul Common, Sch-IV Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin Common, Sch-IV Gallus gallus Red Jungle fowl Rare Sch-IV Columbus livibus Rock Pigeon Common, near waste Sch-IV lands Bubo bubo Indian great horned Owl Common, plantations Sch-IV Copsychus saularis Magpie Robin Common, plantations Sch-IV Tchitrea paradisi Paradise Fl ycatcher Common, plantations Sch-IV Tephrodornis Common Wood shrike Common, plantations Sch-IV pondiceraianus Lalage sykesi Black headed cochoo Rare, plantataions Sch-IV

C5-74 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Scientific Name English Name/ Distribution Wild Life Local Name Act (1972) Shrike Artamus fuscus Ashy Swallow Shrike Rare Sch-IV Dicrurus macrocerus Black Drongo Rare, plantations Sch-IV Dicrurus Grey Drongo Rare, plantations Sch-IV longicaudatus Dissemurus Rackete tailed Drongo Rare, plantations Sch-IV paradiseus Oriolus oriolus Indian Oriole Common, plantations Sch-IV Oriolus xanthornus Black Headed Oriole Rare, Sch-IV Temenuchus Brahmny Myna Common Sch-IV pagodarum Acridotheres tristicus Common myna Common Sch-IV Ploceus philippines Weaver bird Common Sch-IV Uroloncha striata Spotted munia Sparse, plantations Sch-IV Passer domisticus House Sparrow Common Sch-IV Motacilla Large pied wagtail Sparse Sch-IV maderaspatensis Cinnyris lotensis Loten's sunbird Sparse Sch-IV Cinnyris asiatica Purple Sunbird Sparse Sch-IV Megalaima merulinus Indian Cuckoo Common, plantations Sch-IV Hierococys varius Common Hawk uckoo Common, plantations Sch-IV Eudynamis Koel Rare, seasonal Sch-V scolopaceus Centropus sinensis Crow Pheasant Common Sch-IV Psittacula Krammeri Rose ringed parakeet Common, Sch-IV Coryllis vaeralis Lorikeet Common Sch-V Coracias Indian Roller Sparse, plantations Sch-IV benghalensis Merops orinetalis Common Bee Eater Common Sch-IV Merops leschenaulti Chestnut headed Bee Rare Sch-IV Eater Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher Common Sch-IV Microfus affinis House swift Common Sch-IV Cyprirus parvus Palm swift Common Sch-IV Caprimulgus Common Indian jar Common Sch-IV asiaticus Tylo alba Barn Owl Rare Sch-IV Haliastur indus Brahmny kite Common Sch-IV Milvus migrans Pariah kite Common Sch-IV Astur badius Shikra Rare Sch-IV Chalcophaps indica Emerald Dove Rare Sch-IV Lobvanella indicus Redwattled Lapwing Rare Sch-IV Lobpluvia Yellow wattled lapwing Rare Sch-IV malabaraica Anhinga Darter Common Sch-V

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-75 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Scientific Name English Name/ Distribution Wild Life Local Name Act (1972) melanogaster Egretta garzetta Little Egret Common, agricultural Sch-IV fields Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret Common, wastelands and Sch-IV agricultural fields Ardeola grayii Pond Heron Common, near water Sch-IV bodies Anas acuta Common Teal Rare Sch-IV Gallinula chlorpus Moore hen Rare Sch-IV Sterna albifrons Indian River Tern Common, river side Sch-IV Galerida malabarica Malabar Crested Lark Rare Sch-IV Reptiles Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Common Sch-III Chamaleon Indian chamaeleon Rare Sch-II zeylanicus (Laurenti) Boiga spp Cat snake. Common Sch-III Bangarus spp Krait. Common Sch-II Naja naja Indian cobra Rare Sch-III Russels viper Viper rare Butterflies Triodes minos Southern Birdwing Common - Pachliopta hector Crimson rose Common - Papilo demoleus Lime butterfly Common - Graphium Tailed jay Common - agamemnos Papilo polymnstor Blue mormon Common - Junonia atlites Grey pansey Common - Juninia almana Peacock pansey Occasional - Neptis hylas Common sailor Common Sch-IV Parantica aglea Glassy tiger Common Sch-IV Amphibia Rana hexadactyla Frog Common Sch-IV Rana tigrina Bull frog Common Sch-IV Mammals Rattus rattus Rat Herbivorous Sch-IV Lepus nigricollis Hare Herbivorous Sch-III Canis auries Jackal Fruits and Small animals Sch-III Macaca radiata Bonnet Macaque Fruits,berries, leaves Sch-II insects, spiders Funambulus spp Squirrel. Nuts, Seeds, Fruits Sch-IV Funambulus Squirrel Nuts, Seeds, Fruits Sch-IV palmarum Rattus norvegicus Field mouse Grains, insects Sch-IV Herpestes edwardii Common mongoose Grains, Seeds, Small SCh-IV

C5-76 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Scientific Name English Name/ Distribution Wild Life Local Name Act (1972) animals Bandicota indica Bandicoot Grains, Seeds Sch-IV Bandicota Bandicoot Grains, Seeds Sch-IV bengalensis Vulpus benghalensis Wild fox Scavenger Sch-III

On comparison of the checklist given in the Schedule-I of the Act and the list of wildlife recorded in the study area, it is concluded that there are quite a good number of endangered and protected animals in the study area .

5.8.10 Aquatic Ecosystems

Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development. The task of preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of both national and global significance, since there are no boundaries to the propagation of anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline information and undertake effective management plan. So, the objective of aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows:

 To characterise water bodies like fresh waters

 To understand their present biological status

 To characterise water bodies with the help of biota

 To understand the impact of proposed industrial and urbanisation activities, and

 To suggest recommendations to counter adverse impacts, if any, on the ecosystem.

To meet these objectives, following methods were followed:

 Generating data by actual field sampling and analysis in these areas through field visits during study period

 Discussion with local people to get the information for aquatic plants and aquatic animals, and

 Visit to local fishermen societies to study fish catch.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-77 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

To fulfil these objectives and to understand the present status of aquatic ecosystem, samples were collected from different fresh water system (Nallahs and Rivers) under investigation. Two sampling locations were identified. Planktonic samples were collected during November 2004. The sampling locations are presented in Table 5.8.11 and depicted in Figure 5.8.1.

C5-78 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 5.8.1 ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-79 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.8.11 DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sl. Code Locations Remarks No. 1 AE-1 River Cauvery near Nagamanayakkanpalaym Upstream 2 AE-2 River Cauvery near Velur Downstream

5.8.10.1 Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies

Aquatic ecosystem close to the project area under investigation was considered for a detailed study. Water samples were considered for their physico-chemical characteristics. Plankton, aquatic plants, fish fauna of water bodies, and their associated fauna were collected, identified and estimated. The following methodology has been adopted for sampling:

Biological Parameters

Phytoplankton

Cell Count

Sedgiwck-Rafter cell was used for the cell count.

Abundance of Phytoplankton

Abundance was measured by counting the average number of plankton in the cell.

Zooplankton

Zooplanktons were identified using standard keys.

Cell Count

Sedgwick-Rafter cell was used for the cell count.

Fishes

Samples of fishes in the river near Velur and pond were collected and identified upto species level.

C5-80 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.8.10.2 Status of Aquatic Ecosystem

Phytoplankton

Phytoplankton group reported from two locations are basillariophyceae, chlorophyceae, myxophyceae and euglenophyceae members. About 24 species of phytoplankton were reported from two locations. Density of phytoplankton group among the two locations was the highest in AE-1 and lowest in AE-2. Dominance of Bacillariophyceae members followed by myxophyceae was observed in all the locations. The highest percentage was Navicula and Melosira sp followed by Ankistrodesmus falcatus and the lowest percentage was of Euglena sp, observed in lentic water bodies during the study period. The details of diversity index for plankton and list of plankton observed from sampling are presented in Table 5.8.12 and Table 5.8.13.

Zooplankton

Percentage composition of zooplankton species varied among different species. Among the zooplankton group, Brachionous sp (Rotifer group) had the highest percentage composition and the lowest percentage composition for Asplancha sp of the total zooplankton. Cypris sp and Cyclops sp are also present in considerable number in the studied water bodies.

TABLE –5.8.12 DIVERSITY INDEX FOR PLANKTON

Code Name of the Location Diversity index for Diversity index phytoplankton for zooplankton AE-1 River Cauvery near 2.56 2.28 Nagamanayakkanpalaym AE-2 River Cauvery near Velur 2.64 2.32

The indices calculated for both the sampling locations indicate that the water bodies in the study area are not polluted due any industrial and domestic activity. The range of index among the two sampling locations reveals that the water bodies have broad ecotone boundaries, which is indicative of gradual changes in the biological quality and the species composition.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-81 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 5.8.13

LIST OF PLANKTONS OBSERVED FROM STUDY PERIOD

Sl. No. Phytoplankton Zooplankton 1 Chlorella sp Amoema sp 2 Chlorococcum sp Arcella sp 3 Pediastrum duplex Condylostoma sp 4 Spirogyra sp Daphnia sp 5 Cpsmarium Kertella sp 6 Cymbella sp Macrotric sp 7 Euglena sp Brachionus sp 8 Fragillaria sp Filinia sp 9 Gleocapsa sp 10 Gomphonema sp 11 Melosira sp 12 Merismopedia sp 13 Microcysstis sp 14 Navicula sp 15 Nitzschia sp 16 Oscillatoria sp 17 Scendesmus sp 18 Spirulina sp 19 Tetradron sp 20 Moughtia sp 21 Ankistrodesmus falcatus 22 Aanabaena sp 23 Rivularia sp

5.8.10.3 Aquatic Fauna

The field studies indicate that the aquatic fauna consist of crustaceans, aquatic insects, fishes amphibia, reptiles and birds and are listed in Table 5.8.14. The fresh water turtles, water snakes and others were found to be present in the tanks and nallahs due to the vast area and presence of a variety of forage fauna.

TABLE 5.8.14 AQUATIC FAUNA FROM STUDY AREA

Sl. No. Name of the Species Lentic Water Lotic Water Bodies Bodies Insects 1 Dytiscus sp - Observed 2 Nepa sp - Observed 3 Ranatra sp - Observed

C5-82 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Fishes 4 Channa puctata Observed Observed 5 Mystus sp Observed Observed 6 Anabus testidinens Observed Observed 7 Puntias sp Observed Observed 8 Chela sp Observed Observed 9 Amblypharyngodon sp Observed Observed 10 Glossogobins giuris Observed Observed 11 Salmostoma bacaila Observed 12 Catla catla Observed 13 Cyprirus carpio Observed 14 Cirrhinus mrigula Observed 15 Labeo rohita Observed 16 Chanda ranga Observed Observed Amphibians and Birds 17 Rana cynophyctis Observed Observed 18 Phalacrocorax carbo Observed Observed 19 Bubulcus ibis Observed Observed 20 Egretta garzetta Observed Observed 21 Ardea cinerea Observed Observed 22 Alcedo athinis Observed Observed 23 Dendrocygna javanica Observed Observed

5.8.10.4 Conclusions on Aquatic Ecology

Surface water samples were collected from river Cauvery in study area. Separate water samples were collected for biological parameters. Basillariophycean, Chlorophyceaen, Myxophyceaen, Rotifers and Cladocerans are predominant in the studied water bodies. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton and zooplankton varies from 2.56 to 2.64 and 2.28 to 2.32. On the basis of biological parameters and diversity index of plankton, it may be concluded that the studied water bodies are slightly mesotrophic in nature.

5.9 Land Use Studies

For sustainable development of any area, the study of the environs in it is a prerequisite. Also, reliable and timely information on the available resources in this area is very essential in preparation of resource maps while showing their spatial distribution. Important among the natural resource studies are land use/land cover, soil, ground and surface water, natural vegetation and climatic conditions. In addition to these resources, a few other physical parameters important for planning and development are terrain conditions (landform and slope), physical and institutional infrastructure.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-83 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play an important role in identifying sensitive issues in the past and present and to take appropriate actions for maintaining ‘Ecological Homeostatics’ for the development of the region. The objective of this section is to establish the existing land use pattern in the study area and to assess the likely changes, which may occur after implementation of the MDP/MEP.

5.9.1 Objectives

The objectives of land use studies are:

 Establishment of the existing land use pattern

 Assessment of the likely impacts due to the proposed MDP on the land use pattern of the study area and

 Recommendations for optimising the future land use pattern after implementation of the ongoing MDP and proposed MEP in the study area.

5.9.2 Methodology

The land use pattern of the study area is studied based on the available secondary data such as the district census handbooks of Karur. Besides these records, agricultural census and district statistical handbooks of respective districts are also studied.

5.9.3 Land Use Based on Secondary Data

An area within 10 km radius from the centre of the TNPL plant is considered as the study area, for assessing the existing environmental conditions and establishing the land use pattern. The geographical area of all the settlements is taken into consideration, though some villages are covered partially within the circle (at the periphery) encompassed by 10 km radius around the plant. This study area theoretically covers an area of about 325.6 sq. km. The major part of the study area falls in Cauvery River belt. The land use pattern of the study area is given in Table 5.9.1. The village wise land use data are presented in Annex 5.

C5-84 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 5.9.1 LAND USE PATTERN OF THE STUDY AREA

SL PARTICULARS OF LAND USE AREA (HA) PERCENTAGE NO AREA

1 Forest Land 0.0 0.0 2 Land under Cultivation a) Irrigated Land 7954.4 24.43 b) Un irrigated Land 11423.0 35.08 3 Cultivable Waste Land 6823.0 20.96 4 Area not available for cultivation 6359.1 19.53 Total Area 32559.5 100.00

Source: District Census Hand Books for Karur & Namakkal Districts

5.9.3.1 Forest Land

The study area of 10 km radius from the centre of the plant has no forest area.

5.9.3.2 Land under Cultivation

Altogether, 19377.4 ha land (irrigated and un-irrigated) is put to agriculture, which works out to about 56.04% of the total study area. The irrigated land is about 7954.4 ha and works out to about 24.43% of the total study area. The major source of irrigation in the study area is Cauvery River and its canal systems. The un-irrigated land is about 11423 ha, and works out to about 35.08% of the study area.

5.9.3.3 Culturable Wasteland

This includes the land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Land under thatching grasses, bamboo bushes, other groves useful for fuel; and all grazing lands and village common lands are also included in this category. The study area comprises 6823 ha cultivable wastelands, which works out to about to 20.96% of the total area. This shows a very small percentage of land is in this category, while indicating that almost all available lands are used to the maximum extent, for different uses.

5.9.3.4 Land Not available for Cultivation

The land not available for cultivation works out to be the major land use in the study area. This mainly consists of the water bodies such as River Cauvery, besides the urban and rural settlements, roads, railways, canals,

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-85 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

etc. which occupy a considerable extent of the study area. About 6359.1 ha area, working out to about 19.53% of the total study area, falls in this category.

5.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

The processes of industrialisation and urbanisation are bound to create their impacts on the socio-economic aspects of the local people, particularly in the peripheral areas of the urban centres. Therefore, the studies on the socio-economic impacts of industrialisation on the local population no doubt deserve attention.

In order to study the socio-economic aspects of people, the required data has been collected from various secondary sources.

5.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study is primarily based on the review of secondary data from the publications of Census Department (2001 Census) Government of India and other Departmental records with respect to population, social structure, literacy levels, occupational structure and availability of infrastructure in the region.

5.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile – 2001 Census

The information on socio-economic aspects of the study area has been compiled from secondary sources, which include various public, semi public and research organisations. The sociological aspects of the study include human settlements, demographic and other socio-economic aspects, besides infrastructure facilities available in the study area. The economic aspects include agriculture, industry and occupational structure of people.

5.10.3 Settlement Pattern of the Study Area

The study area covered within 10 km from the TNPL plant, where the proposed MEP would be taken up, includes the districts of Karur and Namakkal of Tamil Nadu. Karur is a major commercial, administrative, cultural and industrial centre and spreads over a major portion of the core study area. The demographic characteristics of the study area are summarised in Table 5.10.1 and presented settlement wise in Annex 6.

C5-86 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 5.10.1 DEMOGRAPHIC CHARACTERISTICS OF THE STUDY AREA – 2001 CENSUS

PARTICULARS POPULATION % POPULATION

Total Population 380107 - Total Male 190274 50.06 Total Female 189833 49.94 Sex Ratio - 997 Population Density per sq. km. - 1167 Scheduled Castes 62555 16.46 Scheduled Tribes 49 0.01 Total Weaker Section People 62604 16.47 Male Literates 134978 35.51 Female Literates 96536 25.40 Total Literates 231508 60.91 Male Literacy rate - 70.94 Female Literacy rate - 50.85 Main Workers 205679 54.11 Cultivators 45215 11.90 Agricultural Labourers 88160 23.19 Marginal Workers 14999 3.95 Non Workers 159429 41.94

Source: District Census Handbooks of Karur and Namakkal Districts-2001

5.10.3.1 Demographic aspects of the Study Area

The population within 10-km radius study area was 380107 (as per 2001 census). The total male population worked out to about 50.06% and the females to about 49.94%. The sex ratio, which is expressed as the number of females per 1000 males, was observed to be about 997. The density of population was about 1167 persons per sq. km.

5.10.3.2 Distribution of Population

As per 2001 census, the general study area was inhabited by 380107 persons in its 325.5 sq. km. area.

5.10.3.3 Social Structure

As per 2001 census, about 16.46% of the population in the study area belonged to Scheduled Castes (SC) and 0.01% to Scheduled Tribes (ST), thus indicating that socially backward castes constitute about 16.47% of the population.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-87 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

5.10.3.4 Literacy Levels

The study area has achieved a moderate literacy rate of 60.91% as per 2001 census. The male literacy rate, i.e. the percentage of literate males to the total males of the study area worked out to be 70.94%. The female literacy rate, an important indicator for social change, was observed to be 50.85%.

5.10.3.5 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of people in the study area is studied with reference to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 10 categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural labourers, those engaged in live-stock, forestry, fishing; mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industry and other than household industry; trade and commerce, transport and communication, construction and other services.

The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; besides institutional inmates or all other non-workers who, however, do not fall under the above categories.

As per the 2001 census records, altogether there were 205679 main workers constituting about 54.11% of the total population. The distribution of workers by occupation indicates that the agricultural labourers and those engaged in ‘other services’ categories were most predominant among the main workers.

5.10.4 Agricultural Activities

As seen from the land use pattern, about 56.04% of area was put to agricultural and horticultural uses. Majority of the cultivated area was irrigated under River Cauvery and its canal systems. The agricultural activities of the study area provided employment to about 35.09 % of the population. About 11.90% of the population gets employment through cultivation and about 23.19% through agricultural labour. Fishing and grazing also plays a little role in the economy of the study area.

The study area has a tropical humid climate. Paddy cultivation is done for food crops while floriculture, banana plantations and sugarcane, are cultivated for commercial purposes. Coconut plantations also are maintained in some parts of the study area.

C5-88 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

5.10.5 Industrial Development

Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited is the major industrial establishment of the study area. A number of medium and major sugar industries are located in this area. There are various other industries such as Textiles and Distilleries located in the study area. Besides these, some major and minor industries are located in the peripheries of Karur.

5.11 Places of Historical and Tourist Importance

The district has a very rich and varied cultural heritage. A few important pilgrim centres and tourist centr es in the district are listed below:

Names of the Important Pilgrim Centres

Kadambar Koil (Temple) - Kulithalai

Iyer Malai - Kulithalai

Kalyanavenkatasami Temple – Thanthonimalai

Mariamman Temple - Karur

Vennaiamalai - Karur

Pasupatheswarar Temple - Karur

Venjamangudalur Temple - Venjamangudalur

Names of the Important Tourist Centres

Kalyanavenkatasami Temple - Thanthonimalai

Pasupatheswarar Temple - Karur.

Prepared by SPB-PC and Vimta Labs Limited C5-89 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

(This page intentionally left blank)

C5-90 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

6 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

6.1 Introduction

This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts from implementation of the Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) in the study area.

Generally, the environmental impacts can be categorised as either primary or secondary. Primary impacts are those which are attributed directly and secondary impacts are those which are indirectly induced and typically include the associated investment and changed patterns of social and economic activities by the proposed action.

The impacts have been predicted for the ongoing MDP of Pulping operations and proposed MEP, assuming that the pollution due to the existing activities has already been covered under baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same till the commencement of proposed MEP. The ongoing MDP and proposed MEP would create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:

 During the construction phase, which may be regarded as temporary or short term

 During the operation phase, which would have long term effects.

The constructional and operational phases of the ongoing MDP and proposed MEP comprise various activities, each of which will have an impact on some or other environmental parameters. Various impacts during the construction and operational phase on the environmental parameters have been studied and are discussed below.

6.2 Impact During Construction Phase

This includes the following activities related to levelling of site, construction and erection of plant components.

6.2.1 Impact on Land use

The total land area of the existing plant is 375 acres. No additional land is required to be procured for the proposed MEP. The land for the MEP is already under the possession of TNPL and is located within the premises of the existing plant area. Hence, there is no additional land acquisition process and no Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues involved in the MEP.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The construction of plant will not bring any changes in the land use pattern of the project area as the land is already categorised as Industrial land use category. There will not be any adverse impact on the surrounding land use during the construction period.

6.2.2 Impact on Soil Quality

The land identified for the MEP of paper mill has already been filled and levelled to the plant formation level and is being used for the existing plant activities and facilities. However, the construction activities will slightly result in loss of vegetation cover and topsoil to some extent in the plant area. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking so that it can be used for greenbelt development. Apart from much localised construction impacts at the plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the surrounding area is anticipated.

6.2.3 Impact on Air Quality

Impacts of construction activities on air quality are cause for concern mainly in the dry months due to dust particles. The main sources of emission during the construction period are the movement of equipment at the construction site and dust emitted during construction related activities. The dust emitted during the above mentioned activities depend upon the ambient humidity levels. The impact will be for short duration and confined locally to the construction site. The composition of dust in this kind of operation is, however, inorganic and non-toxic in nature.

Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment deployed during the construction phase are also likely to result in marginal increase in the

levels of SO 2, NOx, SPM, CO and un-burnt hydrocarbons. It may, therefore, be deduced that construction activities may cause changes in the SPM levels locally. The impact will, however, be reversible, marginal and temporary in nature and will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to be negligible outside the plant boundaries.

However, implementing proper upkeep and maintenance of vehicles, sprinkling of water on roads and construction site, sufficient vegetation (which already exists) is some of the measures that would greatly reduce the impacts during the construction phase.

C6-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

6.2.4 Impact on Water Resource and Quality

The peak requirement of water during construction will be about 150 m3/day, which will be supplied from the existing water system. The construction equipment is more related to mechanical fabrication, assembly and erection. Temporary sanitation facilities (soak pits/septic tanks) will be set up for disposal of sanitary sewage generated by the work force as per the prevailing labour laws. Since most of the construction work force will consist of floating population, the demand for water and sanitation facilities will be low and it will be managed by the existing water supply system and additional sanitation facilities for constructional activities at the site would be provided during construction phase.

The overall impact on water environment during constructional phase due to the proposed MEP is likely to be short term and insignificant.

6.2.5 Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic, construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, pumps, compressors, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation of these equipments will generate noise ranging between 85- 100 dB (A) near source. These noises will be generated mostly within the existing plant boundary and will be transient in nature. Due to existing greenbelt all around the periphery of the plant boundary, these noises will be attenuated to a large extent and are not likely to have any significant impact on the nearby villages.

Overall, the impact of noise due to construction on the environment is likely to be insignificant, reversible and localised in nature.

6.2.6 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The initial construction work at the project site involves land clearance and filling and levelling to the plant formation level, which has already been done during the construction of the existing plant. Since the land is already under the possession of TNPL and is utilised for the existing plant facilities, there will not be any loss of agricultural productive land or loss of vegetation.

The construction activities lead to inward migration of labour force in the area and thus there would be increase in fuel demand.

The construction site falls under the category of Industrial land use and does not harbour any fauna of importance; therefore, the impact of construction activities on fauna will be insignificant.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

6.2.7 Impact on Aquatic Ecology

There will not be any adverse effect on aquatic life during the construction phase, since the water requirement for the construction phase is less. There are no water bodies near the construction site, which will get polluted due to the construction activities.

6.2.8 Demography and Socio-Economics

The impact of the MEP would begin to be realised with the start-up of the construction activities:

 Since the entire land, which is needed for MEP, is already under the possession of TNPL, there will not be any further land acquisition and thereby need of Rehabilitation and Resettlement does not arise.

 There will be some migration of labour force from outside the study area during construction phase, which may put some pressure on the local settlements and resources. However, this impact is envisaged to be marginal and a temporary phenomenon.

 The non-workers constitute about 42% of the total population within 10 km radius study area. Some of them will be available for employment in the proposed project during construction activities. As the labourers are generally un-skilled, the locals would get opportunities for employment during construction activities. It is estimated that at least two-third of the labour force will be sourced from the local area.

 In addition to the opportunity of getting employment as construction labourers, the local population would also have employment opportunities in related service activities like petty commercial establishments, small contracts/sub-contracts and supply of construction materials for buildings and ancillary infrastructures etc. Consequently, this will contribute to economic upliftment of the area.

6.3 Impacts during Operation

The following activities related to the operational phase will have varying impacts on the environment and are considered for impact assessment:

 Land use

 Soil quality

 Topography and climate

C6-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Air quality

 Hydrology

 Water resources and quality

 Solid waste

 Noise levels

 Terrestrial ecology

 Aquatic ecology

 Traffic load

 Demography and socio-economics

 Infrastructural facilities

6.3.1 Land Use

The proposed project involving MEP is within the TNPL plant premises and the land use is already categorised under industrial zone. Hence, there will not be any change in the land use pattern in the study area due to the proposed MEP.

6.3.2 Impact on Soil Quality

Most of the impacts of the MEP on soils are restricted to the construction phase, which will get stabilised during operational phase.

The treated wastewater in the existing WWTP is being utilised for irrigation in the nearby villages. No adverse impact on soil quality had been observed even after continuous discharge of treated wastewater on land. Considering that the quality of the treated mill wastewater after implementation of the proposed MEP would be much improved, no adverse impact on soil quality is expected.

6.3.3 Topography and Climate

There will not be much cutting and felling required for the proposed project. The additional structures such as industrial sheds, stacks, etc will be constructed in the existing plant area and therefore will not result any topographical changes or visual impact. There will not be any tall structures except stacks, which will not have any impact on the climate.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The exit temperatures from the stacks will be maintained in the range of 130-180 oC, which may not have any significant impact on the climate.

6.3.4 Impact on Air Quality

Only the stand-by 150 tph power boiler will be the major emission source of air pollution in the proposed new project. The contribution from the existing units has been captured in the ambient air quality during baseline monitoring studies. The major sources of air pollution in the existing plant are due to cogeneration power plant and chemical recovery boilers. ESP is provided for the stack attached to power plant to control Suspended Particulate Matter.

Sulphur dioxide (SO 2), Oxides of Nitrogen and particulate emissions will be the main pollutants from operation of the plant. The incremental ground level concentrations due to the proposed new project facilities are estimated by dispersion modelling.

The details of the existing sources of pollution (stacks) are presented in baseline chapter. The contribution from these existing units has already been captured in the ambient air quality during baseline monitoring studies.

The impact on ambient air quality is assessed hereunder considering the following:

 The air quality impacts have been predicted for the proposed project assuming that the pollution due to the existing activities has already been covered under baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same till the operation of the project;

 The impacts of the implementation of the ongoing MDP, for which Environmental Clearance is available, are also predicted; and

 Site-specific meteorological parameters recorded for winter season viz. wind speed, direction and temperature are used for estimating the short term GLC's.

6.3.4.1 Details of Mathematical Modelling

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out by employing mathematical model based on Steady State Gaussian Plume Dispersion, designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case, Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) dispersion model developed by United States Environmental Protection Agency [USEPA] has been used for predicting the ground level concentrations.

C6-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The computations deal with major pollutants like Sulphur dioxide (SO 2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM).

6.3.4.2 Model Options used for Computations

The options used for short-term computations are:

 The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always limited to that of the mixing layer

 Stack tip down wash is not considered

 Buoyancy induced dispersion is used to describe the increasing plume dispersion during the ascension phase

 Calms processing routine is used by default

 Wind profile exponents are used by default, ‘Irwin’

 Flat terrain is used for computations

 It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico- chemical transformations and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition

 Washout by rain is not considered and

 Cartesian co-ordinate system has been used for computations.

6.3.4.3 Strategy adopted for the Modelling

The Air pollution impact modelling has been done in two scenarios.

Scenario–I: Increments due to the ongoing MDP (Environmental Clearance from MoEF has already been obtained for the project)

Scenario-II: Increments due to the proposed expansion project (MEP)

In the first scenario, the increments due to the implementation of ongoing MDP, for which Environmental Clearance has already been obtained from MoEF are predicted. By adding these increments to the baseline concentrations, the realistic baseline concentrations are obtained for the MEP.

In the second scenario, the impacts due to the proposed MEP have been predicted.

The final resultant concentrations are obtained by adding the increments of

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

MEP to the realistic baseline values.

The impacts due to the MEP are predicted in this scenario. This scenario is divided into two parts.

Part-1: Additional point emission sources / Additional loads envisaged in MEP.

Part-2: Diminishing point emission sources / reduction in loads of the existing sources due to MEP.

Net increments of Scenario-I = Increments due to Part-1 – Decrements due to Part-2.

Realistic baseline concentration of pollutants = Baseline data + Net increments of Scenario -I

Scenario-II: Increments due to the MEP

This scenario consists of additional point emission sources due to the MEP

The final resultant concentrations of pollutants are calculated by adding the increments of MEP to the realistic baseline values.

6.3.4.4 Model Input Data

Scenario –I: Net Increments due to the MEP

The following modifications are envisaged due to MEP, which are under implementation stage and not covered in baseline data collection for various environmental attributes. The stack-wise characteristics and emission rates for the modifications in ongoing MDP are given in Table 6.1.

C6-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 6.1 DETAILS OF STACK EMISSIONS (ADDITIONAL AND DECREMENT SOURCES) – ONGOING MDP

Sr. Parameter Additional Decrement No. Pollution Source Pollution Source

1 Name of the process unit CRB #3 LK #2 CRB #1 CRB #2 (MHI) (BHEL) 2 Stack height (m) 90 60 42 42 3 Stack diameter (m) 3.5 0.9 2.0 3.2 o 4 Exit gas temperature ( C) 180 200 116 150 5 Exit gas velocity (m/s) 15 15 8.5 7.6 3 6 Flow rate (Nm /sec) 95.6 6.1 20.6 43.4 7 Emission SO 2 182 1560 78 42 rate (mg/Nm 3) SPM 80 80 150 165 NOx 350 350 225 250 8 Emission SO 2 17.4 9.4 (-) 1.6 (-) 1.8 rate (gm/s) SPM 7.7 0.5 (-) 3.1 (-) 7.2 NOx 33.5 2.1 (-) 4.6 (-) 10.9 Note: CRB – Chemical Recovery Boiler; LK–Limekiln

Scenario-II: Increments due to the ongoing MDP

Only one stand-by 150 tph power boiler will be the emission source of air

pollution in the proposed new project. The SPM, SO 2 and NOx emission levels have been considered as input to the model. The stack characteristics and emission rates for the MEP are given in Table 6.2.

TABLE 6.2 STACK EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS FOR PROPOSED MEP

Sr. No. Parameter Proposed PB #6

1 Name of the process unit 150 tph Power Boiler 2 Stack height (m) 95 3 Stack diameter (m) 3.5 o 4 Exit gas temperature ( C) 145 5 Exit gas velocity (m/s) 10.5 3 6 Flow rate (Nm /sec) 72.5 7 Emission SO 2 1215 rate (mg/Nm 3) SPM 100 NOx 350

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sr. No. Parameter Proposed PB #6

8 Emission SO 2 88.1 rate (gm/sec) SPM 7.2 NOx 25.4 Note: SPM and NOx emissions are calculated based on 100 and 350 mg/Nm 3 respectively

6.3.4.5 Meteorological Data

Data recorded at the continuous weather monitoring station on wind speed, direction and temperature at one hourly interval for the period during winter season, has been used for determining the average meteorological data of the season according to the CPCB guidelines. Atmospheric stability has been calculated using the Sigma-Theta Method. Model simulations have been carried out using the Triple Joint Frequency data viz., stability, wind speed, direction, mixing height and temperature. The details of the sigma-theta method are elaborated below:

i) Pasquill Stability Class through Sigma-Theta Method

Hourly meteorological data recorded at the continuous weather monitoring station on wind speed and direction have been used for calculating stability by using Sigma-Theta method (Ref: On Site Meteorological Program Guidance for Regulatory Modeling Applications, US-EPA).

⇒ Calculation of Standard Deviation of Wind Direction

One hourly average wind direction has been recorded using the continuous monitoring equipment (Make-Dyna Lab Data Logger DL 1002). The wind direction data is logged in a data logger at every 5 seconds and at the same instance, the logger calculates the SIN and COS values of wind direction. These values are stored in the memory and it continues to do so till the end of the set interval (present case it is one hour averaging time). At the set interval the average of SIN and COS is calculated. From this value, the TAN value is calculated and looking at the quadrant position and TAN value, the logger estimates the standard deviation of wind direction fluctuations (average over a period of one hour). These one hourly average wind direction data (Standard deviation: σA) in degrees has been used for determining the hourly stability.

⇒ Lateral Turbulence ( σA) and Wind Speed or Sigma-Theta method

The hourly σA values calculated by the data logger are used for arriving at the hourly stabilities by the following procedure:

C6-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The following section describes the method for estimating stability categories in terms of standard deviation of the lateral wind direction fluctuations ( σA) and the scalar mean wind speed (us). The lateral wind direction turbulence criteria for initial estimate of Pasquill Guilford (PG) stability category is given in Table 6.3. The wind speed adjustments for determining final estimate of PG stability category from σA are given in Table 6.3. The criteria laid down in the tables below are for the data collected at 10-m and roughness length of 15-cm. Night time is defined as the period from one hour before sunset to one hour after sunrise. The method specifies that the data need to be collected at 10-m height. The relationship employed in the estimation methods assumes conditions are of steady state.

TABLE 6.3 LATERAL TURBULENCE CRITERIA FOR INITIAL ESTIMATE OF STABILITY

Initial estimate of Pasquill Stability Standard deviation of horizontal wind direction Category fluctuations, σσσA in degrees A 22.5 ≤ σA B 17.5 ≤ σA< 22.5 C 12.5 ≤ σA < 17.5 D 7.5 ≤ σA < 12.5 E 3.8 ≤ σA < 7.5 F σA < 3.8

Mixing Heights and Meteorology Data Considered in the Model

In the absence of site specific mixing depths, mixing depths published in ‘Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth over Indian Region’ by Dr. R.N. Gupta has been used.

The meteorological data was generated during January 2008 at site. The recorded data has been averaged out to arrive at mean meteorology of season as per the CPCB guidelines. The same has been used in the air dispersion model.

6.3.4.6 Presentation of Results

In the present case, model simulations have been carried for winter season using the hourly Joint Frequency data viz. stability, wind speed, mixing height and temperature. For the short-term simulations, the Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) were estimated around 1200 receptors to obtain an optimum description of variations in GLCs over the site within 10-km radius covering 16 directions.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The GLCs due to the emission from the proposed stacks have been estimated through dispersion modelling by using the seasonal

meteorological data monitored at site. The concentrations for SPM, SO 2 and

NOx thus obtained are presented in Table 6.5. For each time scale, i.e. for 24 hr (short term), the model computes the highest concentrations observed during the period over all the measurement points. The isopleths

for SPM, SO 2 and NOx concentrations for emission from the proposed stacks are depicted as Figure 6.1, Figure 6.2 and Figure 6.3 respectively.

TABLE 6.5 PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT TERM CONCENTRATIONS

Scenario of Net Incremental concentrations Distance Direction Operation (km) (µµµg/m 3)

SPM SO 2 NOx Scenario-1 (Post (-) 0.9 4.0 (-)1.4 2.8 NW MDP) Scenario-2 (Post 0.9 11.0 3.2 1.4 NW MEP)

6.3.4.7 Comments on Predicted Concentrations

A perusal of Table 6.5 reveals that the maximum short-term 24 hourly

ground level incremental concentrations for SPM, SO2 and NOx are observed as 0.9 µg/m 3, 11.0 µg/m 3 and 3.2 µg/m 3 occurring at a distance of about 1.4 km in the NW direction due to implementation of MEP Project.

6.3.4.8 Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of the Project

The maximum net incremental GLCs (Table-6.5) due to the MEP for SO 2 and

SPM are superimposed on the baseline SO 2 and SPM concentrations recorded during the study to arrive at the realistic baseline concentrations for the proposed MEP project. The modelling predictions are tabulated below in Table 6.6.

C6-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 6.6 RESULTANT CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO NET INCREMENTAL GLC's – ONGOING MDP (SCENARIO-I)

Pollutant Maximum AAQ Net incremental Realistic baseline Concentrations concentrations due concentrations Recorded During to MDP ( µµµg/m 3) (µµµg/m 3) Baseline Study (µµµg/m 3) Industrial Zone SPM 190.8 (-) 0.9 189.9

SO 2 26.8 4.0 30.8 NOx 29.1 (-) 1.4 27.7 Residential Zone SPM 180.1 (-) 0.9 179.2

SO 2 21.8 4.0 25.8 NOx 27.8 (-)1.4 26.4

The maximum incremental GLCs (Table-6.5) due to the ongoing MDP for

SO 2, NOx and SPM are superimposed on the realistic baseline SO 2, NOx and SPM concentrations obtained in Table-6.5 to arrive at the likely resultant concentrations after MDP operations. The resultant concentrations are tabulated below in Table-6.7.

TABLE 6.7 RESULTANT CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO INCREMENTAL GLC's – PROPOSED MEP (SCENARIO-II)

Pollutant Realistic baseline Net incremental Final Resultant concentrations concentrations due Concentrations (µµµg/m 3) to MEP ( µµµg/m 3) (µµµg/m 3)

Industrial Zone SPM 189.9 0.9 190.8

SO 2 30.8 11.0 41.8 NOx 27.7 3.2 30.9 Residential Zone SPM 179.2 0.3 179.5

SO 2 25.8 3.1 28.7 NOx 26.4 0.7 31.0

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Discussion of Results

A perusal of the above table clearly reveals that SPM, SO 2 and NOx are likely to be within the prescribed limits specified by CPCB for industrial zone and residential zone.

Hence, it may be concluded that the operation phase of the proposed project will create only a marginal impact on the surrounding area.

C6-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

-10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00 10000.00 10000.00

8000.00 8000.00

6000.00 6000.00

4000.00 4000.00

2000.00 2000.00

0.00 0.00

-2000.00 -2000.00

-4000.00 -4000.00

-6000.00 -6000.00

-8000.00 -8000.00

-10000.00 -10000.00 -10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00

FIGURE 6.1 SHORT TERMS 24 HOURLY GLCs FOR SPM

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

-10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00 10000.00 10000.00

8000.00 8000.00

6000.00 6000.00

4000.00 4000.00

2000.00 2000.00

0.00 0.00

-2000.00 -2000.00

-4000.00 -4000.00

-6000.00 -6000.00

-8000.00 -8000.00

-10000.00 -10000.00 -10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00

FIGURE 6.2 SHORT TERMS 24 HOURLY GLCs FOR SO 2

C6-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

-10000 -8000 -6000 -4000 -2000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 10000 10000

8000 8000

6000 6000

4000 4000

2000 2000

0 0

-2000 -2000

-4000 -4000

-6000 -6000

-8000 -8000

-10000 -10000 -10000 -8000 -6000 -4000 -2000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000

FIGURE 6.3 SHORT TERMS 24 HOURLY GLCs FOR NOx

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-17 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

6.3.4.9 Fugitive Emissions

Fugitive dust emissions generation will be negligible as compared to the stack emissions. Yet, in order to reduce the fugitive emissions, adequate measures will be taken in the design and operation of the plant. In addition, the existing and proposed afforestation will help in further minimising the fugitive dust emission from the operation of the mill.

6.3.5 Impact on Water Resources

The total water requirement of the mill and colony is being met from River Cauvery that is within the sanction level of State Government. The pump house is located on the banks of river Cauvery. The water requirement after PM#3 is about 53,970 m 3/day. Government of Tamilnadu has permitted the company to draw the necessary water from river Cauvery for the existing plant and its colony. After implementation of the MEP, the impact on the surface water resources will marginally increase by about 18%. However, this requirement shall be still within the approval for drawl of water from River Cauvery. Similarly, there will not be any impact on the groundwater resources, as there is no proposal to use groundwater for the raw water requirements.

6.3.6 Impact on Water Quality

Details of the existing water balance and wastewater streams along with the details of the existing Wastewater Treatment Plant have been described in Chapter 4. The wastewater after the MEP for discharge to irrigation will be about 41,405 m 3/day. This will be treated in the existing Wastewater Treatment Plant. A part of the treated wastewater will be utilised within the plant for plantation and other non-process, non-critical purposes. About 24,000 m 3/day of treated wastewater is recycled back for non-critical, non- process applications.

Wastewater Generation from the Project

The wastewater generation from the proposed project includes wastewaters from paper machine, pulp mill and blow down from the coal fired boiler and mill sanitary waste. The total pollution load (plant and domestic) generated after an implementation of MEP project is discussed in Chapter 4.

The volume of wastewaters after the implementation of proposed MEP of the plant will be about 65,405 m 3/day. After recycling of 24,000 m 3/day, about 41,405 m 3/day of treated wastewater will be discharged on land for irrigation. The mill proposes to treat the waste water as described in Chapter 4.

C6-18 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Wastewater Characteristics and Disposal

The quality of treated wastewater from the WWTP outlet shall continue to meet the discharge standards for inland surface water and shall be used for irrigation.

The treated wastewaters from the mill shall be well within the prescribed standards of GSR-422 (E). The existing WWTP will be adequate for treatment of the wastewater generated post MEP. The quality of treated wastewaters would be in the same range as similar treatment is proposed with reduction in pollution load. The treated wastewater shall continue to be disposed of for irrigation as is being done now.

Ground water analysis around the area of discharge does not show any negative impact due to land treatment. The sodium absorption ratio (SAR) of the soil has not increased above the allowable levels for irrigation. The mill is parallelly, under the guidelines of Tamil Nadu Agricultural University, implementing the soil enrichment measures to maintain the SAR.

As the wastewater after treatment will be well within the prescribed limits, no harmful effect of wastewater is anticipated on the ground water and on soil.

6.3.6.1 Impact on Ground Water Quality

Since the treated wastewater will be released on land for irrigation, there is a possibility for the wastewater to percolate into ground and affect the groundwater quality. However, the treated wastewater is free from any hazardous substances.

Only during three (3) years since inception, the region has experienced acute draught condition and hence more ground water was used due to less availability of treated water for irrigation. This had resulted in increased levels of TDS and hardness in ground water due to leaching and recycling. After the implementation of MEP the treated wastewater quality in terms of TDS and sodium and chlorides will improve because of steps outlined like oxygen delignification, bleaching and steps taken for spillage control. Further, the possibility of occurrence of acute draught condition for three consecutive years is remote and normal monsoon will result in better recharging of ground water, leading to better ground water quality.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-19 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

However, TNPL has undertaken studies in collaboration with Dept. of Environmental Sciences, Tamilnadu Agricultural University (TNAU) for ‘Evaluation of Long-Term Effect on the Utilisation of TNPL Effluent Water for Irrigation’. The study revealed slightly saline conditions of the ground water. TNAU suggested some management strategies, like utilising saline tolerant sugarcane varieties to be grown in the fields. The studies are in progress. TNPL is committed to implement the recommendations of TNAU. With implementation of the recommendations of TNAU, no long-term effect on groundwater is envisaged.

6.3.6.2 Impact on Soil Characteristics

The present soil analysis data reveals that important parameters like electrical conductivity, sodium absorption ratio have come down to tolerable limits due to leaching after normal monsoon. After implementation of MEP, the wastewater quality will further improve. However, TNPL will have to regularly monitor the soil quality and ground water quality and take effective, corrective action, as suggested by Tamil Nadu Agriculture University for the TEWLIS areas.

6.3.7 Impact of Solid Waste

The details of the solid wastes from the proposed MEP have been described in chapter 4.

The additional solid waste from the proposed coal fired boiler is mainly fly ash and bottom ash. Chipper dust, pith and fibre sludge generated from wastewater treatment plant are the other solid wastes.

The total fly ash generating from the existing units is about 240 tpd. The fly ash generated is being given to cement manufacturers. As the same practice is proposed for the post MEP scenario, no adverse impacts are associated due to ash generation. The lime sludge, being disposed of as purge for non-process elements, especially silica, is being given to cement manufacturers. In post MEP operations, the mill contemplates installation of a cement mill, as a separate unit, to utilise the fly ash and excess lime sludge for cement manufacture. The pith and chipper dust generated are being used as fuel in boilers. The additional WWTP sludge will be dewatered in dewatering machine and the cake will be given to small cardboard manufacturers.

Hence, no adverse impacts due to solid waste generation are envisaged.

C6-20 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

6.3.8 Impact on Noise Levels

Any industrial complex in general consists of several sources of noise in clusters or single. This clusters/single source may be housed in the buildings of different dimensions made of different materials or installed in open or under sheds. The material of construction implies different attenuation coefficients. In order to predict cumulative noise levels post MDP, the propagative noise modelling has been done. For computing the noise levels at various distances with respect to the plant site, noise levels are predicted using a user-friendly model, the details of which are elaborated below.

6.3.8.1 Details of Noise model

Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation

For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient from the source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound pressure levels generated by noise sources decrease with the increase in distance from the sources due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path.

For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation

 r  (1) = −  2  L p 2 L p 1 20 log    r 1 

where Lp 2 and Lp 1 are Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at

distances r 2 and r 1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be determined at various locations by the following equation

= ( (Lp1 10/ ) + ( Lp 2 10/ ) + ( Lp 3 10/ ) ) L p(total ) 10 log 10 10 10 ...... (2)

where, L p1 , L p2 , L p3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-21 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Based on the above equations, a user-friendly model has been developed. The details of the model are as follows:

 Maximum number of sources is limited to 200

 Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source

 Model is designed to take topography or flat terrain

 Co-ordinates of the sources are expressed in metres

 Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model

 Output of the model is in the form of isopleths

 Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the

measured L eq levels.

6.3.8.2 Input for the Model

The existing mill is presently in operation at the project site. The noise generating units in the plant include chipper house, power boilers, recovery boilers and compressor house. The source noise levels at various units are given Table 6.9. The cumulative noise levels due to plant are computed using the in-house developed model.

TABLE 6.9 EXPECTED NOISE LEVELS

Sl. No. Location Noise Levels dB(A) 1 Boiler house (#1 to #4) 95.0 2 Power boiler house (#5) 85.0 3 Paper Machine #1 75.0 4 Paper Machine #2 75.0 5 Chipper House 90.0 6 Compressor house 85.0 7 Proposed recovery boiler 80.0

6.3.8.3 Presentation of Results

The model results are discussed below and are represented through contours in Figure 6.3. The predicted model results at plant boundary are tabulated in Table 6.10.

C6-22 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 6.10 PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AT PLANT BOUNDARY

Plant Boundary Noise Level Sl. No. Direction Distance (m) dB(A) 1 N 700 40.0 2 NE 835 38.5 3 E 890 38.0 4 SE 1400 35.2 5 S 480 43.5 6 SW 670 41.9 7 W 425 45.8 8 NW 730 40.7

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-23 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 6.3 NOISE DISPERSION CONTOURS

C6-24 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

6.3.8.4 Observation

It may be seen from Figure 6.3 that noise levels ranging between 35 to 46 dB(A) are limited to work zone only.

The nearest settlement is Pugalur. The baseline noise level (L eq ) recorded at this location is about 53.4 dB(A) and the predicted noise level at this location due to the operation of the plant is likely to be <40.0 dB(A). Therefore, the noise due to operation of the project will not have any bearing on the baseline noise levels due to masking effect.

The operators, workers and other personnel within the plant, however, have to be provided with personal protective measures. According to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, the allowable noise level for the workers is 90 dB(A) for 8 hours’ exposure a day. Therefore, adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear plugs to the workers working in high noise areas need to be provided. In addition, reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas could be achieved by adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which the equipment are to be located, adding sound barriers, use of enclosures with suitable absorption material, etc. Further, in addition to the in-plant noise control measures, all the open areas within the plant premises and all along the plant boundary are to be provided with adequate greenbelt to diffuse the noise levels.

6.3.9 Impact On Ecology

The baseline flora and fauna have been described in Chapter 5.

6.3.9.1 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The impact on terrestrial ecology will be due to emission of SO 2. This pollutant at a very low dose acts as atmospheric fertiliser for the vegetation. However, at higher doses, it is injurious to both vegetation as well as animals.

In the existing plant as well as the proposed project, adequate stack heights have been provided for proper dispersion of pollutants. As

described earlier, the resultant concentrations of SO 2 after the MDP scheme will be 31.8 µg/m 3, well within the AAQ standards for residential and rural areas. Therefore, the impact of these emissions on the surrounding ecosystem will be insignificant .

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-25 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Extensive plantation comprising pollutant resistant species has been done in and around the project site, which will serve as not only a pollution sink but also as a noise barrier. It is expected that with the adoption of these mitigatory measures, the impact due to operation of the expanded plant will be minimal on the terrestrial ecosystem.

6.3.9.2 Impact on Aquatic Ecology

The treated wastewater, after conforming to the norms of Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board, will be discharged for irrigation needs. The treated water finally be utilised for agricultural utilities. There will not be any disposal of treated water either into the river or any other aquatic body. Hence, there will not be any impact on the aquatic ecology.

6.3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

The impacts of the MEP of the plant would begin to be felt with the start-up of the operational activities. There will be better economic opportunities available in the area.

The socio-economic impacts discussed in the construction phase of the proposed MEP will also be manifested during the operational phase in the following manner:

 Consumer prices of indigenous produce and services, land prices, house rent rates and labour prices may not increase, as the migration of population due to the proposed project in the surrounding area is negligible.

 Increase in employment due to large flow of financial and material resources through increased business, trade & commerce and service sector.

6.3.10.1 Impact on Human Settlement

The impact of the MEP on human settlements will be varied but not significant. There will be no rehabilitation and resettlement.

In addition to the first order employment creation and income generation, there is also second order job and income implications for the host community, termed as multiplier and linkage effects.

C6-26 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

6.3.10.2 Impact on Civic Amenities

The impact of economic development on civic amenities will be substantial. The area already has a good network of roads, communication and provision of amenities like water supply in the village areas. Although the level of existing communications and support services in the area are adequate, proposed project would strengthen these services. The overall impact is considered to be positive.

6.3.10.3 Impact on Health

Impact on health, if any, will be primarily due to air pollution i.e. emissions

of SPM and SO 2 and noise generation. Adequate air pollution and noise pollution control measures will be provided to conform to regulatory standards. Employees working in high noise work place would be provided with personal protective devices like ear plugs/ear muffs to ensure that there will not be any adverse impact on human health.

The environmental management and emergency preparedness plans are proposed to ensure that the probability of undesired events and consequences are greatly reduced and adequate mitigation is provided in case of an emergency.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C6-27 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

(This page intentionally left blank)

C6-28 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

7.1 Introduction

The industrial development in the study area needs to be intertwined with judicious utilisation of natural resources within the limits of permissible assimilative capacity. The assimilative capacity of the study area is the maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged in the environment without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution, dispersion and removal due to natural physico-chemical and biological processes. The Environment Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable development in the area of the project site. Hence, an all encompassing plan is envisaged. The identification and quantification of impacts based on scientific and mathematical modelling have been presented in Chapter 6. At the industry level, pollution control measures include in-built process control measures and also external control measures at the end of the pipeline before pollutants are discharged into the receiving bodies.

It has been evaluated that the study area has not been affected adversely with present industrialisation and urbanisation. The proposed MEP is likely to provide new economical fillip, not only for the study area but also for the region as a whole. Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall EMP for the study area are planned for implementation so as to improve the supportive capacity of the study area and also to preserve the assimilative capacity of the receiving bodies.

The environmental attributes in the region include air quality, water quality, ecology and public health. The Management Action Plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to the possible extent with the available and affordable technology followed by treatment measures.

The following mitigation measures are recommended in order to synchronise the economic development of the study area with the environmental protection of the region:

 Explore the techno-economic feasibility of adoption of the latest technology in the pulp and paper making process

 Explore the techno-economic feasibility of adopting reuse and recycling technologies to reduce generation of waste to the extent possible and optimise the operating cost

 Consider installation of various state-of-the-art equipment to reduce emission/discharge of the pollutants

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Continue the Research & Development (R&D) activities for further reduction in the specification consumption of natural resources like raw material and water.

7.2 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

A summary of anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures are given in Table 7.1.

TABLE 7.1 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

Discipline Potential Impacts Probable Source Mitigation Remarks Measures

Construction Phase Impact

Water Quality Suspended solids Loose soil at During monsoon _ due to soil run-off construction site season, run off from during heavy construction site will precipitation be routed to a temporary sedimentation tank for settlement of suspended solids.

Air Quality Dust concentration Construction Sprinkling of water The impact will be vehicular movement in the construction minimum, since the area and unpaved approach road has been roads. Proper constructed and the maintenance of levelling of site is vehicles will be already done, as this is done. an existing unit.

Noise Noise level Construction Equipment will be Workers will be provided equipment kept in good with necessary condition to keep the protective equipment noise level within 90 e.g. earplug, earmuffs. dB(A).

Operational Phase Impact

Water Quality Ground water Discharge of treated Adequate treatment The treated wastewater quality wastewater on land facilities have been from the existing plant is for irrigation provided as well as utilised for irrigation. The control of pollutants treated wastewater is in at source by conformity with the adopting modern stipulated standards. cleaner technologies, so that the treated wastewater conforms to the regulatory standards..

C7-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Discipline Potential Impacts Probable Source Mitigation Remarks Measures

Improvements in existing wastewater treatment plant aided by additional in-plant measures is proposed

Air Quality SPM, and SO 2 Stack emissions High efficiency ESP Green belt development levels in ambient will be installed to programmes will be air. control particulates further expanded around from the proposed the plant in the available new stacks. area. Adequate stack The resultant air quality height will be will conform to the provided for the stipulated standards. proper dispersion of Particulate emission pollutants for the from stacks will be kept new recovery boiler below and lime mud 150 mg/Nm³. reburning kiln. Dust suppression measures will be implemented in the coal stack yard, bagasse yard and pith yard.

Solid waste Soil & ground From the WWTP/ The additional solid Maximum efforts will be water utility areas / wastes generated made for contamination Process viz.,fly ash and utilising/recycling solid WWTP sludge is wastes. non-hazardous in nature. The sludge from WWTP will be given to small industries for manu- facture of cardboards. Fly ash generated is used for cement mills. Mill intends to install a cement plant for utilising the fly ash generated along with excess lime sludge.

Ecology

Terrestrial Impact on plant Emissions from Emission will be Ambient air quality will species stack controlled through be within the prescribed ESP as well as limits dispersed through appropriate stack height.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Discipline Potential Impacts Probable Source Mitigation Remarks Measures

Aquatic Impact on the Discharge of treated No discharge of The treated wastewater aquatic life of waste water wastewater to the quality will be within the water bodies surface water. stipulated norms and will be utilised for irrigation purposes.

Noise Noise levels in Equipment in Equipment will be Employees working in the plant area main plant and designed to high noise areas auxiliaries conform to noise would be provided levels prescribed earplugs/ earmuffs as by regulatory protective device. agencies

Provision of greenbelt and plantation would further help in attenuating noise

Demography Strain on Influx of people / The additional Overall socio- and existing mill employees as manpower economic status of Socio- amenities like well as proposed to be the area is expected economics housing, water contractors’ deployed would to improve. sources and employees/ be very less and sanitation, labourers would be medical and temporary, No infrastructure significant impact facilities. is envisaged.

Additional facilities will be developed by the project proponents.

7.3 Environmental Management during Construction

The impacts during the construction phase on the environment would be basically transient in nature and are expected to reduce gradually and return to status quo ante on completion of the construction activities.

7.3.1 Site Preparation

Since the project site terrain is flat and already levelled during the construction of the existing plant, there will not be any requirement for levelling. There is no vegetation on the land identified for MEP. During dry weather conditions, dust may be generated by activities like excavation and transportation through unmetalled roads. The dust will be suppressed using water sprinkling and may continue after completion of construction. The industry shall make provision for water sprinklers.

C7-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

As soon as construction is over, the surplus earth shall be utilised to fill up low-lying areas, the rubbish shall be cleared and all un-built surfaces be reinstated. Appropriate vegetation shall be planted and all such areas shall be landscaped. Hazardous materials [e.g. acids, paints etc] shall be stored in proper and designated areas. Efforts shall be made by the contractor to provide fuel to the construction workers.

7.3.2 Water Quality

During construction period, the groundwater quality may be affected due to the construction activities and loosening of topsoil. The water table is not shallow at the present project site. The chemicals (paints, oils etc) shall be stored in designated areas. There is no likelihood of groundwater contamination as there will not be any process wastewaters discharge on to the ground during construction.

7.3.3 Air Quality

During construction period, which will be for a brief duration during the initial stage of the implementation of the MEP, there will be generation of dust and NOx emissions. This may be attributed to construction activity and vehicular movement. The transport vehicles using petrol or diesel shall be properly maintained to minimise smoke in the exhaust. Water sprinkling on roads shall be done to reduce the dust emission.

7.3.4 Noise

The noise impact on the surrounding population during the construction phase will be within the acceptable limits. High noise generating equipment, if used, shall be sparingly operated during the nighttimes to minimise any discomfort to the nearby residents. Community noise levels are not likely to be affected because of the vegetation and likely attenuation due to the physical barriers already present. Earmuffs shall continue to be provided to the workers and their use by workers shall be enforced.

7.3.5 Ecological Aspects

As the new equipment for MEP is proposed to be located within the existing mill premises, no effect on vegetation is anticipated. Similarly, there will not be any impact on the aquatic ecology as there are no aquatic bodies in the plant site. A comprehensive greenbelt programme, which is already in placed, shall improve the ecological condition.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

7.3.6 Socio-Economic Aspects

The land required for the construction under the proposed project is already under the possession of TNPL. There will not any resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be any adverse socio-economic implications. The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as there will be direct /indirect employment generation during construction and operational phases.

7.3.7 Storage of Hazardous Materials

The hazardous materials used during the construction may include petrol, diesel, welding gas and paints. These materials shall be stored and handled according to the guidelines specified under Hazardous Chemicals Storage, handling and transportation Rules of EPA, 1989 rules. As TNPL is already implementing the relevant requirements of Hazardous Chemicals Storage, handling and transportation Rules of EPA, 1989 rules. Storage of hazardous materials shall not pose any problem.

7.3.8 Site Security

Adequate security arrangement shall continue to be made to ensure that the local inhabitants and the stray cattle are not exposed to the potential hazards of construction activities. As the existing plant is already under operation, there will not be any risk.

7.3.9 Migrant Labourers

Safe and secure camping area shall be provided for the migrant labourers during the construction period. Adequate arrangements shall be made for water supply and sanitation.

Existing toilet facilities for workers to allow proper standards of hygiene shall be available for usage by migrant labourers. These facilities are already connected to a septic tank.

7.3.10 Facilities to be provided by the Labour Contractor

TNPL is following good systems for procedures for occupation safety. The contractor engaged by TNPL shall ensure the following facilities to construction work force:

C7-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

First Aid

At work place, first aid facilities shall be maintained at a readily accessible place where necessary appliances including sterilised cotton wool etc. shall be available. Ambulance facilities already available with mill shall be utilised to take injured person to the nearest hospital.

Potable Water

Sufficient supply of water fit for drinking shall be provided at suitable places.

Sanitary Facility

Within the precinct of every work place, latrines and urinals shall be provided at accessible place. These shall be cleaned at least twice during working hours and kept in a good sanitary condition. The contractor shall conform to the sanitary requirement of local medical and health authorities at all times.

Canteen

A canteen on a moderate scale shall be provided for the benefit of workers.

Security

TNPL shall provide necessary security to work force.

7.4 Management during Operational Stage

The EMP in the design stage endeavours to mitigate the problems related to health, safety and environment at the process technology selection stage and at the design stage. The proposed plant facilities shall be designed taking into account all applicable standards/norms both for regulatory and safety purposes.

The design specifications for control of pollution at the source level shall be implemented during the plant construction. Further, the environmental mitigation/management measures specified by TNPCB and MoEF in their clearances for the plant shall also be implemented after MDP wherever applicable. The specific control measures related to gaseous emissions, liquid wastewater discharges, noise generation, solid waste disposal etc. are described below.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

7.4.1 Air Quality Management

7.4.1.1 Overview

The main sources of air pollution from the proposed project have been discussed in Chapter 4 and the impacts on air environment due to the operation of the plant have been discussed in Chapter 6.

The SPM levels show a marginal decrement while it may be observed that

the maximum SO 2 incremental concentration due to the proposed MDP is 3.8 µg/m 3 .

It may be seen that the ambient air quality are well within the ambient air quality limits prescribed by the CPCB.

It may also be noted that the predicted concentrations reflect the worst- case scenario and actual concentrations will be much lower because of the usage of the efficient ESP. It is, therefore, expected that the actual GLCs will be much lower than those predicted in the worst-case scenario.

7.4.1.2 Reduction of Emission at Source

Major pollutants envisaged from the MEP project are SPM and SO 2 along

with NO X. The baseline ambient air quality levels in the project area are within the permissible limits specified by regulating agency. The following methods of abatement shall be employed for the air pollution control:

 Sufficient stack height will be provided as per the regulatory agencies for wider dispersal of pollutants

 Development and maintenance of a greenbelt around the plant area, and plantation along the internal roads within the plant premises

 All the internal roads have been asphalted during the implementation of the existing plant. Therefore, vehicular movement may not generate fugitive dust. However, water spraying shall be practised frequently at all dust generating and coal handing areas.

7.4.1.3 Stack Gas Monitoring

The emissions from the stack shall be monitored for exit concentration of

SPM, SO 2 and NO X by using Stack Monitoring Kit. Sampling ports shall be provided in the stack according to CPCB guidelines.

C7-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

7.4.1.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The concentration of SPM, RPM, SO 2 and NOx in the ambient air at the project boundaries shall be monitored. The existing monitoring network can be continued after the implementation of MEP.

7.4.1.5 Meteorological Observations

A Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment shall be provided at the plant site to record temperature, relative humidity, wind speed and rainfall within the plant premises. The meteorological station shall be operated on hourly basis.

7.4.2 Water and Wastewater Management

The main sources of wastewater generation and their impacts have been discussed in Chapters 4 and 6 respectively. The existing wastewater treatment plant details have been discussed in Chapter 4. The wastewater treatment plant, after envisaged improvements, shall be adequate after the MDP of the plant.

However, additional in-plant measures shall be taken to minimise the discharge of pollutants into the stream leading to wastewater treatment plant. This has been discussed in detail under Chapter 4.

7.4.2.1 Water Conservation

There will not be any tapping of groundwater source for the fresh water requirement. The total water requirement of the mill and colony is met from River Cauvery.

7.4.2.2 Monitoring of Water Consumption

Continuous efforts shall be made to reduce the water consumption and thereby to reduce the wastewater generation. Flow meter shall be installed for all the major water inlets and the flow rates shall be continuously monitored. Periodic water audits shall be conducted to explore the possibilities for minimisation of water consumption. All fresh water consumption points shall be provided with flow meters.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

7.4.2.3 Wastewater Treatment

Wastewater Generation from the Project

The wastewater generation from the MEP includes wastewater from paper machine, pulp mill, chemical recovery plant and power plant. The individual wastewater sources and their respective quantity and quality have been dealt in Chapter 4.

Wastewater Treatment

The existing wastewater treatment system is designed to treat all liquid wastewater generated so as to meet the standards as mentioned in the Gazette of India Extraordinary, Ministry of Environment and Forests Notification, 1993 and TNPCB norms. It is anticipated that the pollution load and hydraulic load on WWTP during the post MEP operations would be treated in the existing wastewater treatment plant, with additional facilities envisaged. The WWTP shall be adequate to treat the wastewater generated with additional facilities.

7.4.2.4 Final Disposal of the Liquid Waste

The treated wastewater from the WWTP will be used for irrigation. At present, the wastewater quality meets the prescribed standards. As similar treatment is proposed in the proposed project, the treated water would also meet the prescribed standards. Also, the extent of pollution due to the disposal of the treated wastewater for irrigation was assessed by collecting samples from the bore wells and it was found that there is not much impact on groundwater due to discharge of treated wastewater.

The mill has been continuously making efforts by improving the quality of wastewater entering the treatment plant, in order to achieve better and improved efficiencies of operation.

7.4.2.5 TNAU Study on Wastewater Disposal

TNPL has undertaken studies in collaboration with Dept. of Environmental Sciences, Tamilnadu Agricultural University (TNAU) for ‘Evaluation of Long- Term Effect on the Utilisation of TNPL Effluent Water for Irrigation’. The study revealed slightly saline conditions of the ground water.

TNAU is conducting on farm trial to develop management strategies for poor quality water, like utilising saline tolerant sugarcane varieties to be grown in the fields. The on farm field trial was initiated and the studies are in progress.

C7-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TNAU is also exploring the possibility of reuse of agricultural drainage water. For conducting field experiment, a site has been selected for managing the agricultural drainage water using Sequential Biological Concentration Systems (SBCS). The studies are in progress.

TNPL is committed to implement the recommendations of TNAU.

7.4.2.6 Monitoring of Waste Treatment

The treated wastewater shall be monitored regularly for the flow rate and quality to identify any deviations in performance of wastewater treatment plant. Wastewater monitoring instruments shall be provided in the wastewater discharge line. Flow integrators shall be utilised properly both at the plant intake and discharge point.

7.4.3 Noise Level Management

Overview

The impact of noise generated due to plant operations has been estimated in Chapter 6. The incremental noise levels due to the operation of the plant will be <40 dB (A) at 1 km distance from the plant site and on the surrounding villages of the plant in all the directions. The ambient noise levels in the region are within permissible limits and are envisaged to be within the permissible limits even after commissioning of the proposed facilities.

The specifications for procuring major noise generating machines/ equipment shall include built-in design requirements to have minimum noise levels meeting Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA) requirement. Appropriate noise barriers/shields, silencers etc. shall be provided in the equipment, wherever feasible. As far as possible, noise emanating from noisy equipment shall be adequately attenuated by enclosures, insulations etc.

Recommendations

 Efficient flow techniques for noise associated with high fluid velocities and turbulence shall be used (like reduction in noise generated by control levels in both gas and liquid systems achieved by reducing system pressure to as low as possible)

 Inlet and outlet mufflers shall be provided which are easy to design and construct

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Ear plugs shall be provided to workmen working near high noise generating sources

 The distance between the source of noise and the receiver shall be increased by altering the relative orientation of the source of the noise and the receiver. Noise level at the receiver end reduces in inverse proportion to the square of the distance between the receiver and the source

 The mill site compound shall have adequate greenbelt.

7.4.4 Solid Waste Management

No major solid wastes are generated in the process. All the solid wastes generated in the mill are from the auxiliary plants. They include lime sludge from the recausticising section, ash from the boilers, sludge from the wastewater treatment plant and chip dust from the chipper house. The WWTP sludge will be given to small units to manufacture cardboards. Similarly, fly ash generated will be used in cement manufacture. The lime sludge generated shall be re-burnt in the lime mud reburning kiln. The chipper dust generated will be used as fuel in boilers. Only the lime sludge as purge for non process elements and silica, shall be supplied free of cost for cement manufacture. The mill intends to install a cement mill for utilising the fly ash generated along with excess lime sludge.

7.4.4.1 Fly ash Utilisation

Fly ash generated due to coal burning is nowadays finding its way into various products like cement and bricks. The fly ash generated can be utilised for various purposes. The mill plans to install a cement kiln for reusing the fly ash along with excess lime sludge, conforming to the latest regulations on utilisation of fly ash, by MoEF.

7.4.5 Management of Hazardous Chemicals

During storage and handling of hazardous chemicals, all precautions shall be taken to avoid spillage of chemicals. All these chemicals shall be stored in well-ventilated areas. Personal protective equipment shall also be provided at the work place.

The mill already has a set procedure for disposal of Hazardous waste. This shall be strictly followed.

C7-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

7.4.6 Green Belt Development

Implementation of afforestation programme is of paramount importance for any industrial development. In addition to augmenting the present vegetation, it will also check soil erosion, make the eco-system more complex and functionally more stable, make the climate more conducive and restore water balance. It may also be employed to bring areas with special problems under vegetal cover and prevent further land deterioration.

The main objective of the greenbelt is to provide a barrier between the plant and the surrounding areas. The greenbelt helps to capture the fugitive emissions and to attenuate the noise generated in the plant, apart from improving the aesthetics of the plant site. Extensive plantation has been done under greenbelt development for the existing plant. A greenbelt has been developed and well maintained along the internal roads, colony, and at the plant area.

Geometry of planting of trees is more important in order to have effective wind break by the plantation. For an effective greenbelt, a mixture of tree species is necessary and some shrubs and grasses shall be inter-cropped. As far as possible, there shall be no gaps in the greenbelt. Where opening is imperative, alignments to the roads shall be such that open gaps are prevented to overcome funnelling action of wind.

The main purpose of greenbelt development is to contribute to the following factors:

 To attenuate noise levels generated from the plant

 To trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions

 To act as pollution sink for gaseous emissions

 To maintain ecological balance

 To prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation.

 To improve the aesthetics of the plant area

7.4.6.1 Plantation Developed by TNPL

The following are the details of the plantation developed by TNPL.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Sl. No Location Plantation Area Trees

1 Factory premises 66 acres 58385

2 Colony area 98 acres 55137

3 Model Farm 20 acres 20100

4 TEWLIS area 190 acres 1,90,000

Apart from this the company is dedicated to involve in greening of dry barren wasteland under tree crops. To continue the greening programme in and around factory, a tree planting programme is being conducted every year on June 5, the Environmental Day. Around 50,000 tree saplings of more than 100 species of various flowering and avenue trees are being raised in the Horticulture nursery at colony and the same will be planted within 5 km radius of the mill area during this monsoon period.

Approximately 58385 tree saplings have already been planted in a total area of nearly 66 acres inside the premises, which has been brought under the greenbelt development. Adequate attention is paid to the plantation of trees, their maintenance and protection.

TABLE 7.3 FACTORY AREA COVERED UNDER PLANTATION Sl. No. Location Total area (m 2) 1 From the plant gate to sludge gate 27051 2 Coal yard to sludge gate upto WWTP 125400 3 Auto garage to wood yard and WWTP 113100 around tippler and old, new lagoons up to bagasse gate Total sq. metres 265551 Total area of plantation (Acres) 66 (approx)

Source: Data collected from TNPL

7.4.6.2 Adequacy of Existing green belt

The greenbelt within the plant premises is 66 acres out of total plant area of 375 acres, which is about 18% of the total area. To increase the greenbelt cover to a stage of 25 % of the total area, action is being initiated to bring 34 more acres of land under greenbelt and about 22,500 seedlings will be planted.

The following table gives the year-wise greenbelt development programme at the plant premises.

C7-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

This shall be followed, while developing the greenbelt in future.

TABLE 7.4 PROPOSED YEAR WISE GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT Sl. No. Year Number of plants 1 I 5000 2 II 5000 3 III 5000 4 IV 5000 5 V 2500 Total 34000

7.4.6.3 Future Greenbelt Development

The future greenbelt development shall be integrated with the existing plantation. A detailed programme for greenbelt is suggested below:

Design of Green Belt

The following guidelines shall be considered in green belt development:

 Shrubs and trees shall be planted in encircling rows around the project site

 The short trees (<10 m height) shall be planted in the first rows (towards plant side) of the greenbelt. The tall trees (>10 m height) shall be planted in the outer rows (away from plant side)

 Planting of trees in each row shall be in staggered orientation (Triangular form)

 In the front row, shrubs consisting of Albizia sp., Peltoforum etc. shall be grown

 Since the trunks of the tall trees are generally devoid of foliage, it will be useful to have shrubs in front of the trees so as to give coverage to this portion

 The spacing between the trees shall be maintained slightly less than the normal spaces, so that the trees may grow vertically and slightly increase the effective height of the greenbelt.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Plant Species for Green Belt

While selecting the plant species for the proposed greenbelt, the following points have been taken into consideration:

 Shall be a fast growing type

 Shall have a thick canopy cover

 Shall be perennially green

 Shall be preferably of native origin

 Shall have a large leaf area index.

Criteria for Selection of Species

Species to be selected shall fulfil the following specific requirements of the area:

 Tolerance to specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to eco-physiological conditions

 Rapid growth

 Capacity to endure water stress and climate extremes after initial establishment

 Differences in height and growth habits

 Pleasing appearances

 Provision of shade

 Large bio-mass and leaves number to provide fodder and fuel

 Ability to fix atmospheric Nitrogen

 Improvement of waste lands

 Improvement in landscape aesthetics.

 To undertake plantation on site for different purposes, following steps will be involved:

 Raising of seedlings in nursery

 Preparation of pits and preparing them for transfer of seedlings

C7-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 After-care.

Raising of Seedlings in Nursery

Seedlings shall be raised in nurseries. Adequate number of surplus seedlings shall be available considering 10% mortality in seedlings. Healthy seedlings shall be ready for transfer to permanent location before rainy season.

 Preparation of pits and preparing them for transfer of seedlings

 Standard pit size would be 1 m x 1 m x 1 m

 The distance between pits would vary depending on their location

 The pits shall be filled using good soil from nearby agricultural fields (3 parts) and farm yard manure (1 part)

 Rhizobium commercial preparation (1 kg/1000 kg)

 BHC powder, if the soil inhabits white ants (Amount variable)

 The pits shall be watered prior to plantation of seedlings.

Recommended Species for Plantation

Based on climate and soil characteristics of the study area, some species are recommended for plantation. The climate of the region is extreme where there is heavy rainfall as well as extreme heat and soil temperature is very high in summer. Hence, in order to have a ground cover, some fast growing species, which do not require watering, have been recommended for mass plantation. The species are as presented below:

 Terminalia catapa

 Saraca indica

 Dalbergia sisoo

 Delonix regia

 Pongamia pinnata

 Peltoforrum ferrusinum

The above mentioned species not only resist water stress but also cover the ground quickly and also have wider soil adaptability.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-17 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

For protecting the environment from dust, temperature, chemicals and emissions, the following species are recommended:

Plant species for Plant Area and its Boundary

 Sesbania suevalens

 Eucalyptus hybrid

 Casuarina equisettifolia

 Albizia procera

 Leucena leucophloe

 Azadiracta indica

 Terminalia catapa

 Tecoma stans

 Erythrina indica

Plant species for Township Area

 Cassia fisuta

 Bauhinia variegata

 Tecoma stans

 Tamarindus indica

 Mangifera indica

 Orodoxia regia

Plant species for Roadside and Avenue plantation

 Albizia procera

 Albizia lebbeck

 Anthocephalus cadamba

 Terminalia catapa

 Callistemon sp

 Dillinea indica

C7-18 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Plant species for vacant spaces

 Azadirachta indica

 Dalbergia sissoo

 Delonix regia

 Peltoforrum ferrusinum

 Cassia siamea

 Ficus benghalensis

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C7-19 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

(This page intentionally left blank)

C7-20 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

8 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

An Environment Impact Assessment study comprises two main phases:

 Assessment of the present situation with regards to environmental problems

 Prediction of the impact of future development and/or alteration in the operation and design of existing installations.

Usually, as in the case of the study, an Impact Assessment study is carried over short period of time and the data cannot bring out all variations induced by the natural or human activities. Therefore, regular monitoring programme of the environmental parameters is essential to take into account the changes in the environment. The objective of monitoring is:

 To verify the result of the impact assessment study in particular with regard to new developments

 To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical

 To check or assess the efficacy of the controlling measures

 To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the Impact Assessment study, do not become critical through the commissioning of new installations or through the modification in the operation of existing facilities

 To check assumptions made with regard to the development and to detect deviations in order to initiate necessary measures

 To establish a database for future Impact Assessment Studies for new projects.

The attributes, which merit regular monitoring, are specified below:

 Air quality

 Water and wastewater quality

 Noise levels

 Soil quality and

 Ecological preservation and afforestation.

Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited C8-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The post MEP monitoring to be carried out at the industry level is discussed below.

8.1 Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Regular monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters is of immense importance to assess the status of environment during plant operation. With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring programme will serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the plant, to enable taking up suitable mitigatory steps in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can only be determined by monitoring. The following routine monitoring programme would therefore be implemented.

A comprehensive monitoring programme is suggested in Table 8.1.

TABLE 8.1 MONITORING SCHEDULES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

Sl Particulars Monitoring Method of Important No. Frequency Sampling Monitoring Parameters 1 Air Pollution & Meteorology Air Quality Stack Monitoring

Stacks at power -- On-line SPM, SO 2 and boilers, chemical NOx recovery boilers and lime kiln Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

4 locations around the Once in a month 24 hrs continuously SPM, RPM, SO 2, plant & Colony and NOx.

4 locations in Once in a 24 hrs continuously SPM, RPM, SO 2, surrounding villages Quarter and NOx. Meteorology Meteorological data to Daily Continuous Wind speed & be monitored at the monitoring direction, plant. temperature relative humidity and rainfall. 2 Water and Wastewater Quality Industrial \Domestic Waste water Outlet of WWTP Daily 24 hr composite pH, TDS, BOD, COD, TSS, and Temperature

C8-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Sl Particulars Monitoring Method of Important No. Frequency Sampling Monitoring Parameters Once in fortnight Composite AOX Once in a Composite As per GSR 422 E season Water quality in the study area i) Groundwater at Once in a month Grab pH, Hardness, least in 4 locations at Conductivity, TDS, wastewater discharge alkalinity, SAR area Once in a Grab Comprehensive season Analysis ii) Surface water Once in a month Grab pH, Hardness, Cauvery river Conductivity, DO, TDS, alkalinity Once in a month Grab Comprehensive Analysis 3 Industrial Noise Levels Near administrative Once in 3 Spot noise meter Noise levels in office months dB(A) Paper machine Once in 3 Spot noise meter Noise levels in months dB(A) Turbine house Once in 3 Spot noise meter Noise levels in months dB(A) Power boiler/ Once in 3 Spot noise meter Noise levels in compressor months dB(A) Recovery boiler Once in 3 Spot noise meter Noise levels in months dB(A) Ambient Noise Levels Near the Plant Once in each Spot noise meter Noise levels in Boundary season dB(A) Pugalur 4 Soil Quality 1) Adjacent to Solid Once in every Grab Physico-chemical waste dump area six months parameters and 2) Plant site metals.

The environmental monitoring cell shall co-ordinate all monitoring programmes at site and data thus generated shall be regularly furnished to the State regulatory agencies.

Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited C8-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

8.1.1 Air Quality Monitoring

8.1.1.1 Stack Monitoring

The emissions from all the stacks will be monitored regularly. The exit gas temperature, velocity and pollutant concentrations will be measured. Any unacceptable deviation from the design values will be thoroughly examined and appropriate action will be taken. Air blowers will be checked for any drop in exit gas velocity.

8.1.1.2 Workspace Monitoring

The concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace environment will be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than threshold limit values are observed, the source of fugitive emissions will be identified and necessary measures taken. In particular, the airborne dust levels will be measured in the coal and bagasse handling area. If the levels are high, dust suppression measures like water sprinkling will be initiated.

8.1.1.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The ground level concentrations of SPM, SO 2 and NO X in the ambient air outside the project boundaries will be monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise will be investigated to identify the causes, and appropriate action will be initiated. The existing arrangement for suppressing dust levels by provision of barricades separating the mill and the colony shall be continued in future as well. Additional green belt shall be developed for minimising dust propagation.

8.1.1.4 Meteorological observations

The mill has a permanent automatic meteorological station installed within the premises. At this meteorological station, the meteorological parameters like dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperature, wind speed and wind direction are monitored and recorded.

This information will be used in air pollution modelling and will be helpful in on-site and off-site emergency management.

8.1.2 Water and Wastewater Quality

To ensure a strict control over the water consumption, flow meters are installed for all major inlets. All leakages and excess will be identified and rectified. In addition, periodic water audits will be conducted to explore further possibilities for water conservation.

C8-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

8.1.2.1 Monitoring of Wastewater Streams

All the wastewater streams in the mill are regularly analysed for flow rate and physical and chemical characteristics. Such analysis is carried out for wastewater at the source of generation, at the point of entry into the wastewater treatment plant and at the point of final discharge. These data are properly documented and compared against the design values for any necessary corrective action.

8.1.2.2 Monitoring Receiving Body of Treated Wastewater

The treated wastewater is used for land irrigation, for sugarcane and paddy cultivation through a lift irrigation scheme. A part of it is also used for the greenbelt developed in and around the mill.

As a matter of abundant precaution, to safeguard the soil quality against any long-term adverse effects, representative soil samples are taken from the lands irrigated with the treated wastewater and analysed for physical, chemical and microbiological characteristics, on a routine basis. All the data are documented and scientifically evaluated to detect any degradation of soil quality. In the unlikely event of any degradation being detected, wastewater discharge on the identified land will be discontinued and appropriate action will be taken to redeem the soil quality.

8.1.2.3 Monitoring of Groundwater

In order to detect any contamination of the groundwater from the mill wastewater, groundwater samples are taken from representative locations, on-site as well as off-site periodically and analysed for necessary corrective actions, if any.

8.1.3 Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment such as paper machine, turbine house, power boiler/compressor, recovery boiler etc will be monitored. The frequency will be once in three months in the work zone. Similarly, ambient noise levels at plant boundary will be monitored once in three months.

Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited C8-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

8.2 Infrastructure for Environmental Protection

8.2.1 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables

Air Quality and Meteorology

The following equipment and consumable items are available with TNPL.

 High volume samplers

 Stack monitoring kit

 Central Weather Monitoring Station

 Spectrophotometer (visible range)

 Single pan balance

 Flame photometer

 AOX analyser

 Relevant Chemicals.

Water and Wastewater Quality

The sampling shall be done as per the standard procedures laid down by IS:2488. The following equipment and consumables are available with TNPL.

 BOD incubator

 COD reflex set-up

 Refrigerator

 Oven

 Stop watch

 Thermometer

 pH meter

 Distilled water plant

 Pipette box

 Titration set

C8-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Dissolved oxygen analyser

 Relevant chemicals.

Noise Levels

Noise monitoring shall be done utilising an integrating sound level meter to record noise levels in different scales like A-weighting with slow and fast response options.

Soil Quality

The analysis of soil quality parameters requires the following additional equipment and consumables:

 Augur

 Sieve apparatus

 Infiltrometer

 Relevant chemicals

Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited C8-7 Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited C8-8(This page intentionally left blank)

C8-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & VIMTA Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

PREPARED BY SPB-PC & VIMTA LABS LIMITED C9-19 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT AND TRAINING

9.1 Introduction

Environmental policy at industry level is defined formally for the TNPL plant. Standards stipulated by various regulatory agencies to limit the emission of pollutants in air and water are being followed at the plant site. Similarly, as a mandatory practice, an Environment Statement is being prepared each year at the industry level in order to allow efficient use of resources in the production processes and to reduce the quantities of wastes per unit of product. However, this it itself is not sufficient since this does not provide an assurance that its environmental performance not only meets, but will continue to meet, the legislative and policy requirements.

Hence, Environmental Management Systems (EMS) are practised at the industry level for ensuring that the activities, products and services of the region conform to the carrying capacity (supportive and assimilative capacity). This is based on Bureau of Indian Standards Specification IS:13967 (1993): Environmental Management Systems - Specification (equivalent to British Standard BS 7750). Since this is more in line with the quality systems, it is recommended that the industry shall improve EMS as outlined in the following sub-chapters.

The TNPL plant has an Environmental Management System. The EMS - its set-up, role and responsibilities - is given subsequently.

9.2 Formation of an Environmental Management System

The environmental management system (EMS) is formed by the industry, which will emphasise prevention of pollutants’ generation, even while enabling it to maximise its beneficial effects and minimise its adverse effects. It shall:

 Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from the industry's existing/proposed activities, products and services to determine those of significance

 Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from incidents, accidents and potential emergency situations

 Identify the relevant legislative and regulatory requirements

 Enable priorities to be identified and pertinent environmental objectives and targets to be set

 Facilitate planning, control, monitoring, auditing and review activities to ensure that the policy is complied with

 Allow periodic evaluation to suit changing circumstances, remain relevant. Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

9.3 Implementation of an Environmental Management System

9.3.1 Commitment

It is essential that the top management of the industry is committed to development of its activities in an environmentally sound manner and supports all efforts in achieving this objective.

Experience has shown that all attempts to change the processes and production methods, which reduce/prevent wastes and inefficient use of resources ultimately result not only in environmentally sound practices but also better business returns.

9.3.2 Preparatory Environmental Review

TNPL has a formal EMS, to establish its current position with regard to environment through a preparatory environmental review. This shall cover four areas:

 Legislative and regulatory requirements

 Evaluation and registration of significant parameters and their environmental impacts

 Review of existing environmental management practices and procedures

 Assessment of feedback from investigation of previous environmental incidents and non-compliance with legislation, regulations or existing policies and procedures.

The resulting report should address:

 The nature and extent of problems and deficiencies

 The priorities to be accorded to rectify them

An improvement programme designed to ensure that the personnel and material resources required are identified and made available.

C9-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

9.3.3 Environmental Policy

The industry's management shall actively initiate, develop and support the environmental policy, which is relevant to its activities, products and services and their environmental effects.

The environmental policy shall

 Be consistent with the occupational health and safety policy and other industrial policies (such as quality policy)

 Indicate which of the industrial activities are covered by the environmental management system

 Be communicated and implemented at all levels of the industry

 Be available publicly.

The TNPL is has a well defined Environmental Policy, which is given in Plate-I. Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

PLATE I ENVIRONMENT POLICY OF TNPL

C9-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

9.3.4 Organisation and Personnel

To facilitate the implementation of the EMS, one of the most important aspects relate to the organisation and personnel. The related issues are:

 Definition and documentation of the responsibility, authority and interrelations of key personnel involved in the implementation of the environmental policy, objectives and environmental management system

 Identification of the in-house verification requirements and procedures including resources and personnel

 Appointment of a Management Representative (MR)

 Communication to employees at all levels, of the importance of compliance with the environmental policy, their roles and responsibilities in achieving compliance, the potential consequences of departures from the specified procedures, and identification and provision of appropriate training

 Establishment and maintenance of procedures to ensure that contractors are made aware of the EMS requirements and provisions.

TNPL is has a well-defined Organization for Environment Management System. This is given in Plate-II.

9.3.5 Environmental Effects

The industry shall establish and maintain procedures to:

 Receive, document and respond to internal as well as external communications concerning environmental aspects and management

 Identify, examine and evaluate the environmental effects of its activities under normal and abnormal/emergency situations (including risk assessment) and compile significant effects in a register

 Record all legislative, regulatory and other policy requirements and codes in a register.

Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

C9-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

9.3.6 Environmental Objectives and Targets

The objectives should be set with a view to realising gradual and steady improvements in environmental performance through application of best available and economically viable technology.

The areas targeted for improvement should be those where improvements are most necessary to reduce risks (to environment and industry) and liabilities. These should be identified through cost-benefit analysis wherever practicable and should be quantitative and achievable.

9.3.7 Environmental Management Programme

The establishment of an environmental management Programme is the key to compliance with the industry's environmental policy and achievement of the environmental objectives and targets.

It should designate the responsibility for achieving the targets at each level and the means thereof. It should deal with the actions required for the consequences of the industries past activities as well as address the life cycle of development of new products so as to effectively control adverse impacts.

9.3.8 Environmental Management Manual and Documentation

The documentation is intended to provide an adequate description of the EMS. The manual is expected to provide a reference to the implementation and maintenance of the system.

9.3.9 Operational Control

The management responsibilities shall be defined to ensure that the control, verification, measurement and testing of environmental parameters within the industry are adequately co-ordinated and effectively performed.

The control, verification, measurement and testing should be made through documented procedures and work instructions defining the manner of conducting activities, the absence of which can lead to violation of the environment policy. Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

In the event of non-compliance, procedures for investigation of the causative mechanism should be established and the factors reported for corrective actions.

9.3.10 Environmental Management Records

The industry maintains a well-established system of records to demonstrate compliance with the environmental management systems and the extent of achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition to the other records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records shall address the following:

 Details of failure in compliance and corrective action

 Details of incidents and corrective action

 Details of complaints and follow-up action

 Appropriate contractor and supplier information

 Inspection and maintenance reports

 Product identification and composition data

 Monitoring data

 Environmental training records

 House keeping.

9.3.11 Environmental Management Audits

The management audits are required to determine whether the activities conform to the environmental management systems and are effective in implementing the environmental policy. They may be internal or external, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in relevant disciplines is also required. Appropriate audit programmes and protocols should be established.

9.3.12 Environmental Statement

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests in April 1993, an Environmental Statement is being prepared annually at the industry level at TNPL. This includes the consumption of total resources (raw material and water per tonne of product), quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water) discharged, quantity of hazardous and solid waste generation, pollution abatement measures, conservation of natural resources and cost of production vis-à-vis the investment on pollution

C9-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

abatement. This may be an internal or external audit, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in relevant disciplines is also required.

The intention of this statement is:

 To identify the process/production areas where resources can be used more efficiently through a comparison with the figures of a similar industry (thereby reducing the consumption per unit of product)

 To determine the areas where waste generation can be minimised at source and through end of pipe treatment (thereby reducing the wastes generated and discharged per unit of product)

 To initiate a self-correcting/improvement system through an internal analysis to achieve cost reduction through choice of superior technology and more efficient practices.

9.3.13 Environmental Management Reviews

The senior management shall periodically review the Environmental Management System (EMS) to ensure its suitability and effectiveness. The need for possible changes in the environmental policy and objectives for continuous improvement should be ascertained and revisions made accordingly.

EMS based on the above objectives has been formulated and is being implemented at the industry level.

9.4 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested in the Environment Management Plan shall be implemented so as to reduce the impact on environment due to the operation of the plant. In order to facilitate easy implementation, mitigation measures are phased as per the priority implementation. The priority of the implementation schedule is given in Table 9.1 . Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 9.1 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Time Implementation Schedule Recommendations Requirement Immediate Progressive Air pollution control Before commissioning v - measures of respective units Water pollution Before commissioning v - control measures of the plant Noise control Along with the v - measures commissioning of the plant Ecological Stage wise v v preservation and implementation upgradation Note: [v] indicates implementation of recommendations.

9.5 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Management

9.5.1 Organisation at the plant

The existing facilities and organisation for environmental management shall be utilised for the proposed facilities also after augmentation if required. Presently, a Chief Manager (Env) is in-charge of the Environment Management cell supported by Deputy Manager (Env), Sr. shift engineers/ shift engineers, environmental lab assistants and area charge men & operators of the wastewater treatment plant. He reports on a daily basis to GM (Operations) on environmental activities.

The department shall be the nodal agency to co-ordinate and provide necessary services on environmental issues during construction and operation of the project. This environmental group is responsible for implementation of environmental management plan, interaction with the environmental regulatory agencies, reviewing draft policy and planning. This department interacts with MoEF, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and other environment regulatory agencies. The department shall also interact with local people to understand their problems and to formulate appropriate community development plan.

The Director (Operations) of the mill oversees the total environmental activity on a day-to-day basis. All individual departments are accountable for the environment in and around them and individual departments take prompt action in dealing with environmental issues.

C9-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited Rapid EIA Study

9.6 Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management

The total investment of the proposed expansion of the mill is Rs.725 crores. Out of this, Rs. 10 crores are planned for investment on pollution control systems and environmental management. Rapid EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

(This page intentionally left blank)

C9-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 Introduction

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various hazards (unsafe conditions) that exist in the plant. On the other hand, risk analysis deals with the identification and quantification of risks the plant equipment and personnel are exposed to, due to accidents resulting from the hazards present in the plant.

Hazard and risk analysis involves very extensive studies, and requires a very detailed design and engineering information. The various hazard analysis techniques that may be applied are hazard and operability studies, fault-tree analysis, event-tree analysis and failure and effects mode analysis.

Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and assessment of risks the neighbouring populations are exposed to as a result of hazards present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure probability, credible accident scenario, vulnerability of populations etc. Much of this information is difficult to get or generate. Consequently, the risk analysis is often confined to maximum credible accident studies.

The common terms used in Risk Assessment and Disaster Management are elaborated below:

"Risk " is defined as a likelihood of an undesired event (accident, injury or death) occurring within a specified period or under specified circumstances. This may be either a frequency or a probability depending on the circumstances.

The term " Hazard " is defined as a physical situation, which may cause human injury, damage to property or the environment or some combination of these criteria.

"Hazardous substance " means any substance or preparation which, by reason of its chemical or physico-chemical properties or handling, is liable to cause harm to human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro organisms, property or the environment.

"Hazardous process " is defined as any process or activity in relation to an industry, which may cause impairment to the health of the persons engaged or connected therewith, or, which may result in pollution of the general environment.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

"Disaster " is defined as a catastrophic situation that causes damage, economic disruptions, loss of human life and deterioration of health and health services on a scale sufficient to warrant an extraordinary response from outside the affected area or community. Disasters occasioned by man are factory fire explosions and release of toxic gases or chemical substances etc.

"Accident " is an unplanned event, which has a probability of causing personal injury or property damage or both.

"Emergency " is defined as a situation where the resources out pass the demand. This highlights the typical nature of emergency "It will be after experience that enough is not enough in emergency situations. Situations of this kind are avoidable but it is not possible to avoid them always.

"Emergency preparedness " is one of the key activities in the overall management. Preparedness, though largely dependent upon the response capability of the persons engaged in direct action, will require support from others in the organisation before, during and after an emergency.

In the sections below, the identification of various hazards, probable risks in the plant, Maximum Credible Accident Analysis and Consequence Analysis are addressed, giving a broad identification of risks involved in the plant. Based on the risk estimation for fuel and chemical storage, a Disaster Management Plan has been also been presented.

10.2 Scope of the Study

The study aims to analyse the risk associated with the following scenarios in the plant:

 Hazards associated with various processes

 Raw material storages in the plant

The risk analysis assessment study covers the following:

 Identification of potential hazard areas

 Identification of representative failure cases

 Visualisation of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and explosion

 Assessment of the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the impact zones from the accidental scenarios

C10-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Assessment of the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimisation and disaster mitigation points of view

 Specific recommendations on the minimisation of the worst accident possibilities

 Preparation of broad Disaster Management Plan (DMP), On-site and Off-site Emergency Plan, which includes Occupational and Health safety Plan.

10.3 Approach to the Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accident consisting of an event or sequence of events. The descriptions of the tasks of the various phases involved in risk analysis are detailed below.

10.3.1 Phase I: Hazard Identification

The technique employed for the Hazard Identification is MCA analysis. MCA stands for Maximum Credible Accident or, in other words, an accident with maximum damage distance, which is believed to be probable. MCA analysis does not include quantification of the probability of occurrence of an accident. In practice, the selection of accident scenarios for MCA analysis is carried out on the basis of engineering judgement and expertise in the field of risk analysis, especially in accident analysis. Process information study and relevant data would help in the identification of hazard prone section of the plant. Inventory analysis and Fire and Explosion and Toxicity Indices and following Manufacture, Storage and Transport of Hazard Chemicals Rules of Government of India (GOI Rules, 1989) are also the methods used in hazard identification.

Release of chemicals in the atmosphere from the storage section is then studied by building scenarios on the basis of the properties of the chemicals and the consequences are calculated in terms of damage distances. This study helps in plotting the damage contours on the detailed plot plan of the unit in order to visualise the magnitude of occurrence of a particular event.

10.3.2 Phase II: Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

Ranking of each unit in hazard prone sections are done based on the Fire and Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) and Inventory Analysis. Safety of hazard prone section is studied using Preliminary Hazard Analysis.

A Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA) is a part of the U.S. Military Standard System Safety Programme requirements. The main purpose of this

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-3 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

analysis is to recognise hazards early, thus saving time and cost, which could result from major plant redesigns, if hazards are discovered at a later stage. Many companies use a similar procedure under a different name. It is generally applied during concept or early development phase of a process plant and can be very useful in site selection. PHA is a precursor to further hazard analysis and is intended for use only in the preliminary phase of plant development for cases where past experience provides little or no insight into any potential safety problems, e.g. a plant with a new process. The PHA focuses on the hazardous materials and major plant elements since few details on the plant design are available. The PHA is sometimes considered to be a review where energy can be released in an uncontrolled manner. The PHA consists of formulating a list of hazards related to:

 Plant equipment

 Interface among system components

 Operative environment

 Operations (tests, maintenance, etc.)

 Facility

 Safety equipment

The results include recommendations to reduce or eliminate hazards in the subsequent plant design phase. The PHA is followed by evaluation of MCA and Consequence Analysis.

10.3.3 Phase III and IV: Disaster Management Plan (DMP) and Emergency Preparedness Plan (EPP)

Safety review of especially vulnerable process units is covered in these phases. This helps in reducing the risk qualitatively, while the outcome of phase I and phase II would reduce risk in quantitative terms. Emergency Preparedness Plan (EPP) based on the earlier studies is covered in this activity. Customarily, major industries do have their EPPs and, therefore, there is a need to look into those in detail and recommend a realistic EPP based on the above studies.

C10-4 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.4 Hazard Identification

10.4.1 Introduction

Identification of hazards in a pulp and Paper mill is of primary significance in the analysis, quantification and cost effective control of accidents involving chemicals and process. A classical definition of hazard states that hazard is in fact the characteristic of system/plant/process that presents potential for an accident. Hence, all the components of a system/plant/ process need to be thoroughly examined to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an accident.

Typical schemes of predictive hazard evaluation and quantitative risk analysis suggest that hazard identification step plays a key role (Figure- 10.1). Estimation of the probability of an unexpected event and its consequences form the basis of quantification of risk in terms of damage to property, environment or personnel. Therefore, the type, quantity, location and conditions of release of a toxic or flammable substance have to be identified in order to estimate its damaging effects, the area involved, and the possible precautionary measures required to be taken. The following two methods for hazard identification have been employed in the study:

 Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (GOI Rules, 1989)

 Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based on relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).

10.4.2 Identification of Major Hazardous Units

10.4.2.1 Classification of Major Hazardous Substance

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes: Flammable substances, Unstable substances and Toxic substances. Flammable substances require interaction with air for their hazard to be realised. Under certain circumstances, the vapours arising from flammable substances when mixed with air may be explosive, especially in confined spaces. However, if present in sufficient quantity, such clouds may explode in open air also. Unstable substances are liquids or solids, which may decompose with such violence, so as to give rise to blast waves.

Finally, toxic substances are dangerous and cause substantial damage to life when released into the atmosphere. The ratings for a large number of

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-5 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. Hazardous characteristics of the major flammable/toxic materials employed in different stages of production are listed in Table 10.1.

10.4.3 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989

Following accidents in the chemical industry in India over a few decades, a specific legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Govt. of India in 1989 in conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred to therein as GOI Rules, 1989. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations, the rules employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosive properties of chemicals.

10.4.4 Analysis of Units of Different Processes

A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities of storage has been carried out, to determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and the applicable rules are identified. The project does not envisage use of any hazardous materials, other than those being presently used.

The post PM#3 operations do not pose any major hazard due to the installation of PM#3.The mill is equipped with an established system in the unlikely hood of any unforeseen thing occuring.

The results are summarised in Table 10.2.

TABLE 10.1 PROPERTIES OF STORAGE FUELS/CHEMICALS USED AT THE PLANT

°C %

Sodium Hydroxide Corrosive 2 mg/m 3 1390 318.4 ------

Furnace Oil Flammable 5 mg/m 3 216 -25 66 -- --

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

C10-6 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 10.1 PROTOCOL FOR IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-7 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 10.2 APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE

Sr. Chemical/ Fuel Listed in Total Quantity Threshold Quantity (T) No. Schedule (Tonnes) for Application of Rules

5,7-9,13-15 10-12

1 Furnace Oil 3(1) 150 KL 25 MT 200 t

10.4.5 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, Explosion and Toxicity Indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE&TI would help to make a quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas. However, this does not provide precise information. Respective Material Factor (MF), General Process Hazard (GPH) Factors, Special Process Hazard (SPH) Factors are computed using standard procedure of awarding penalties based on storage handling and reaction parameters. Before hazard indexing can be applied, the installation in question should subdivided into logical, independent elements or units. In general, a unit can logically be characterised by the nature of the process that takes place in it. In some cases, the unit may consist of a plant element separated from the other elements by space or by protective walls. A plant element may also be an apparatus, instrument, section or system that can cause a specific hazard. For each separate plant process, which contains flammable or toxic substances, a fire and explosion index F and/or a toxicity index T may be determined in a manner derived from the method for determining a fire and explosion index developed by the Dow Chemical Company.

10.4.5.1 FE and TI Methodology

Dow's Fire and Explosion (F&E) Index is a product of material factor (MF) and hazard factor (F3). While MF represents the flammability and reactivity of the substances, the hazard factor (F3), is itself a product of general process hazards (GPH) and special process hazards (SPH). An accurate plot plan of the plant, a process flow sheet and Fire and Explosion Index and Hazard Classification Guide published by Dow Chemical Company are required to estimate the FE&TI of any process plant or a storage unit.

C10-8 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.4.5.2 Computations and Evaluation of Fire and Explosion Index

The Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) is calculated from -

F&EI = MF x (GPH) x (SPH)

The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as per the criteria given below:

F&EI Range Degree of Hazard

0-60 Light 61-96 Moderate 97-127 Intermediate 128-158 Heavy 159-up Severe

10.4.5.3 Toxicity Index (TI)

The toxicity index is primarily based on the index figures for health hazards established by the NFPA in codes NFPA 704, NFPA 49 and NFPA 345 m.

10.4.5.4 Classification of Hazard Categories

By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of the following three categories established for the purpose.

TABLE 10.3 FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Category Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) Toxicity Index (TI) I F&EI < 65 TI < 6 II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10 III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10

Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for the three hazard categories.

10.4.5.5 Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units

Based on the GOI Rules, 1989, the hazardous fuels and chemicals used by the plant were identified. Fire and Explosion are the likely hazards, which may occur due to the fuel and chemical storage. Hence, Fire and Explosion Index has been calculated for in-plant storage of Furnace Oil.

Detailed estimates of FE are given in Table 10.4.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-9 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

TABLE 10.4 FIRE & EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDICES FOR STORAGE FACILITIES

Sl. Chemical Quantity F&EI TI Category No.

1 Furnace Oil 250 KL 18.5 4.5 Light Tank 1

2 Furnace Oil 500 KL 20.3 4.5 Light Tank 2

10.5 Visualisation of MCA Scenarios

10.5.1 Introduction

A Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) can be characterised as an accident with a maximum damage potential, which is still believed to be probable.

MCA analysis does not include quantification of the probability of occurrence of an accident. Moreover, since it is not possible to indicate exactly a level of probability that is still believed to be credible, the selection of MCA is somewhat arbitrary. In practice, the selection of accident scenarios representative for an MCA Analysis is done on the basis of engineering judgement and expertise in the field of risk analysis studies, especially accident analysis.

As an initial step in this study, a selection has been made of the processing and storage units and activities, which are believed to represent the highest level of risk for the surroundings in terms of damage distances. For this selection, the following factors have been taken into account:

 Type of compound viz. flammable or toxic

 Quantity of material present in a unit or involved in an activity

 Process or storage conditions such as temperature, pressure, flow, mixing and presence of incompatible materials.

In addition to the above factors, the location of a unit or activity with respect to adjacent activities is taken into consideration to account for the potential escalation of an accident. This phenomenon is known as the domino effect. The units and activities, which have been selected on the basis of the above factors, are summarised and accident scenarios are established in Hazard Identification studies, while effect and damage calculations are carried out in MCA analysis studies.

C10-10 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.5.2 Methodology

The following steps are employed for visualisation of MCA scenarios:

 Chemical inventory analysis

 Identification of hazardous processes in individual units

 Identification of chemical release and accident scenarios

 Analysis of past accidents of similar nature to establish credibility to identified scenarios

 Short-listing of MCA scenarios.

10.5.3 Common Causes of Accidents

Based on the analysis of past accident information, common causes of major chemical plant accidents are identified as:

 Poor house keeping

 Improper use of tools, equipment, facilities

 Unsafe or defective equipment facilities

 Lack of proper procedures

 Improvising unsafe procedures

 Failure to follow prescribed procedures

 Jobs not understood

 Lack of awareness of hazards involved

 Lack of proper tools, equipment, facilities

 Lack of guides and safety devices

 Lack of protective equipment and clothing

10.5.4 Failures of Human Systems

An assessment of past chemical accidents reveals human factor to be the cause for over 60% of the accidents, while the rest are due to other plant component failures. This percentage will increase if major accidents alone are considered for analysis.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-11 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Major causes of human failures reported are due to:

 Stress induced by poor equipment design, unfavourable environmental conditions, fatigue, etc.

 Lack of training in safety and loss prevention

 Indecision in critical situations

 Inexperienced staff being employed in hazardous situations.

Often, human errors are not analysed while reporting accidents and accident reports only provide information about equipment and/or component failures. Hence, a great deal of uncertainty surrounds analysis of failure of human systems and consequent damages.

10.5.5 Short Listing of MCA Scenarios

Based on the storage quantities and properties of the chemicals, the hazard identification has been done and given as follows for carrying out MCA analysis studies:

 Vapour Cloud Explosion due to vessel rupture

 Pool fire due to rupture/leakage and accumulation

 Toxic dispersion due to gas/vapour leaks pool evaporation

 General fire hazards.

10.5.6 Conclusion

Results of FE&TI analysis show that the storage of furnace oil falls into light category of fire and explosion index with light toxicity index.

10.6 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

10.6.1 Introduction

Preliminary Hazards Analysis (PHA) is based on the philosophy "PREVENTION IS BETTER THAN CURE". How safe are the operations? Safety is relative and implies freedom from danger or injury. But there is always some element of danger or risk in anything we do or build. When is a chemical process facility considered safe? This calls for identification of hazards and quantification of risk, and further suggests hazard-mitigating measures, if necessary.

C10-12 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

The purpose of the preliminary hazards analysis is to identify early in the design process the potential hazards associated with, or inherent in a process design, thus eliminating costly and time consuming delays caused by design changes made later. This also eliminates potential hazard points at the design stage itself.

Hence, preliminary hazards analysis is more relevant when a plant is at design/construction stage. This technique, applied early in the project life cycle, helps to eliminate hazards and, thus to avoid costly design modifications later. This analysis fortifies the proposed process design by incorporating additional safety factors into the design criteria.

10.6.2 Methodology

An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components, utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities, and safeguards.

10.6.3 Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This is followed by consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally, the vulnerable zones are plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. The various process activities involved in the plant operations are:

 Raw material handling and preparation

 Chemical pulping

 Bleaching of pulp

 Chemical recovery from black liquor

 Stock preparation

 Paper making and processing

Except for chemical pulping, pulp bleaching and chemical recovery from black liquor, all the other processes involve purely mechanical operations that are not complex or hazardous.

Chemical pulping involves the cooking of the raw material with sodium hydroxide and sodium sulphite in the vapour phase at temperatures below

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-13 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

200°C. No major hazardous are expected from this process. Sodium hydroxide is mildly hazardous chemical.

Pulp bleaching involves the application of ClO 2 and H 2O2 and oxygen to the pulp. All these bleaching agents are very strong oxidants and have health hazards. Bleaching is carried out in more or less ambient conditions and the bleaching process cannot be considered as a major hazardous process. The hazards associated with the bleaching agents are more pronounced at the storage facilities since the inventories are substantial.

The chemical recovery plant consisting of following film evaporator in which the black liquor containing the spent chemicals from the pulp mill is concentrated to 75% and is then fired in a chemical recovery boiler for recovery of chemicals. Thus, this process cannot be considered as a major hazardous process.

Hence, no major hazards with potential for any emergency situation exist in the process plants.

The other hazards related to the Captive Power Plant and storage areas are given below in Table 10.5 and the PHA for the whole plant in general is given in Table 10.6.

TABLE 10.5 PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS AND STORAGE AREAS

Equipment Process Potential Hazard Provision

Turbine Converts Mechanical and fire Layout of equipment/ pressure in the hazards. machinery is done in steam into accordance to mechanical factory and electrical energy. inspectorates.

Generator Converts Mechanical hazards and As above mechanical fire hazards in lube oil energy into system, cable galleries, electrical energy. short circuits

Power transformers -- Fire and explosion All electrical fittings and cables are provided as per the specified standards.

Switch yard control -- Fire in cable galleries As above room and switch

Furnace oil storage Used as fuel for Fire & explosion Leaks detection lime kiln system will be provided.

C10-14 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

TABLE 10.6 PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT IN GENERAL

PHA Category Description of Recommendation Provision Plausible Hazard

Environmental If there is any -- All electrical fittings and factors leakage and cables are provided as eventuality of per the specified source of ignition. standards. All motor starters are flame proof.

Highly inflammable A well-designed fire Fire extinguisher of small nature of the protection including size and big size are chemicals may protein foam, dry provided at all potential

cause fire hazard powder, CO 2 fire hazard places. In in the storage extinguisher should be addition to the above, fire facility. provided. hydrant network is also provided.

10.6.4 Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCAA)

Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catastrophes, causing possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the methodology to determine the consequences of the release of such substances and the damage to the surrounding area, by means of models.

It is intended to give an insight into how the physical effects resulting from the release of hazardous substances can be calculated by means of models and how vulnerability models can be used to translate the physical effects in terms of injuries and damage to exposed population and environment. A disastrous situation is, in general, due to outcome of fire, explosion or toxic hazards in addition to other natural causes, which eventually lead to loss of life, property and ecological imbalance.

Major hazards posed by flammable storage can be identified, taking recourse to MCA analysis. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiation, toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion, etc. A host of probable or potential accidents of the major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling of the hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon the effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be assessed. Figure-10.2 depicts the flow chart for MCA analysis.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-15 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The MCA analysis involves ordering and ranking of various sections in terms of potential vulnerability. Inventory analysis and fire, explosion and toxicity index (FE&TI) are the two techniques employed for hazard identification process (Figure-10.3).

The storage of furnace oil in the plant premises mainly poses flammable and explosion hazards due to unwanted release or leakage of fuel. Consequence Analysis is basically a study of quantitative analysis of hazards due to various failure scenarios. It is that part of risk analysis, which considers failure cases and the damage caused by these failure cases. It is done in order to form an opinion on potentially serious hazardous outcome of accidents and their possible consequences. The reasons and purpose of Consequence Analysis are many, like:

 Part of Risk Assessment

 Plant Layout/Code Requirements

 Protection of other plants

 Protection of the public

 Emergency Planning

 Design Criteria (e.g. loading on Control Room)

The results of the Consequence Analysis are useful for getting information about all known and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario occurs in the plant and also to get information as to how to deal with the possible catastrophic events. It also gives the workers in the plant and people living in the vicinity of the area, an understanding of their personal situation.

10.6.4.1 Damage Criteria

The fuel storage and unloading at the storage facility may lead to fire and explosion hazards. The damage criteria due to accidental release of any hydrocarbon arise from fire and explosion. The vapours of these fuels are not toxic and hence no effects of toxicity are expected.

Tank fire would occur if the radiation intensity is high on the peripheral surface of the tank leading to increase in internal tank pressure. Pool fire would occur when fuel collected in the dyke due to leakage gets ignited.

C10-16 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Fire Damage

A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffusion flame. This releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A part of the heat is radiated while the rest is convicted away by rising hot air and combustion products. The radiations can heat the contents of a nearby storage or process unit to above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire. The radiations can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire fighters located within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know beforehand the damage potential of a flammable liquid pool likely to be created due to leakage or catastrophic failure of a storage or process vessel. This will help to decide the location of other storage/process vessels, decide the type of protective clothing the workers/fire fighters need, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone, the fire extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for the nearby storage/process vessels. Table 10.7 gives the damage effect on equipment and people due to thermal radiation intensity.

TABLE 10.7 DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES

Sl. Incident Radiation Type of Damage Intensity 2 No. (kW/m ) Damage to Equipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to process 100% lethality in 1 min. equipment 1% lethality in 10 sec.

2 25.0 Minimum energy required 50% Lethality in 1 min. to ignite wood at indefinitely Significant injury in long exposure without a 10 sec. flame

3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation -- intensity allowed on thermally unprotected adjoining equipment

4 12.5 Minimum energy to ignite 1% lethality in 1 min. with a flame; melts plastic tubing

5 4.5 -- Causes pain if duration is longer than 20 sec, however blistering is unlikely (First degree burns)

6 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long exposures

Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-17 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 10.2 FLOW CHART FOR MCA ANALYSIS

C10-18 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 10.3 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PROCESS

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-19 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The effect of incident radiation intensity and exposure time on lethality is given in Table-10.8.

TABLE 10.8 RADIATION EXPOSURE AND LETHALITY

Radiation Intensity Exposure Time Lethality Degree of Burns (kW/m 2) (seconds) (%)

1.6 -- 0 No Discomfort even after long exposure 4.5 20 0 1st 4.5 50 0 1st 8.0 20 0 1st 8.0 50 <1 3rd 8.0 60 <1 3rd 12.0 20 <1 2nd 12.0 50 8 3rd 12.5 -- 1 -- 25.0 -- 50 -- 37.5 -- 100 --

Damage Due to Explosion

Explosion is a sudden and violent release of energy accompanied by the generation of pressure wave and a loud noise. The rate of energy release is very large and has potential to cause injury to the people, damage the plant and nearby property etc. The effect of over-pressure can directly result in deaths to those working in the direct vicinity of the explosion. The pressure wave may be caused by a BLEVE (Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Cloud) or Vapour Cloud explosion.

TABLE 10.9 DAMAGE DUE TO PEAK OVER PRESSURE

Human Injury Structural Damage Peak Over Type of Damage Peak Over Type of Damage Pressure (bar) Pressure (bar)

5 - 8 100% lethality 0.3 Heavy (90% damage) 3.5 - 5 50% lethality 0.1 Repairable (10% damage) 2 - 3 Threshold lethality 0.03 Damage of Glass 1.33 - 2 Severe lung 0.01 Crack of Windows 1/3 damage 1 - 1 50% Eardrum - - rupture Source: Marshall, V.C. (1977) ' How lethal are explosives and toxic escapes' .

C10-20 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.6.5 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis

10.6.5.1 Fuel Storage

The plant has two furnace oil storage tanks of capacity 250 KL and 500 KL respectively. In case of fuel released in the area catching fire, a steady state fire will ensue. Failures in pipeline may occur due to corrosion and mechanical defect. Failure of pipeline due to external interference is not considered, as this area is licensed area and all the work within this area is closely supervised with trained personnel.

10.6.5.2 Modelling Scenarios

Based on the consumption of fuels and chemicals, the following failure scenario Table-10.10 for the Pulp and Paper Mill have been identified for MCA analysis.

TABLE 10.10 SCENARIOS CONSIDERED FOR MCA ANALYSIS

Sl. Fuel/Chemical Quantity of storage Pool Fire No.

1 Failure of Furnace Oil tank 1 250 KL *

2 Failure of Furnace Oil tank 2 500 KL *

Note: * considered for modelling

10.6.5.3 Methodology

Fires could occur due to presence of ignition source at or near the source of spill or could occur due to flashback upon ignition of the travelling vapour cloud.

For the present study, the scenarios under consideration assume that the peak level of radiation intensity will not occur suddenly. Based on the past experience, it is found that 20-30 minutes’ time will be required before a tank fire grows to full size. For radiation calculations, pool fire has been considered. From the above considerations, the criterion of 4.5 kW/m 2 has been selected to judge acceptability of the scenario. The assumptions for calculations are:

 It is not continuous exposure

 It is assumed that no fire detection and mitigation measures are initiated

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-21 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 There is not enough time available to warn the public and initiate emergency action

 Occurrence of secondary fire at public road and building is unlikely

 The effect of smoke on reduction of source radiation intensity has not been considered; therefore, hazard distances calculated tend to be conservative

 Shielding effect of intervening trees or other structures has not been considered. No lethality is expected from this level of intensity, although burn injury takes place depending on the time of exposure.

Based on the above assumptions, the storage facilities are assessed with respect to pool fires and toxic release. For MCA analysis, full tank storage capacities have been considered.

10.6.5.4 Details of Models Used for MCA Analysis

Pool Fire Model

Heat radiation programme RADN has been used to estimate the steady state radiation effect from various storages of fuel and chemicals at different distances. The model has been developed by VIMTA LABS LIMITED based on the equations compiled from various literature by Prof.J.P.Gupta, Department of Chemical Engineering, IIT Kanpur. The equations used for computations are described below.

The Rate of Burning

The main assumptions made in the calculations are:

 Pool area is circular

 Observer is at ground level

 Atmospheric absorption of thermal radiation is negligible

 Negligible wind in the vicinity of the flame; thus, uniform thermal radiation field radially and no flame tilt.

The burning velocity of a liquid pool is the rate at which the pool level decreases with time. The mass-burning rate is a related term, being a product of the burning velocity and the fuel liquid density. Extensive burn rate measurements have shown a definite relationship between the burning velocity and thermo chemical fuel properties, such as the ratio of the net heats of combustion and vapourisation. The single most readily available

C10-22 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

property that best correlates with these heats is the normal boiling point. Therefore, a simple expression for the burning velocity was obtained, covering a wide range of boiling points. It is important to note that the correlation developed is independent of the pool size, though in practice, it increases slightly with the pool size. In effect, it is assumed that there is a large, turbulent diffusion flame behaving as an optically thick gray body. This condition is satisfied for most pool fires exceeding 10 ft (3 m) in diameter. The equation to estimate the burning velocity is:

92.6 * e(-0.0043 T B ) * M * 10 -7 y = w ρ* 6 1

Where

y = Burning velocity or rate (m/s)

Mw = Molecular weight (kg/kgmol) r = Liquid specific gravity

Tb = Normal boiling point (° F).

The Pool Size

The diameter of the pool fire depends upon the release mode, release quantity (or rate) and the burning rate. In addition, if the spill occurs on land, the frictional resistance offered by the terrain will limit the spreading velocity of liquid. In the case of Continuous Spill , the liquid spreads and increases the burning area until the total burning equals the spill rate. This condition of equilibrium is represented by an equilibrium diameter given by the following equation:

V 1/2 Deq = 2 [ ] π y 2 Where

Deq = Steady state diameter of the pool for a continuous spill (m) V = Liquid spill rate (m 3/sec) y = Liquid burning rate (m/s)

This assumes that the dominant mode of transfer to the liquid pool comes from the flame and the burning rate is constant. This is a valid assumption for all liquid hydrocarbons whose boiling temperatures are above ambient. This is also true for liquefied hydrocarbon spills on water where heat transfer from water to the pool is relatively constant. This results in a higher burning rate. The equation, however, ignores the time dependent

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-23 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

heat transfer from substrate, such as when spill occurs on land where heat transfer from the land decreases with time. It is also assumed in deriving this equation that the mass balance is maintained within the burning pool, viz. burning rate = spill rate. Hence, the loss of liquid due to percolation through the soil or dissolution in the water column is not included. It is important to note that the equilibrium diameter does not represent the maximum diameter of the pool. The excess volume spilled upto the time to reach the equilibrium diameter spreads further. The maximum diameter in metres is given by:

D max = 1.254 * Deq 3

The maximum pool diameter ( metres) and the time (seconds) to reach that for an Instantaneous Release is given by the following expressions:

2 2/11 V g 0.5 Dmax = 1.7892 [ * [ ]] 4 y Cd

3 2 V Cd 1/11 tmax = 0.5249 [ ] , 5 g2 y7

Where

Cd = Ground friction coefficient, for general use it is 0.5. V = Volume spilled (m 3) y = Burning velocity (m/s) g = Gravitational acceleration, 9.8 m/s 2

It should be noted that an instantaneous unconfined pool fire grows in size until a barrier is reached or until all the fuel is consumed.

The Emissive Power of the Flame

The emissive power of a large turbulent flame is a function of the black body emissive power and the flame emissivity. The black body emissive power, in turn, can be computed using Planck's law of radiation, if the mean radiation flame temperature is known. For incident flux calculations, however, it is more important to estimate the effective emissive power of the flame, which accounts for shielding by surrounding layers of smoke for liquid hydrocarbon fires. Based on observed values of emissive powers reported in the literature and other available data, the effective emissive

C10-24 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

power is correlated to the normal boiling point for selected fuels by the expressions:

E p = - 0.313 T BF + 117 6

or

E p = - 0.5634 T BC + 106.984 6a

Where:

2 Ep = Effective emissive power (kW/m )

TBF = Normal boiling point (°F)

TBC = Normal boiling point (°C)

Materials with boiling point above 30 oF typically burn with sooty flames. The emissive power from the sooty portion, based on limited data, is of the order of 20 kW/m 2. An effective sooty flame average emissive power can therefore be estimated by assigning relative areas of sooty and unshielded flame and calculating an area based average emissive power.

The Heat Received at a Particular Location

The incident flux at any given location is given by the equation: τ Qi = E p * * VF 7

Where

Qi = Incident flux, kW/m 2 t = Transmissivity VF = Geometric view factor

Transmissivity coefficient is mainly a function of the path-length (distance from observer to flame surface), relative humidity and flame temperature. For the calculation, it is set equal to 1 (more conservative) and the attenuation of thermal flux due to atmospheric absorption is not taken into account. This assumption provides a conservative hazard estimate, since the presence of water and carbon dioxide tends to reduce the incident flux at any given location. The view factor defines the fraction of flame that is seen by a given observer. This geometric term has been calculated as a function of distance from the centre for an upright flame approximated by a cylinder. It has also been assumed that the optimum orientation between the observer and the flame that yields a maximum view factor prevails. The resulting equation is as follows:

R p VF = 1.143 [ ]1.757 X 8

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-25 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Where

X = Distance from flame centre (m)

Rp = Pool radius (m)

Equation 9 for incident flux can be written as 1.757 R p Qi = 1.143 E p [ ] 9 X This gives the radiant flux intensity at any given distance 'X' measured from the centre of the pool. It can be used to calculate the water sprinkler load on the nearby units so as to remove the heat flux received and keep the contents cool.

The equation can be rewritten to determine the distance (or radius) 'X" for a specified 'Qi':

1.143 E p 1/1.757 X = [ ] Rp 10 Qi

E p 0.57 X = 1.079 [ ] R p 11 Qi

This can be used to determine the distance between two storage/process units so that the flux from a fire in one would be less than a specified value of 'Qi', which could set the second fire.

10.6.5.5 Properties of Fuels Considered For Modelling Scenarios-Pool Fire

The chemical data for various fuels used for modelling are compiled from various literatures and tabulated in Table 10.11.

TABLE 10.11 PROPERTIES OF FUELS CONSIDERED FOR POOLFIRE MODELLING

Sl. No. Chemical Molecular Final Boiling Point Density Weight Units kg/kg.mol oC kg/m 3 1 Furnace Oil 135 216 950

C10-26 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.6.6 Model Computations –Poolfire

Results and Discussion

The results of MCA analysis are tabulated indicating the distances for various damages identified by the damage criteria. Calculations are done for radiation intensities levels of 37.5, 25, 19, 12.5, and 4.5 kW/m 2, which are presented in Table 10.12. The distances computed for various scenarios are given in metres and are from the centre of the pool fire. The distances are plotted on the layout plan and shown in Figure 10.4.

TABLE 10.12 OCCURRENCE OF VARIOUS RADIATION INTENSITIES- POOL FIRE

Radiation and Effect Capacity Radiation Intensities (kW/m 2)/Distances (m) 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 4.5

Failure of FO Tank 1 250 KL 41.8 52.7 61.6 78.2 140.0 Failure of FO Tank 2 500 KL 53.8 67.8 79.3 100.6 180.2

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-27 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 10.4 (A) - RADIATION CONTOURS FOR FAILURE OF FURNACE OIL STORAGE TANK 1

C10-28 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 10.4 (B) - RADIATION CONTOURS FOR FAILURE OF FURNACE OIL STORAGE TANK 2

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-29 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Pool Fire Due to Failure of Furnace Oil Storage tank 1

The maximum quantity of storage of furnace oil in this tank will be 250 KL. The most credible failure is the rupture of the largest pipe connecting the storage tank. As the worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition.

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m 2 (100% lethality) occurs within the radius of the pool which is computed at 41.8 m in case of furnace oil tank on pool fire.

Based on the results of pool fire, it can be inferred that the vulnerable zone of 37.5 kW/m 2 intensity is likely to influence fuel storage and nearby area only.

The threshold limit for 50% and 1% lethality is 25 and 12.5 kW/m 2. From the results, it can be concluded that the vulnerable zone, in which the thermal fluxes above the threshold limit for 50% and 1% lethality, is restricted to 52.7 m and 78.2 m in case of tank on pool fire.

Similarly, the threshold limit for first degree burns is 4.5 kW/m 2 this vulnerable zone in which the thermal fluxes are above the threshold limit for first degree, is restricted to 140 m in case of tank on pool fire.

Pool Fire Due to Failure of Furnace Oil Storage tank 2

The maximum quantity of storage of furnace oil will be 500 KL. The most credible failure is the rupture of the largest pipe connecting the storage tank. As the worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition.

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m 2 (100% lethality) occurs within the radius of the pool which is computed at 53.8 m in case of furnace oil tank 2 on pool fire.

Based on the results of pool fire, it can be inferred that the vulnerable zone of 37.5 kW/m 2 intensity is likely to influence fuel storage and nearby area only.

The threshold limit for 50% and 1% lethality is 25.0 and 12.5 kW/m 2. From the results, it can be concluded that the vulnerable zone, in which the thermal fluxes above the threshold limit for 50% and 1% lethality, is restricted to 67.8 m and 100.6 m in case of tank on pool fire.

Similarly, the threshold limit for first degree burns is 4.5 kW/m 2; this vulnerable zone in which the thermal fluxes are above the threshold limit for first degree, is restricted to 180.2 m in case of tank on pool fire.

C10-30 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.7 Disaster Management Plan

10.7.1 Disasters

A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which, suddenly, people are plunged into helplessness and suffering and, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical and social care and other necessities of life.

Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, are disasters resulting from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges, cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires. The second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, or by man's impact upon the environment. Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents, radiation accidents, factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river pollution, mining or other structural collapses, air, sea, rail and road transport accidents and can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss.

There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract, since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social environment in which it occurs. What would be considered a major disaster in a developing country, ill-equipped to cope with the problems involved may not mean more than a temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local, national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes the search for the dead and injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris, the provision of temporary shelter for the homeless, food, clothing and medical supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of essential services.

10.7.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan [DMP]

The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage operations in the same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the DMP, it should be widely circulated and personnel training through rehearsals/drills should be organised.

The DMP should reflect the probable consequential severities of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through 'Knock on' effects. Further, the management should be able to demonstrate that its assessment of the consequences uses good supporting evidence and is based on currently available and reliable information, incident data from internal and external sources and, if necessary, the reports of external, independent, agencies.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-31 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate vicinity of the factory, a DMP has to be formulated and this planned emergency document is called "Disaster Management Plan".

The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the following:

 Effect the rescue and medical treatment of causalities

 Safeguard other people

 Minimise damage to property and the environment

 Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control

 Identify any dead

 Provide for the needs of relatives

 Provide authoritative information to the news media

 Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area

 Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the cause and circumstances of the emergency.

In effect, it is to optimise operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitation and render medical help and to restore normalcy.

10.8 Emergencies

10.8.1 General, Industrial, Emergencies

The emergencies that could be envisaged in the plant and tank farm are as follows:

 A situation of fire at the tank farm of all storages

 Slow isolated fires

 Fast spreading fires

 Structural failures

 Contamination of food/water

 Sabotage/Social disorder.

C10-32 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.8.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated

10.8.2.1 Fire and Explosion

Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve huge quantities of fuel either stored or in dynamic inventory in pipelines or in nearby areas. Toxic releases can affect persons working around. Preliminary Hazard Analysis has provided a basis for consequence estimation. Estimation can be made by using various pool fire, tank fire consequence calculations. During the study of Risk Assessment, the nature of damages is worked out and the probability of occurrence of such hazards is also drawn up. Therefore, the risk assessment report is to be essentially studied in conjunction with the Disaster Management Plan.

10.9 Emergency Organisation

It is recommended to set up or strengthen the Emergency Organisation. A senior executive who has control over the affairs of the plant would be heading the Emergency Organisation. He would be designated as Site Controller. As per the General Organisation chart, Resident Director would be designated as the Incident Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas, which are not under the control of the Production Heads, Senior Executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be designated as Incident Controller. All the Incident Controllers would be reporting to the Site Controller.

Each Incident Controller, for him, organises a team responsible for controlling the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift Incharge would be the reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incident Controller and Site Controller.

Emergency Co-ordinators would be appointed who would undertake the responsibilities like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide essential and support services. For this purpose, Security Incharge, Personnel Department, Essential services personnel would be engaged. All these personnel would be designated as key personnel.

In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house incharge, and other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of power or communication system failure, some of the staff members in the office/plant offices would be drafted and their services would be utilised as messengers for quick passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential personnel.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-33 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

10.9.1 Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc. shall inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Centre. The person on duty in the Emergency Control Centre shall appraise the Site Controller. Site Controller shall verify the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the Shift Incharge and shall decide about an impending On Site Emergency. This shall be communicated to all the Incident Controllers and Emergency Co-ordinators. Simultaneously, the emergency warning system shall be activated on the instructions of the Site Controller.

10.10 Emergency Responsibilities

The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below.

10.10.1 Site Controller

On receiving information about emergency, he would rush to Emergency Control Centre and take charge of ECC and the situation and assesses the magnitude of the situation on the advice of Incident Controller and would decide:

 Whether the affected area needs to be evacuated

 Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated

 About declaration of emergency and ordering the for operation of emergency siren

 To organise announcement by public address system about location of emergency

 To assess which areas are likely to be affected, or need to be evacuated or are to be alerted

 To maintain a continuous review of possible development and assess the situation in consultation with Incident Controller and other Key Personnel as to whether shutting down the plant or any section of the plant is required and if evacuation of persons is required

 To direct personnel for rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire, brigade, medical and other designated mutual support systems locally available, for meeting emergencies

C10-34 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 To control evacuation of affected areas, if the situation is likely to go out of control or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory to inform District Emergency Authority, Police, Hospital and seek their intervention and help

 To inform Inspector of Factories, Deputy Chief Inspector of Factories, TNPCB and other statutory authorities

 To give a public statement if necessary

 To keep a record of chronological events and prepare an investigation report and preserve evidence

 On completion of On Site Emergency and restoration of normalcy, to declare ‘all clear’ and order for ‘all clear’ signal.

10.10.2 Incident Controller

 Assembles the incident control team.

 Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to personnel, minimise damage to the plant, property and environment and minimise the loss of materials.

 Directs the shutting down and evacuation of plant and areas likely to be adversely affected by the emergency.

 Ensures that all key personnel’s help is sought.

 Provides advice and information to the Fire and Security Officer and the Local Fire Services as and when they arrive.

 Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected areas are evacuated to the appropriate assembly points, and the areas are searched for causalities.

 Has regard to the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any inquiry into the causes and circumstances, which caused or escalated the emergency.

 Co-ordinates with emergency services at the site.

 Provides tools and safety equipment to the team members.

 Keeps in touch with the team and advises them regarding the method of control to be used.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-35 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Keeps the Site Controller of Emergency informed of the progress being made.

10.10.3 Emergency Co-ordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting

 On knowing about emergency, rushes to ECC.

 Helps the Incident Controller in containment of the emergency.

 Ensures fire pumps in operating conditions and instructs pump house operator to be ready for any emergency with standby arrangement.

 Guides the fire fighting crew i.e. firemen, trained plant personnel and security staff.

 Organises shifting the fire fighting facilities to the emergency site, if required.

 Takes guidance of the Incident Controller for fire fighting as well as assesses the requirements of outside help.

 Arranges to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area.

 Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency operations under his guidance and supervision.

 Evacuates the people in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by Site Controller.

 Searches for casualties and arranges proper aid for them.

 Assembles a search and evacuation team.

 Arranges for safety equipment for the members of this team.

 Decides which paths the evacuated workers should follow.

 Maintains law and order in the area and, if necessary, seeks the help of police.

10.10.4 Emergency Co-ordinator - Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and Communication

 In the event of failure of electric supply and thereby internal telephone, sets up communication point and establishes contact with the Emergency Control Centre (ECC).

C10-36 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Organises medical treatment to the injured and, if necessary, arrange to shift the injured to nearby hospitals.

 Mobilises extra medical help from outside, if necessary.

 Keeps a list of qualified first aiders of the factory and seeks their assistance.

 Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements.

 Makes sure that all safety equipment is made available to the emergency team.

 Assists Site Controller with necessary data and to coordinate the emergency activities.

 Assists Site Controller in updating the emergency plan, organising mock drills, verification of inventory of emergency facilities and furnishing report to Site Controller.

 Maintains liaison with Civil Administration.

 Ensures availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation centre.

 He will liaise with Site Controller/Incident Controller.

 Ensures transportation facility.

 Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue/rehabilitation and emergency expenditure.

 Controls rehabilitation of affected areas on discontinuation of emergency.

 Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency operation.

10.10.5 Emergency Co-ordinator - Essential Services

 He would assist Site Controller and Incident Controller.

 Maintains essential services like Diesel Generator, Water, Fire Water, Compressed Air/Instrument Air and power supply for lighting.

 He would plan alternate facilities in the event of power failure, to maintain essential services such as lighting, refrigeration plant etc.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-37 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 He would organise separate electrical connections for all utilities and emergency services so that in the event of emergency or fires, essential services and utilities are not affected.

 Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation of certain sections etc. to shift in charge and electricians.

 Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipment and other emergency materials, spares etc.

10.10.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency

During an emergency, it becomes more enhanced and pronounced when an emergency warning is raised; the workers, if they are incharge of process equipment, should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend to any prescribed duty as essential employee. If no such responsibility is assigned, he should adopt a safe course to assembly point and await instructions. He should not resort to spread panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency personnel towards objectives of DMP.

10.11 Emergency Facilities

10.11.1 Emergency Control Centre (ECC)

TNPL has established an Emergency Control Centre. It has external telephone, telefax and telex facility. All the Site Controller/ Incident Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here.

The following information and equipment will be provided at the Emergency Control Centre (ECC):

 Intercom, telephone

 P and T telephone

 Safe contained breathing apparatus

 Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets

 Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indicators

 Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories

 (Internal, P and T) factory layout, site plan

 Emergency lamps/torch lights/batteries

C10-38 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, plant control room, sources of safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location, vulnerable zones, and escape routes

 Hazard chart

 Emergency shut-down procedures

 Nominal roll of employees

 List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of Emergency Co-ordinators

 Duties of key personnel

 Addresses with telephone numbers of key personnel, emergency coordinator, essential employees.

 Important addresses and telephone numbers including Government agencies, neighbouring industries and sources of help, outside experts, chemical fact sheets, population details around the factory.

10.11.2 Assembly Point

Number of assemblies depending upon the plant location would be identified wherein employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management would be assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus, minimum facilities like water etc. would be organised.

In view of the size of plant, different locations are earmarked as assembly points. Depending upon the location of hazard, the assembly points are to be used.

10.11.3 Emergency Power Supply

Plant facilities would be connected to Generator and would be placed in auto mode. Thus, water pumps, plant’s lighting and emergency control centre, administrative building and other auxiliary services are connected to emergency power supply. In all the blocks, flameproof type emergency lamps would be provided.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-39 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

10.11.4 Fire Fighting Facilities

First Aid and Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency are maintained well in each section in the plant. This would be developed according to the statutory requirements as well as per Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC) Regulations. However, fire hydrant line covering major areas has been laid. Fire alarms have been located in the bulk storage areas.

Existing Fire Fighting Facilities

The TNPL plant is already has adequate fire fighting facilities and the same will be used in post MEP also, after augmenting, if necessary.

10.11.5 Location of Wind Sock

Windsocks exist in the plant and the same will continue to be used after the implementation of the MEP also to indicate direction of wind for emergency escape.

10.11.6 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical burns, fire burns etc. will be maintained in the medical centre as well as in the emergency control room. Private medical practitioners’ help would be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.

Apart from plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names of medical personnel and medical facilities in the area would be prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of burns patients, and for those affected by toxicity would be maintained.

Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided and maintained. The help of nearby industrial managements in this regard would be taken on mutual support basis.

10.11.7 Ambulance

An ambulance with driver availability in all the shifts, emergency shift vehicle will be ensured and maintained to transport injured or affected persons. Many persons would be trained in first aid so that, in every shift, first aid personnel would be available.

C10-40 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.12 Emergency Actions

10.12.1 Emergency Warning

Communication of emergency will be made familiar to the personnel inside the plant and people outside. An emergency warning system has already been established in the plant.

10.12.2 Emergency Shutdown

There are a number of facilities which can be provided to help deal with hazardous conditions, when a tank is on fire. The suggested arrangements are:

 Stop feed

 Dilute contents

 Remove heat

 Deluge with water

 Transfer contents.

Whether a given method is appropriate depends on the particular case. Cessation of agitation may be the best action in some instances but not in others. Stopping of the feed may require the provision of by pass arrangements.

Methods of removing additional heat include removal through the normal cooling arrangements or use of an emergency cooling system. Cooling facilities, which use vaporising liquid, may be particularly effective, since a large increase in vaporisation can be obtained by dropping pressure.

10.12.3 Evacuation of Personnel

There could be more number of persons in the storage area and other areas in the vicinity. The area would have adequate number of exits and staircases. In the event of an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly point. Operators have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time Office maintains a copy of deployment of employees in each shift. If necessary, persons can be evacuated by rescue teams.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-41 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

10.12.4 All Clear Signal

Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and Emergency Co-ordinators, the Site Controller orders an all clear signal. When it becomes essential, the Site Controller communicates to the District Emergency Authority, Police, Fire Service personnel regarding help required or development of the situation into an Off-Site Emergency.

10.13 General

10.13.1 Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific pattern. Employees would be given training of escape routes, taking shelter, protecting from toxic effects. Employees would be provided with information related to fire hazards, antidotes and first aid measures. Those who would be designated as key personnel and essential employees should be given training in emergency response.

10.13.2 Public Information and Warning

The industrial disaster effects related to this plant may mostly be confined to the plant area. The detailed risk analysis has indicated that the pool fire effects would not be felt outside. However, as an abundant precaution, the information related to chemicals in use would be furnished to District Emergency Authority (normally the Collector) for necessary dissemination to general public and for any use during an off site emergency.

10.13.3 Co-ordination with Local Authorities

Keeping in view the nature of the emergency, two levels of co-ordination are proposed. In the case of an On Site Emergency, resources within the organisation would be mobilised and in the event of an extreme emergency, local authorities’ help should be sought.

In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority and District Emergency Authority (normally the Collector) would be apprised and under his supervision, the Off Site Disaster Management Plan would be exercised. For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport, personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organisations etc. would be mustered. Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills should be organised.

C10-42 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.13.4 Mutual Aid

Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc. should be sought from the neighbouring industrial managements.

10.13.5 Mock Drills

Emergency preparedness is an important part of planning in Industrial Disaster Management. Personnel are being trained suitably and prepared mentally and physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated procedures. Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel are being trained in the operations.

10.13.6 Important Information

Important information such as names and addresses of key personnel, essential employees, medical personnel, transporters’ addresses, addresses and phone numbers of those connected with Off Site Emergency such as Police, Local Authorities, Fire Services, District Emergency Authority are prepared and maintained.

The on-site emergency organisation chart for various emergencies is shown in Figure 10.5.

10.14 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the District Collector; however, the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.

10.14.1 Introduction

Off-site emergency plan follows the on-site emergency plan. When the consequences of an emergency situation go beyond the plant boundaries, it becomes an off-site emergency. Off-site emergency is essentially the responsibility of the public administration. However, the factory management will provide the public administration with the technical information relating to the nature, quantum and probable consequences on the neighbouring population.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-43 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The off-site plan in detail will be based on those events, which are most likely to occur, but other less likely events, which have severe consequence, will also be considered. Incidents, which have very severe consequences yet have a small probability of occurrence, should also be considered during the preparation of the plan. However, the key feature of a good off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the formation of the plan.

The roles of the various parties who will be involved in the implementation of an off-site plan are described below. Depending on local arrangements, the responsibility for the off-site plan should either rest with the works management or, with the local authority. Either way, the plan should identify an emergency co-ordinating officer, who would take the overall command of the off-site activities. As with the on-site plan, an emergency control centre should be set up within which the emergency co-ordinating officer can operate.

An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to people living "within range" of the accident; in particular, whether they should be evacuated or told to go indoor. In the latter case, the decision can regularly be reviewed in the event of an escalation of the incident. Consideration of evacuation may include the following factors:

 In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage tank), only houses close to the fire are likely to need evacuation, although a severe smoke hazard may require this to be reviewed periodically

 If a fire is escalating and in turn threatening a store of hazardous material, it might be necessary to evacuate people nearby, but only if there is time; if insufficient time exists, people should be advised to stay indoors and shield themselves from the fire

For release or potential release of toxic materials, limited evacuation may be appropriate down wind if there is time. The decision would depend partly on the type of housing "at risk". Conventional housing of solid construction with windows closed offers substantial protection from the effects of a toxic cloud, while shanty house, which can exist close to factories, offers little or no protection

C10-44 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

FIGURE 10.5 ON-SITE EMERGENCY ORGANISATION CHART

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-45 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

The major difference between releases of toxic and flammable materials is that toxic clouds are generally hazardous down to much lower concentrations and therefore hazardous over greater distances. Also, a toxic cloud drifting at, say, 300 m per minute, covers a large area of land very quickly. Any consideration of evacuation should take this into account. Although the plan will have sufficient flexibility built in to cover the consequences of the range of accidents identified for the on-site plan, it will cover in some detail the handling of the emergency to a particular distance from each major hazard works.

10.14.2 Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which should be included in the emergency plan, are:

Organisation

Details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures, emergency control centres.

Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their deputies and other key personnel.

Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication centre, call signs, network, lists of telephone numbers.

Specialised knowledge

Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call e.g. those with specialised chemical knowledge, laboratories.

Voluntary organisations

Details of organisers, telephone numbers, resources etc.

Chemical information

Details of the hazardous substances stored or processed on each site and a summary of the risk associated with them.

Meteorological information

Arrangements for obtaining details of weather conditions prevailing at the time and weather forecasts.

C10-46 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

Humanitarian arrangements

Transport, evacuation centres, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid, ambulances, temporary mortuaries.

Public information

Arrangements for (a) dealing with the media press office; (b) informing relatives, etc.

Assessment

Arrangements for: (a) collecting information on the causes of the emergency; (b) reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.

10.14.3 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer

The various emergency services should be co-ordinated by an emergency co-ordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the District Collector. The ECO should liaise closely with the Site Controller. Again, depending on local arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site consequences, the external control should be passed on to a senior local authority administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state government.

10.14.4 Role of the Local Authority

The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency planning officer (EPO) appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO should liase with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. This liaison should ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.

It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organisations, which will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be organised by the EPO.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-47 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

10.14.5 Role of Police

Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property and controlling traffic movements. Their functions should include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public, identifying the dead and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of dead or injured.

10.14.6 Role of Fire Authorities

The control of a fire should normally be the responsibility of the senior fire brigade officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer should also have a similar responsibility for other events, such as explosions and toxic release. Fire authorities in the region should be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment. They should be involved in on-site emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as observers of exercises involving on-site personnel.

10.14.7 Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and similar other persons/institutions should have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an integral part of the emergency plan.

For major fires, injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme cases may be generally available in most hospitals. For major toxic releases, the effects vary according to the chemical in question, and the health authorities should be apprised about the likely toxic releases from the plant, which will enable them to deal with the aftermath of a toxic release with treatment appropriate to such casualties.

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities in additional to those available locally, and a medical "mutual aid" scheme should exist to enable the assistance of neighbouring authorities to be obtained in the event of an emergency.

C10-48 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.14.8 Role of Government Safety Authority

This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to want to satisfy themselves that the organisation responsible for producing the off-site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented procedures and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.

In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watch to a close involvement in advising on operations. While the industry will activate the DMP and take necessary alleviating measures and arrange to extend all medical and security support, the factory inspectorate may be the only external agency with equipment and resources to carry out appropriate tests to assess the impact.

The action plan for handling offsite emergency is shown in Figure-10.6.

10.15 Occupational Health And Safety

Large industries, in general, where multifarious activities are involved during construction, erection, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance, the men, materials and machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons like socio-economic growth, improvements in infrastructural facilities and better facilities for education, industrialisation also raises issues of occupational health and safety.

The industrial planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take steps to mitigate minimise the adverse impacts of industrialisation and to ensure provision of appropriate and adequate occupational health and safety measures, including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under construction and erection, and operation and maintenance.

10.15.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and operation and maintenance phases. However, the events that occur vary both in magnitude and variety in the above phases.

Construction and Erection

The possible occupational health hazards envisaged at this stage may mainly be due to constructional accident and noise.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-49 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

To overcome these, in addition to arrangements to reduce the impacts within Threshold Limit Values (TLVs), personal protective equipment should also be supplied to construction workers.

Operation and Maintenance

The possible occupational health hazard, in the operation and maintenance phase, is hearing loss due to noise. Suitable personal protective equipments are provided to employees.

The working personnel should be given the following appropriate personal protective equipment.

 Industrial safety helmet

 Crash helmet

 Face shield with replaceable acrylic visor

 Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends

 Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue colour glasses

 Welder’s equipment for eye and face protection

 Cylindrical type earplug

 Ear muffs

 Canister gas mask

 Self contained breathing apparatus

 Leather apron

 Aluminised fibre glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves

 Boiler suit

 Safety belt/line man's safety belt

 Leather hand gloves

 Asbestos hand gloves

 Acid/Alkali proof rubberised hand gloves

C10-50 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palms

 Lead hand gloves

 Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves

 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe

The existing hospital facilities should be made available round the clock for attending to emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel should be medically examined at least once every year and at the end of the term of their employment. This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.

Meeting this requirement, TNPL has a well organised First Aid Medical Centre for tackling any kind of emergency. As per the Factories Act, the First Aid Medical Centre has three doctors for 1602 employees. In addition, seven paramedical staffs are available at the centre on round the clock basis.

Chlorine is a hazardous chemical, which is being used for bleaching of pulp in the factory premises. In the event of chlorine leak or burst in the chlorine handling system, the First Aid Medical Centre is provided with one NEBULISER unit with SALBUTAMOL solution to the employees having difficulty in breathing caused by accidental chlorine inhalation. TNPL is also keeping emergency Oxygen set up unit in the ambulance itself.

The First Aid Medical Centre of TNPL is the only Medical Centre in and around Karur, Erode and Namakkal Districts having the facility of computerised ECG machine with recording arrangements for its employees and their family members. (The unit is available round the clock on emergency basis). First Aid Medical Centre of TNPL is provided with an Instant blood sugar testing facility for controlling and monitoring diabetes among its employees.

TNPL has planned to modernise one of the two ambulances into a pucca Mobile Intensive Care Unit.

It is planned to start PHYSIOTHERAPHY in the First Aid Medical Centre soon.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-51 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

10.15.2 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of concern. The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is known as emergency plan.

TNPL already has a proper safety plan and the same will be made available during construction, operation and maintenance phases of the proposed modernisation of the plant with the following regulations:

 To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work.

 To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and equipment.

 To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees.

 To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing, and to ensure their proper use.

 To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their work, which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety.

 To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up-to-date knowledge.

 To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness at work.

 To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is given to these matters.

 To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this service.

 To organise collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness and incident involving personal injury or injury to health with a view to take corrective, remedial and preventive action.

C10-52 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

 To promote, through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees.

 To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language of employees.

 To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/ processes involved in a project.

 To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all buildings, equipment, work places and operations.

10.15.3 Safety Organisation

Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer should be appointed. The responsibilities of the safety officers include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organise training programmes and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of a safety officer by TNPL, every contractor, who employs more than 250 workers, should also employ one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of contract.

Operation and Maintenance Phase

When the construction is completed, the posting of safety officers should be in accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and responsibilities should be as defined thereof.

10.15.4 Safety Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from that area. The circle normally should meet for about an hour every week.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-53 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

FIGURE 10.6 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

C10-54 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

10.15.5 Safety Training

A full-fledged training centre already exists the plant. Safety training is being provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called from Corporate Centre, Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular employees, limited contractor labour should also be provided safety training. To create safety awareness, safety films should be shown to workers and leaflets and literature should be distributed. Some precautions and remedial measures to be adopted to prevent fires are given below:

 Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable passages and crevices in all directions would help in localising and identifying the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and manual fire fighting operations

 Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for cable shafts

 Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries

 Housekeeping of a high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting

 Proper fire watching by all concerned should be ensured.

10.15.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

All the potential occupational hazardous work places such as acid and alkali storage areas should be monitored regularly. The health of employees working in these areas should be monitored once a year for early detection of any ailment due to exposure to hazardous chemicals.

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-55 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C10-56 (This page intentionally left blank)

C10-56 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

11 SOURCES OF DATA AND INFORMATION

The secondary data and information for preparation of the Environmental Impact Assessment Report for the proposed Mill Expansion Plan of TNPL have been collected from various government departments and other agencies and sourced from various reports, as mentioned below.

 Detailed Project Report of Mill Expansion Plan including Layout plan

 Metereological data from India Meteorological Department (IMD), Pune

 Census and Land use pattern data from District census handbooks of Karur and Namakkal Districts of Tamil Nadu

 Agricultural statistics of Tamil Nadu state, Chennai

 Agricultural statistics of Karur and Namakkal districts

 Geological data from District gazettes for Karur and Namakkal Districts

 Primary Census Abstract 2001 of Census of India, Office of Registrar General of India, New Delhi

 Toposheets of Survey of India, New Delhi

 EIA Guidelines of Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board, Chennai

 EIA Guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi

 USEPA Guidelines for testing and analysis

 On Site Meteorological Program Guidance for Regulatory Modelling Applications, US-EPA

 Heat Radiation programme RADN equations compiled from various literature by Prof.J.P.Gupta, Department of Chemical Engineering, IIT Kanpur

 Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards, Developed by World Bank

 Material Safety Data Sheets of Indian Chemical Manufacturers Association

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C11-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Guidelines and Testing Methods of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), New Delhi

 Guidelines and Testing Methods of Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi

 Soil Chemistry Analysis by ML Jackson

 Spatial distribution of hourly mixing depth over Indian Region, RL Gupta

 Handbook of American Standard Testing Methods (ASTM)

 Guidelines of Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP)

 Groundwater level data from State groundwater board, Tamil Nadu

 River flow data from Central Water Commission

 District profile data from National Informatics Centre, New Delhi.

C11-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited EIA Study

12 REFERENCES

 New ‘Environmental Impact Assessment’ notification S.O. 1533 dated 14 th September, 2006 and its addenda

 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Environment (Protection) Rules (1989) issued there under including the Public Hearing Gazette Notification of 10th April, 1997

 Environmental Guidelines for siting of Industries, 1985 and Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of development projects: Background Note, February 1989, MoEF

 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, as amended in 1987

 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 as amended in 1978 and 1988

 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 as amended in 1991

 Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991

 Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 and the rules framed thereunder

 The Forest (Conservation) Rules, 1981, later Amendments, Notifications and Guidelines issued thereunder

 Indian Factories Act, 1948 (As amended by Act 20 of 1987)

 Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989, Amended Rules, 2003

 National ambient air quality standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board vide Gazette Notification dated 11 th April 1994

 The wastewater discharge standards as per ‘EPA Notification (GSR 91(E), dated 24 th Oct 1989)

 The maximum permissible limits for source emission, as per ‘EPA Notification (GSR 91(E), dated 24 th Oct 1989)

 Ambient Air Quality – Standards for Noise-as per Section 17(1) (g) of the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981, as amended in 1987

Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited C12-1 EIA Study Tamil Nadu Newsprint and Papers Limited

 Ambient standards with respect to noise notified by the MoEF vide gazette notification dated 26 th December 1989 and as amended in February 2000

 Noise standards in the work environment as specified by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA-USA), which, in turn, is enforced by Government of India through model rules framed under Factories Act

 Regulations, Standards and Conditions laid down by The Tamil Nadu Pollution Control Board (TNPCB)

 Standards for Chlorine Emission dated 29.08.1991

 Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection (CREP)

 Standard methods for air samples specified by Central Pollution Control Board(CPCB), IS:5184 and American Public Health Association (APHA)

 Modified West and Gaeke method (IS-5182 Part-II,1969) for

estimation of SO 2 and Jacobs-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 Part-IV,1975) for estimation of NOx

 Standards for drinking water as per IS:10500-1983

 Treated Effluent Standards laid down in GSR-422

 Storage, Handling and Transportation Rules of EPA, 1989.

C12-2 Prepared by SPB-PC & Vimta Labs Limited